Home

Mandatory facilities of ESP-r

1. Type U value g value t value W mK Pane 4 16Ar LwE6 1 09 0 37 0 67 Frame Aluminium wood 281 2 3 Window 1 43 0 30 0 54 gp m 1000 s BY i 1000 J 7 9 B i Hn 2100 Figure 33 An elevation and a sectional elevation of the window and shading used in the IT University of Copenhagen All the dimensions are in mm The shading mounted on the on the top window is a Venetian blind with a shading factor of 0 30 The U value including the linear thermal transmittance Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 49 A presentation of the IT University of Copenhagen 12 2 The casual gains and plant defined in the model It is an office for one person and the included internal casual gains are listed in Table 7 Table 7 The included internal heat gains from occupants equipment and lighting Load Description Load Occupants 1 person of 100 W Equipment computer 100 W per person General lighting ighti A low energy Desk lamp The infiltration rate is set to 0 3 h and the ventilation rate is set to approximately 2 h The maximum and minimum heating and cooling capacity of the heating and cooling coil is set to 5000 W and 0 W respectively The control type for the mechanical ventilation system with heat recovery is set to proportional control and the set point temperature for the different periods for heating and cooling of the
2. Name Fluid Type Volume Height Temperature above datum of node m m internal NW1 air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor 3 44G internal NW2 air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor 3 44G fan in air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor _3 44G fan out air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor 3 44G heater air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor_3 44G cooler air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor 3 44G duct out air internal unknown 0 16 0 kontor 3 44G 23 2 1 5 2 Adding components Components are added via the menu item component in the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 129 Several components as openable window component fan and ducts to represent the components in the mechanical ventilation system are added The Components menu cf Figure 132 is entered via the menu item component in the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 129 a component is added by selecting the menu item add delete copy component cf Figure 132 add the component is named Window_low and epee index 110 cf Figure 133 is used to represent the window the opening area is set to 0 105 m Components Name ITypel Description add delete copy component Help Exit Figure 132 The content of the Components menu where components can be added deleted or copied ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 172
3. network facility The connections defined in the plant amp The connections defined in the fluid flow system facility network facility Sending Receiving node ve to node ve Via component component component sup fan heat ex external NW internal NWI duct 1 heat _ex heat coil internal NW1 heater duct 2 heat coil sup fan heater fan in fan sup_fan cool coil fan in cooler duct_7 cool coil duct 1 cooler duct in duct 3 duct_1 duct 2 duct_in kontor 3 44G duct_4 duct 2 duct 3 kontor 3 44G duct out duct 5 duct 3 duct 4 duct out fan out duct 6 duct 4 ret fan fan out internal NW2 fan ret fan heat ex internal NW2 external NW duct 1 23 2 2 8 5 Link the plant system to the zone kontor_3 44G The defined mechanical ventilation system is linked to the zone kontor_3 44G The linkage is added by selecting the menu item Link plant to zone s in the Network definition edit menu cf Figure 137 The link to the zone kontor_3 44G is added by selecting the menu item Add Delete Copy cf Figure 146 Add the zone kontor_3 44G is selected the linkage between the zone and the plant is set to convective the component which links the plant to the zone is duct_1 and the component which extract air from the zone is set to duct_2 Linkages connected
4. Networks Component type amp description 10 Power law vol flow component m rho a dP b 15 Power law mass flow component m a dP b 17 Power law mass flow component m a rho 5 dP b 20 Quadratic law vol flow component dP a m rhotb m rho 2 25 t Quadratic law mass flow component dP a mtb m 2 30 Constant vol flow rate component m rho a 35 Constant mass flow rate component m a 40 Common orifice vol flow rate comp m rho f Cd A rho dP 50 Laminar pipe vol flow rate comp m rho f L R mu dP 110 Specific air flow opening m rho f A dP Specific air flow crack m rho f l L dP Specific air flow door m rho f ll H dP General flow conduit component m rho f D A L k SCi Conduit ending in converging 3 leg junction amp Cep ffq qe Conduit starts in diverging 3 leg junction amp Cep flq qe Conduit ending in converging 4 leg junction amp Cep f q qc Conduit starts in diverging 4 leg junction amp Cep ffq qe General flow inducer component dP a0 Sai m rho i General flow corrector component m rho f comp signal Corrector with polynomial flow resistance C f H HLO0 Fixed flow rates controller CFD component Lc tS OS BR wre es TO HMAC SY M Ow t t t t t HH tt HH tt HH HH HH FH FH FH HH HH HF 500 Figure 133 The different available flow components for a defining an all air network ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The other comp
5. T T T T T T T 0 0 50 0 100 0 150 0 200 0 250 0 300 0 3500 Azimuth 0 North 180 South Figure 97 The Mercator sun plot indicating the apparent position of the sun on the sky on 1 Jul for the Danish Design Reference Year ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The building model can be viewed in two different ways when using the menu item View sun site plan cf Figure 96 The site plan shows the zones in bold and obstructions as thin lines The sun view places the viewer at a distance of one kilometre from the building model and the azimuth and elevation of the sun When using the sun view the sun up hours can be viewed in time steps for a given day in a month 19 2 1 2 The shading facility This paragraph deals with the calculation editing and viewing facility of analysing shading within ESP r and the items described are menu items f g and h in Figure 96 The shading analysis calculates the temporal shading pattern on the outside facing surfaces The menu item Calculate shading cf Figure 96 can be done for all applicable surfaces and via manual surface selection The button all applicable surfaces in the dialog box calculate shading on all outside facing transparent and opaque surfaces In the latter selection alternative the outside facing surfaces with interest can be selected for calculation Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 127 Shading and insolation e The Edit import ex
6. The control type used is ideal dimming and the calculation type is set to daylight coefficients The artificial lighting level is set keep at a minimum of 200 lux and the lighting is switched off at 300 lux The level to which the heat gain can be dimmed is set to 0 lux which is equal to 0 of the casual gain defined in the operation facility Photocells are placed at two positions in the office ceiling facing down The placement of the photocells differs from normal placement of photocells for ideal dimmed control This is done in order for the light in the ceiling to be control after the actual conditions Both photocells are place in the middle of the two partitions NE_part and SW_part The first photocell is placed 1 metre from the external wall NW_ext_wall and the second photocell is place 1 metre from the partition SE_part 22 2 Advanced integrated thermal and lighting simulation The modelling of utilization of daylight in buildings requires an accurate prediction of time varying internal illuminance distribution against blind shutter movements and sky luminance changes Janak et al 1999 This paragraph describes an advanced and time consuming integrated thermal and lighting simulation and a less time consuming pre simulation of daylight coefficients calculated via the Tragenza method Experience with the program has resulted in that there are problems using this facility in the present version of ESP r version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 but the
7. Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 105 Definition of zones Surface topology of kontor_3 446 enclosuret properly bounded Surface INo IVerts anti clk name lvertlfrom outside a Sli_part 5 1228 6 5 b SE_part 6 28 27 26 3 7 c NE_part 43 48 7 d NWlext_wall 10 4 1 5 8 4 e ceiling 45 67 8 f floor 5 14 326 2 g SE_door 4 910 11 12 h N_frame 16 13 14 22 21 24 i Nul_win_low 417 18 19 20 j NW_win_up 4 21 22 23 24 k Part_kon PE 10 2 26 27 28 2 add insert copy a surface delete a surface transforms browse surface vertex topology check surface vertex topology help exit to zone definition menu Il Vm vw He Figure 79 The content of the Surface topology of menu where the problem edges are solved and the message in the top of the menu is changed from enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES to as enclosure properly bounded for the zone kontor_3 44G ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Vertex 25 is no longer used and can be deleted by selecting the menu item vertex coordinates in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 pp 94 add delete copy replicate edit delete vertex number 25 exit exit and save vertex changes 14 4 3 2 Coping deleting and modifying surfaces in the zone PE The surface Surf 4 in the zone PE needs to be deleted and this is done by selecting the menu item surface list amp edges in the Zone Composition
8. 16 007 owdn 14 007 12 007 10 007 T T T T T T T 1 0 6 Time Hrs Figure 12 The content of the Time var graph facility and the illustration of the mean radiant temperature at the defined MRT sensor locations ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 As can be seen from Figure 12 the mean radiant temperature kontor_3 44G S 1 MRT and kontor_3 44G S 2 MRT or placed on to of each other is almost identical for the two sensor locations This is further analyses in paragraph 26 1 4 3 1 2 Modelling Radiance daylight coefficients for simulation purposes The daylight coefficient method is based on the Tragenza method which subdivides the sky vault into 145 elements and calculates a coefficient for each element with an arbitrary luminance imposed Janak et al 1999 The purpose of this facility is to set up ideal dimming control for artificial lighting The first of the two photocells sensing the lighting level in the zone is placed 1 metre from the window and the second is placed approximately 3 metres from the window Both sensors are placed at room height facing down and with an equal distance to the two partitions NE_part and SW_part The control data for the photocell is The photocell lux set point is set to 200 lux The switch off lighting level set point is set to 300 lux The minimum dimming light output is set to 0 lux The minimum electrical dimming light output and switch off delay time is set to 0 The Radiance mod
9. 7 gt Paget 1 of 2 import add delete copy element list optical properties db help exit this menu Figure 55 The list of the panes available in the optical database optics db1 The options for editing appear at the bottom of the list ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The contents of the database optics db1 take up more space than one page and the list can be leafed through by choosing the menu item Page 1 of 2 cf Figure 55 The menu item import add delete copy cf Figure 55 is used as short cut to control the contents of the list and is referred to in the following paragraphs 13 7 3 1 Import pane files It is emphasized that the import method in this section is only relevant to American products that are calculated according to the NFRC ASHRAE standard as ESP r at the time only can import data from a Window 4 1 file format To import a Window 4 1 file the menu item import add delete copy cf Figure 55 and the button Import is selected in the dialog box The path and filename of the Window 4 1 file is entered If the path and filename has been correctly entered the graphs of the optical properties of the window are displayed in the graphical feedback window and its data is listed in the Optical Property Set menu cf Figure 56 In the same figure it also appears that glass layers can be added deleted and copied cf paragraph 13 7 3 2 for adding a low energy pane Investigation and impl
10. Project _name images contains the image files 7 3 Invoking help It is possible to invoke help from two different places in the Project Manager of ESP r and get assistance e All menus with the menu item help discuss issues related to the contents of the selected menu as a whole e Help for entering text or numbers can be obtained by selecting the button in the dialog box It is also possible within the program to access the ESP r tutorial for help It requires that the workstation is connected to the Internet and the application is located in the button right hand corner of the active window cf Figure 16 pp 34 The help which can be obtained from the tutorial can give one an impression on the types of design issues that can be addressed in ESP r and the overall objective of the design issues 8 Interface details of ESP r The interface is constructed of several windows that open each time a new module is activated from the Project Manager The following sub paragraphs can enlarge the insight and the interaction with the facilities in the interface and support user habits 8 1 Screen mode graphic text ESP r normally begins in graphic mode cf Figure 16 but it is also possible to use ESP r in text mode by executing the command prj mode text cf Figure 17 The manual will only focus on the graphic version of ESP r Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 33 Interface det
11. the external node is named external_NW the node is a boundary node with wind induced pressure and the button boundary wind induced is selected in the dialog box for kontor_3 44G surface NW_win_low the pressure coefficient set is set to a 2 1 semi exposed long wall 2 1 indicates width to height ratio the azimuth angle at 279 is accepted and the node height above datum ground level is set to 13 43 m which is equal to the height above datum used for the internal flow node kontor_3 44G for the zone Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 171 Networks A new internal node representing the inlet of a duct is added to the network from the Nodes menu cf Figure 131 via the menu item add delete copy node cf Figure 131 add the internal node is named duct_in the node is defined as an air node the node type and pressure is set to internal unknown the node is not associated with a zone the node volume is set to 0 m the reference height is set to 16 m the node temperature is set to Set temperature of another node and the associated node is kontor_3 44G The rest of the nodes are added in the same way as the node duct_in and according to the data is listed in Table 28 Table 28 The data for the remaining nodes The construction of the nodes is done in the same way as the node duct_in was constructed
12. 1h00 Sat 9 12 7 9h00 Sat 23 3 8 All 6 4 20h00 Sun 8 Jan 27 7 12h00 Mon 17 Jul 9 5 Typical winter week begins Monday 6 Feb Typical spring week begins Monday 17 April Typical summer week begins Monday 3 July Typical autumn week begins Monday 2 October Typical winter week begins Monday 20 November help_end nikam Figure 40 The content of the file climatelist located in the folder usr esru esp r climate The content of this file is listed when the user chooses to study the climate documentation when selecting a climate database in Figure 36 The various lines in the file in Figure 40 have the following meaning e group Headings for the different climate databases designation The designation of the climate databases shown in the list in the climate database lt 32 signs aide A short description of the climate databases lt 32 signs e dbfl The path to the climate databases and its filename e avail If the database is accessible the line contains the word ONLINE if not the word OFFLINE is present e season_s season for winter spring and summer Date and month specifications of when seasons begin and end spring_s covers both spring and autumn e season_t Season for winter spring and summer Date and month specifications of the beginning and end of a typical week of the season in question spring_t covers both spring and autumn help_start The typical maximum and minimum temperatures
13. The zone geometry described in paragraph 12 is used to construct the ITUC building and the construction of the office is based on internal dimensions Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 95 Definition of zones The menu item commence new is selected from the Entry Level menu of the Project Manager cf Figure 64 and the following data is entered e The system configuration name is set to ituc and the following subdirectories to the model will be established o ituc parent directory ituc cfg system files ituc ctl control files ituc zones zone files ituc nets networks files ituc doc report and note files ituc temp files containing information on materials which changes thermophysical properties in a simulation o ituc dbs project libraries o ituc rad radiance connected files o ituc images image files e A brief description of the model is entered as IT University of Copenhagen as constructed in the Bsim2000 tutorial e The project log file ituc log is created to contain the descriptive text about the model The file can be edited to contain all important information about the building but is not e No images are associated e Site latitude is set to 55 4 for the Danish Design Reference Year e Longitude difference from the nearest local time meridian is set to 2 81 for the Danish Design Reference Year e The associated year for schedules and assessment is
14. menu where the data described in this paragraph for the internal view can be seen ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The scene is now ready for calculation and presentation on the screen The following procedure is used to calculate the scene the menu item calculate view scene cf Figure 107 render the scene cf Figure 114 the view kontor_in exit and displayed to the screen is selected The scene is thereafter displayed in colours on the screen cf Figure 116 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 146 Lighting analysis and visualization Figure 116 A visualisation result performed by Radiance for the ITUC building The exposure of the image is adjusted to present a similar indoor visibility to what would be expected in a real environment ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 21 3 Example daylight factor calculation This paragraph is included in order to illustrate how daylight coefficients are calculated This is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial either This paragraph includes a number of not illustrated images and is therefore best understood when working with the program Most of the selections for defined grid surfaces vertices and file names happen in the dialog box The preliminary steps in this paragraph are similar to the steps in paragraph 21 2 except from that the prefix of the Radiance scene files and scene configuration file are set to ituc_df
15. rho a 35 Constant mass flow rate component m a 40 Common orifice vol flow rate comp m rho f Cd A rho dP 50 Laminar pipe vol flow rate comp m rho f L R mu dP 110 Specific air flow opening m rho f A dP Specific air flow crack m rho f ll L dP 130 Specific air flow door m rho f ll H dP General flow conduit component m rho f D A L k SCi Conduit ending in converging 3 leg junction amp Cep ffq qe Conduit starts in diverging 3 leg junction amp Cep flq qe Conduit ending in converging 4 leg junction amp Cep f q qc Conduit starts in diverging 4 leg junction amp Cep ffq qe General flow inducer component dP a0 Sai m rho i General flow corrector component m rho f comp signal Corrector with polynomial flow resistance C f H HLO0 Fixed flow rates controller CFD component ccrtene tT oV OSD BR wre es TO HMTACT HY M t t t t HH HH t HH HH HH tt tt tt FH HH HH HH HH FF 500 Figure 125 The different flow components available for defining an all air fluid flow network ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Power law flow component type 10 15 and 17 Power law relationships are correlations rather than physical laws It is a convenient way to characterize openings for building air infiltration calculation via this relationship The power law can also be used to describe flows through ducts and pipes albeit to a lesser accuracy than using component type 210 Hensen
16. window 4 1 5 1 The Infrared longwave emittance of the glazing layer interior facing side window 4 1 5 1 The total solar energy transmittance g WIS The fluid mass flow rate through the component kg s The pressure loss across the component Pa A photocell is a sensor that only senses illuminance level lux The refraction index for the panes and gas The solar reflectance of the outside glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The visible reflectance of the outside glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 Solar direct reflectance on the outdoor side WIS The solar reflectance of the exterior facing glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The solar reflectance of the interior facing glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The visible reflectance of the exterior facing glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The visible reflectance of the interior facing glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 A sensor senses the property of interest for example time temperature relative humidity and illuminance level The solar heat gain coefficient of the total window system representing the solar heat gain through the window system relative to the incident radiation g value window 4 1 5 1 The specularity index describes how the light is reflected from the surface The shading table calculated in ECOTECT s sun path diagram represents how much of a surface is shaded from the DIRECT SUN at any date time This is quite different from both a sh
17. 10 4 23 Dec 2002 22 1 5 Control algorithm data A number of control algorithm data the menu item Control data in Figure 120 is required in order to use the casual gain control facility Five numerical inputs are expected Photocell set point lux Switch off light reference level ratio of the photocell set point Minimum light dimming ratio of full light output Minimum electric gain dimming output ratio of the full circuit power Switch off delay time The time in which the control algorithm will wait before switching off the light A 5 or 30 minutes delay can be used when short simulation time steps are used 4 150 equals a ratio of 1 5 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 154 Casual gain control Lighting control 22 1 6 Photocell data The casual gain distribution to the lighting zone and the number of photocells in that lighting zone is expected as input e The casual gain portion associated to a lighting zone is expressed as a ratio where 50 equals a ratio of 0 5 e Number of photocells in a lighting zone maximum 9 If more than one photocell is used an average of all photocell illuminance will be used for control ESRU Report 2001 Multiple lighting photocells are used to account for a variance in illuminance Table 24 lists additional input data needed for the defined calculation type The additional data has to be defined for photocells
18. 11 2 Strategy Of Using ESP V sccscsscsssscsesssscssscssscessssscssesseesssssssessssssssesessssesssssessscssensesnsecnseesssesenessnsssoessoese 45 12 A PRESENTATION OF THE IT UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN 0005 47 12 1 The constructions USE cscssscscsscssscsssssssesssersessessssssssesensssnessesssessseeseessensssesecnseensessssssssessssccasscssonseees 48 12 2 The casual gains and plant defined in the model scsscssssssssssssssccsscssesssecssessesssecsssesssesssessseessesssnseees 50 13 DATABASES E A A A A E P ores a cae tec oh Stee rash tbe oh tie 51 13 1 Standard and User Databases siccsocsscsssssosnssseseasessoseneoses soeseesesaassevesuasscossesns Sooseevonasesesesuadescess ones sosoaseosessosasssssesenes 52 13 1 1 Establishing user databases ccssssssesssssscessesssessesscessoesensconscossensesnsesnssssesssessssssessoesueesenssossconsensesnseans 52 13 2 Whe climate database occas ccssssiccssscocsccoess sovcevunes socecesces soustenssechcscvas sosossdunnsssveccnness ioo oo orie shosdeaess seasseunes sbaecsanssteseees 52 13 2 1 Thedefault sky distribution smode erin e wen desdectieedevetaovins aketid este EE 53 13 2 2 Looking through or editing the climate database ccsccesccesecsseeseeeseeseeeseeeeeceseceseeeeenseenseeeaeenseenaeenseeees 54 13 2 3 Installing anew climate database mocone or hea sew ie awd eens eee eaten 56 13 2 4 Addition of climate databases to the list in the clima
19. 14 f surface attributes g solar distribution h solar obstruction i rotation amp transforms J list surface details gt update zone info gt problem t reporting gt silent 2 help exit this menu Figure 68 The content of the Zone Composition menu where the compositions of surface construction editing of surface vertices adding of solar obstructions etc can be performed ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Within this menu the zone name description vertices surfaces etc can be altered The menu items in Figure 68 allow the attributes of the thermal zone to be specified The content of the important menu items in Figure 68 are described below e vertex coordinates X Y Z coordinates of vertices in the zone and the option to add delete copy and transform these The number in brackets illustrated the amount of vertices defined for the zone e surface list amp edges The vertex order of each surface and gives the option to add delete copy and transform these New surfaces can also be composed or import from other zones A vertex is the point where two bounding lines intersect Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 94 Definition of zones e surface attributes Establishment of name composition and boundary conditions for the surfaces e solar distribution The solar distribution can be changed from the default dynamic distribution defined in
20. 1991 Quadratic law flow component type 20 and 25 According to Hensen 1991 air flow through building fabric infiltration openings is better described by quadratic relationships between the pressure across the component i e opening and flow rate In these flow equations unlike type 10 15 and 17 the flow is divided in a laminar and turbulent part Constant flow rate component type 30 and 35 In many fluid flow network problem descriptions it is convenient to have a constant flow rate component type available e g for describing a constant air change rate in a ventilation system Common orifice flow component type 40 A basic expression for turbulent flow through relatively large openings e g a purposely provided vent in case of building air flow modelling or in a pipe in case of a hydronic network Hensen 1991 Laminar pipe flow component type 50 A basic expression for laminar flow through openings with relatively long flow paths e g narrow cracks in case of building air flow modelling or fluid flow at low velocity in case of a hydronic network Hensen 1991 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 165 Networks Specific air flow components type 110 120 and 130 These types can only be used with the fluid flow type air e Type 110 is identical to type 40 with the fluid type air and where the discharge factor Cg is set to 0 65 This type is convenient for use wit
21. 2 10 and 2 0 metres The name of the surface is set to NW_frame and the composition is set to Frame_Alu_W The linear thermal transmittance between the pane and the frame is added to the U value for the frame cf paragraph 14 3 and appendix 2 The lower pane is added via the menu item surface attributes in the Zones Composition menu cf Figure 68 NW_frame add glazing door opening and the pane is placed within sutface The X offset Z offset cf Figure 73 width and height of the pane is set to 0 07 0 07 1 96 and 0 86 metres The name of the new surface is set to NW_win_low and the composition is set to 4 16Ar LwE6 The vertex for the pane to connect to is set to the lower left hand corner of the frame The upper pane is added via the same procedure The X offset Z offset cf Figure 73 width and height is set to 0 07 1 07 1 96 and 0 86 metres The name of the new surface is set to NW_win_up and the composition is set to 4 16Ar LwE6c Since there is already another surface included in the frame the corner for the upper pane to connect to is set to the lower right hand corner of the frame The internal door is added via the menu item surface attributes in the Zones Composition menu cf Figure 68 SE_part add glazing door opening and the door are placed within sutface The coordinates X offset Z offset cf Figure 73 width and height of the door is set to 0 048 0 03 1 00 and 2 2 metres The name of the
22. 23 24 25 air mixing box or converging junction 1 node model spray steam humidifier 1 node model flow rate control centrifugal fan 1 node model flow control air cooling coil 1 node model flux control air heating coilt 1 node model flux control air duct 1 node model air duct damper 1 node model flow ratio control air cooling coil 1 node model water mass flow rate control air heating coilt 1 node model water mass flow rate control air air plate heat exchanger 2 node model non condensing domestic WCH boiler 1 node model domestic hot water radiator YO 2 m 2 2 node model WCH pipet 1 node model WCH pipe converging 2 leg junction 1 node model variable speed domestic WCH pump 1 node model condensing boiler amp ON OFF control 2 node model non condensing boiler amp aquastat control 2 node IEA Annex X model domestic hot water radiator VO 2 m 2 8 node model Single node water cooler with flux control air cooling coil fed by WCH system 3 node model air heating coil fed by WCH system 3 node model thermostatic radiator valve 1 node sensor model mechanical room thermostat 1 node sensor model air amp water temperature source imaginary building like plant load Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 72 Databases Figure 52 An extract of a part of the contents of the plant component database plantc db1 in which there are 55 comp
23. APPENDIX 1 THERMOPHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS APPENDIX 2 COMPOSITION OF CONSTRUCTIONS APPENDIX 3 FORMULAS Surface pressure Wind reduction factor APPENDIX 4 MAILS ESRU April 2003 The Perez model window framing and thermal bridges Nielsen T R June 2003 APPENDIX 5 INSTALLING ESP R CLIMATE DATABASES The EPW file format The text file format APPENDIX 6 THE SOURCE CODE OF THE MAKEFILE COMMAND APPENDIX 7 WORKING SYSTEM FILES FOR LINUX AND UNIX APPENDIX 8 LINDAB LINDABSAFE CIRCULAR DUCTS APPENDIX 9 OUTPUT FROM WIS FOR THE PANE WITHOUT SHADING APPENDIX 10 OUTPUT FROM WIS FOR THE PANE WITH SHADING APPENDIX 11 A DESCRIPTION OF THE RVIEW FILE APPENDIX 12 PLANT amp SYSTEMS COMPONENT DATA APPENDIX 13 AIR FLOW NETWORK COMPONENT DATA APPENDIX 14 EXHAUSTO VEX 140 AIR HANDLING UNIT APPENDIX 15 EXHAUSTO CU 140 COOLING UNIT Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r x Introduction 1 Introduction The background and purpose of the master thesis described in paragraph 1 1 and 1 2 and the method used to write it is included in paragraph 1 3 1 1 Background The construction of large office buildings with large glazing areas or double skin facades is getting more and more widely spread In consideration to the energy consumption and the indoor thermal environment the design engineers should have access to tools that can perform detailed and accurate calculation on the involved
24. Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 173 Networks The other connections within the air flow network are added via the same procedure and the data used is based on Figure 130 is listed in Table 29 Table 29 The defined connections in the fluid flow network Refer to formula 4 and 5 for the calculation of the relative height from nodes to the component Node ve Node ve Node ve Node ve Component relative height to relative height to component component m m kontor_3 44G 0 93 external NW 0 93 window_low kontor_3 44G 0 07 external NW 0 07 window _up external NW 2 57 internal NW 1 0 0 duct 1 internal NW1 0 0 heater 0 0 duct 2 heater 0 0 fan in 0 0 fan fan in 0 0 cooler 0 0 duct_7 cooler 0 0 duct in 0 0 duct 3 duct_in 0 0 kontor_3 44G 2 57 duct 4 kontor 3 44G 2 57 duct out 0 0 duct 5 duct out 0 0 fan out 0 0 duct 6 fan out 0 0 internal NW2 0 0 fan internal NW2 0 0 external NW 2 57 duct 1 23 2 1 5 4 Calculating the wind reduction factor The wind reduction factor is calculated by selecting the menu item set wind reduction factor from the Fluid flow Network menu cf Figure 123 The current value 1 00 of wind reduction index is edited and is calculated via the Power law The zone containing the roof is set to kontor_3 44G gt the
25. Version 10 4 ESP r Project Manager Version 4 40a of December 2002 Copyright 2001 Energy Systems Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Entry Level a introduction to esp r f export current model b database maintenance g archive current model project definition h validation exemplars i reporting gt gt summary select existing j tool set up commence new help exit Project Manager I OANA Entry Level gt End of Project Manager session Figure 17 The ESP r text interface ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The window in the upper left hand is where the graphic feedback is drawn The window in the upper right hand is the menu containing different menu item that issues different facilities which can be selected after choice During the construction of components different selection option will be listed in this menu focusing on the actual subject Text and numbers are entered in the dialog box in the lowest window e All text feedback from data entry in the dialog box and all text feedback from simulations are listed in the text feedback window e A separate window appears when one of the two help menus is invoked or when one of the modules is used It is recommended to use the graphical interface because the text mode does not support the listing of graphs and it can become confusing the use 8 2 Change application layout Although the layouts of many applications are fixed the appearance ca
26. apart from the air flows defined in the operations facility is to be included in the building model it is necessary to define the distribution of building leakage and to make sure that the required pressure coefficient set is located in the pressure coefficient database 8 A simulation can be commenced 9 A result analysis can be performed 10 A plant network can be defined and connected to the building model 11 From the Project Manager control can be specified imposed on zones plant amp systems and ventilation amp hydronics 12 A simulation on all the defined facilities can be performed 13 A result analysis can be performed 14 Appropriate design modification can be undertaken 9 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 46 A presentation of the IT University of Copenhagen 12 A presentation of the IT University of Copenhagen This manual is taking the description of the IT University of Copenhagen made in the Bsim2000 tutorial Madsen et al 2001 into account for the included examples The description made in the Bsim2000 tutorial is based on a proposal outline from the consulting company Carl Bro Differences to the Bsim2000 tutorial will occur in the included examples among other things the modelling of the ventilation system mean radiant temperature sensors blind and shutter control and the control systems for the ventilation system will differ These differences a
27. boundary of a fluid flow network The pressure and sometimes the temperature are specified by the user ESRU Report 2001 Type 3 in Table 26 The wind induced boundary pressure node is another node type describing the conditions at the boundary of a fluid flow network The pressure at the node is generated by the wind striking the surface The pressure is a function of wind velocity wind direction and a pressure coefficient ESRU Report 2001 The difference of representing nodes as either internal or boundary pressure nodes is that only internal nodes are subjected to the mass balance approach ESRU Report 2001 Representing a node as Internal is not necessarily equivalent to inside of a building or ductwork nor is a node represented as a boundary node equivalent to a node outside a building The most used type of internal nodes is type 0 since its pressure often is unknown An example of an internal node with known pressure is an expansion vessel in a hydronic radiator system Hensen 1991 As seen in Table 26 the boundary pressure must always be known e g a wind induced pressure is one example of a known boundary pressure which has to be used when representing infiltration For each boundary node with wind induced pressure a reference must be established to an appropriate pressure coefficient set held in the pressure distribution database cf paragraph 13 3 and the wind pressure on a surface is calculated in coupling with th
28. in Figure 135 1 Selection of the relevant zone The type of building plant link a Convective linkage for ventilation purposes b A mixture of convective and radiant linkage e g for radiators and chilled ceilings c The plant heat input is delivered into a building construction e g floor heating The component usually a duct that links to the zone 4 A possible coupled extract component In mechanical ventilation system the extract component is the component which the air is extracted to for example a duct 0S 23 2 2 8 Example constructing a ventilation system with heat recovery This paragraph describes the construction of a plant amp system and the linkage to the defined fluid flow network The plant amp system example describes a mechanical ventilation system based on heat recovery including a cooling unit The facility is included in the Bsim2000 tutorial but is handled differently and cooling is not added in the definition for the ventilation system The construction of a plant amp system in ESP r is much more detailed because of all the components data connections and containments has to be defined in order to get a realistic estimation of the energy consumption and performance of the system The system defined for the ITUC building is sketched in Figure 136 heating coil cooling coil heat exchanger supply fan duct aao e a a return fan duct s k k lt office Figure 136 A sketch of the ventilati
29. menu cf Figure 68 for the zone PE delete a surface and surface Surf 4 is selected The surfaces Part_kon PE and SE door need to be copied from the zone kontor_3 44G to the new zone PE The copying is done by selecting the menu item surface list amp edges in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 pp 94 add inset copy a surface copy surface from another zone the zone kontor_3 44G and the surface Part_kon PE is selected yes is answered to select and copy another surface into the zone PE and the surface SE_door is selected no is answered for not copying another surface Both surfaces are inverted during the copying via the button invert in the dialog box The building model with the defined two zones will have an appearance in the graphical feedback window as seen in Figure 80 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 106 Definition of zones Figure 80 The building model with the original zone kontor_3 44G to the left and the added zone PE to the right ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The copying is finished and the message enclosure properly bounded is displayed in the Surface topology of menu for the zone PE cf Figure 81 Surface topology of PE enclosuret properly bounded Surface INo IVerts anti clk name lvertlfrom outside a Surf 1 4126 5 b Surf 2 4 2 3 6 c Surf 3 434867 d Surf 5 45 67 8 e Surf 6 4 41 4
30. similar to this zone Surf 3 NE part G26150G26 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 4 NW ext wall 1125C80 Exterior Surf 5 Ceiling Lin2C340 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 6 l Floor Lin2C340 Dynamic similar to this zone The procedure for setting the composition for the surfaces is done in similar manners The composition of the SW SE and NE partition cf column 3 in Table 16 is set by selecting the menu item attribute many composition G26150G26 exit selecting SW part SE part and NE part and finishing with selecting the menu item exit to zone description cf Figure 71 The boundary condition for the North West exterior wall NW_ext_wall cf column 4 in Table 16 is set by selecting the menu item NW_ext_wall environment cf Figure 71 Exterior cf Figure 72 Exit and exit to zone description The procedure for setting the composition for the rest of the surfaces is done in a similar way 14 2 2 Add panes frames doors etc to surfaces Including areas in a surface that differs from other parts of the surface can be included within the surface via the menu item surface attributes in the Zones Composition menu cf Figure 68 The actual surface is chosen and the menu item add glazing door opening cf Figure 71 is selected The new surface can be defined somewhere within the facade Important The coordinates for a glazing door and opening follow certain conventions The X and Z o
31. 0 00 21 19 21 21 21 19 21 01 21 27 21 08 21 57 21 60 O9hOO 0 10 0 00 21 70 21 72 21 71 21 18 21 45 21 29 22 28 22 30 10h00 0 02 0 00 22 12 22 14 22 13 21 38 21 64 21 51 22 92 22 94 11h00 0 00 0 02 22 43 22 46 22 44 21 59 21 82 21 72 23 43 23 45 12h00 0 00 0 01 22 47 22 49 22 49 21 72 21 91 21 87 23 39 23 40 13h00 0 00 0 04 22 81 22 83 22 91 21 96 22 06 22 11 24 95 24 97 14h00 0 00 0 08 23 25 23 27 23 49 22 24 22 28 22 52 26 46 26 47 15h00 0 00 0 14 23 72 23 74 24 00 22 57 22 53 235 11 27 52 27 50 16h00 0 00 0 19 24 12 24 56 24 25 22 93 22 79 23 68 28 12 28 09 17h00 0 00 0 15 24 45 26 11 24 51 23 31 23 07 23 73 27 97 27 92 18h00 0 00 0 13 24 80 25 38 24 52 23 62 23 26 23 76 26 91 26 86 19h00 0 00 0 07 24 67 24 45 24 21 23 77 23 32 23 70 25 27 25 22 20h00 0 00 0 03 23 68 23 61 23 59 23 74 23 22 23 50 22 90 22 86 21h00 0 00 0 02 23 13 23 08 23 11 23 64 23 07 23 26 22 01 21 98 22h00 0 00 0 01 22 71 22 68 22 72 23 49 22 92 23 03 21 52 21 50 23h00 0 00 0 01 22 37 22 35 22 38 23 29 22 77 22 80 21 12 21 11 Figure 182 The content of the Time step reports facility and the illustration of the cooling load heating load and the inside surface temperatures ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 As can be seen from Figure 182 there is only used very little heat 462 W during June 9 to heat the zone to 21 C in the morning compared to the effect used 1190 W to cool the ventilation inlet air below 24 C The zone dry bulb temperature for the same pe
32. 034960 Dundee 1980 Eskdalemuir 1978 Ottawa CWEC 1997 Denmark TRY user defined climate db new climate db all zeros ENR Kee TO HPTAoO TD J gt o D Figure 36 The list with possible climate databases in ESP r where the Danish Test Reference Year Denmark TRY has been included The Danish Test Reference Year has been included in the file usr esru esp r climate climatelist cf paragraph 13 2 4 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Tip At this stage it is important to have a good grasp of the designation and the path of relevant climate database e search gives the option to search for the code designation to the relevant climate database The function returns the path and the file designation of the climate database of which the user types in the code designation The typing in must be identical to the code designation of the climate database on the drawn up list that appears under the menu item select from list cf Figure 36 e cancel returns the user to the database survey in Figure 35 13 2 1 The default sky distribution model The sky distribution models used in version 10 4 of ESP r is by default set to the Perez model from 1987 Perez et al 1987 and refer to the file esru src esp r esrubld solar F for the calculation method On request from the author of this paper the newest version of the Perez model from 1990 is being implemented in the program and might by released in the next version of the progra
33. 1 52 for glass and 1 0 for air Abs for the layers no 2 to at an angle of incident of 0 40 55 70 and 80 13 7 2 Import of WIS data It is emphasized that the method in this paragraph is only relevant to European products that are to be calculated according to CEN standards including EN 410 1998 and EN 673 1997 WIS can be downloaded from the following website but it requires username and password http windat ucd ie A guide is listed below on how the optical data can be deduced from the WIS program It is important that under the guide card the menu item settings in WIS is set to No restrictions expert level which allows the user to have the necessary angle dependent optical properties calculated for profiles Create the wanted window and activate the key Calc to start the calculation The U value can be read in the same window and the rest of the data can be found by downloading the report on the profile in question The data that are to be transferred from WIS to ESP r are listed in Table 12 gt fanebladet Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 71 Databases Table 12 Data from WIS which can be used in build up a pane in ESP r Menu items in the Optical Property Set menu in ESP r visible transmission at 0 The necessary data from WIS v2 0a test03 Light transmittance t_vis at 0 solar abs amp refl for docu 0 So
34. 1700 and when the zone node temperature rises above 18 C outside office hours The volume flow rate through the top part of the window is not included in Figure 188 but is equal to the flow rate through the lower part of the window but with the opposite sign After the drawing of the graph the prior selections are deleted by selecting the menu item clear all selections in Figure 187 The volume flow rate from the supply duct duct_in to the zone node kontor_3 44G is drawn by selecting the menu item volume flow rate cf Figure 187 individual connections duct_in gt kontor via duct _4 and exit The graph representing the volume flow rate will be drawn in the graphical feedback window cf Figure 189 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 218 Result analysis Lib ituc nrl Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun 00h59 to Mon 16 Jun 23h59 Yeart2003 sim 1m output 1m 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 04 0 luct_i gt kontor m 3 s 71 T5T Or TN 0 NO T 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Time Hrs Figure 189 The content of the Network air wtr flow facility and the illustration of the volume flow m s rate from the supply duct duct_in to the zone node kontor_3 44G ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The volume flow rate m s from the supply duct duct_in to the zone node kontor_3 44G displayed in Figure 189 varies betw
35. 2 2 8 4 When describing a plant network it is necessary to decide the number of different plant components For example a ventilation system with heat recovery may compose ducts a heat exchanger fans heating coil and cooling coil These components can represent the whole distribution network The menu item components in the Network definition edit menu in Figure 135 is used to define the plant amp systems components When defining components for a network one is presented with a list of available components from the plant component database cf paragraph 13 5 Prior to commencing the configuration of the network the plant component database must be examined and maybe updated to suit the sketched plant network When a control scheme cf paragraph 24 has to be defined for the plant amp systems the control acts upon the component For example consider the case of an air heating coil In a simple component model the heat flux transferred to an air stream by the coil may be treated as a control variable A control loop is then established in terms of some control system behaviour to determine the required flux exchange to achieve some stable condition If such control loop is not defined then the flux exchange will remain at the value assigned in the system configuration file as the default Hensen 1991 23 2 2 3 Description of connections When components have been defined they have to be inter connected The menu item Connectio
36. 3 2 f Part_kon PE 10 4 1 9 12 11 g SE_door 412 910 11 add insert copy a surface delete a surface gt transforms browse surface vertex topology check surface vertex topology help exit to zone definition menu Figure 81 The content of the Surface topology of menu where the problem edges are eliminated as enclosure properly bounded in the top of the menu for the zone PE ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The surface attributes for the zone kontor_3 44G is then changed according to Table 19 and refer to paragraph 14 2 1 for the procedure Table 19 The modified surface attributes for the zone PE Original surface name New surface name Composition Boundary conditions Surf 1 SW part_PE G26I50G26 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 2 SE part_PE G26I50G26 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 3 NE part PE G26I50G26 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 5 Ceiling PE Lin2C340 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 6 Floor PE Lin2C340 Dynamic similar to this zone Part_kon PE Part_kon PE G26IS50G26 Surface in another zone The zone kontor_3 44G and surface Part_kon PE SE_door SE_ door Int door Surface in another zone The zone kontor_3 44G and surface SE door The offset temperatures and radiation is set to 0 which makes the climate conditions in the two zones identical Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 107 D
37. 85 The air flows defined for the zone kontor_3 44G ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 16 3 2 Casual gains Casual gains for equipment lighting and people load are added the zone from the Zone operation menu cf Figure 83 The menu item edit casual gains is selected from this menu cf Figure 83 and the three gain types are subsequently be added The load for the equipment differs during the day and is set to full load from 0800 to 1700 except during lunch which spans from 1200 to 1300 where the computer is on standby corresponding to 25 of full load The equipment is added via the menu item add delete copy gains cf Figure 86 add Equipt Weekdays Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 112 Zone operations Casual gains in kontor_3 446 1 Import from profiles database 2 Electrical data gt gt not included Start End Type Sensib Latent Gains Weekdays 5 a 8 12 Occupt W 95 45 b 13 17 Occupt W 95 45 c 8 17 Lights I 18 d 8 1 Lights 96 e 12 Equipt W 100 0 Gainst Saturdays 0 Gains Sundays 0 edit type labels add delete copy gains scale existing gains list current information help exit this menu I v O Figure 86 The casual gains defined for the zone kontor_3 44G ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The questions after the selection of Weekdays are answered according to Table 20 Table 20 Data entere
38. ESP r 135 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors The view factors and radiant sensors facility is entered from the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 via the menu item composition the button Project Manager in the dialog box viewfactors and radiant sensors cf Figure 84 pp 110 for the zone kontor_3 44G and yes is answered to create a new view factor file Two MRT sensors are added by selecting the menu item Add a MRT sensor twice cf Figure 104 Viewfactors in kontor_3 446 Viewfactor file zones kontor_3 446 vuf Edit zone viewfactors Calculate zone or MRT sensor viewfactors oo No of MRT sensors 2 Sensor Origin m Size m Rot name IXcord cordlZcordllen Iwid Iht Ideg sen_1 Se SO E SUN KO SELA E On o a a baasen f sen_2 2 f 1 0 15 4 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 Add a MRT sensor gt Update MRT sensors amp viewfactors List zone viewfactors Help Exit to model definition eo Figure 104 The content of the View factors menu when two MRT sensors have been added ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Each sensor is manually edited via selections and the data is entered according to Table 23 Table 23 The data for the sensor located 1 m sen_1 and 3 058 m sen_2 from the window and at a height of 1 1 m sen_1 sen_2 Sensor origin X m 1 215 3 247 Sensor origin Y m 1 277 0 954 Sensor origin Z m 12 83 12 83 Sensor width X m 0 01 0 01 Senso
39. If you do not perform an update the changes made will not be saved on you system and will not be used in an upcoming simulation Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 13 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 4 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 Which building simulation program is most suitable to use for this particular project This is an essential question to ask for building simulation purposes Detailed simulation programs are extremely powerful relative inexpensive to purchase or licence and have the potential to calculate or improve the energy and environmental performance of a building To encourage the correct use of the two programs ESP r and Bsim2002 the key areas tackled in this paragraph concern their capability within building energy simulation documentation and a series of relevant questions will be listed which points in the direction for choosing the best building energy simulation for the purpose 4 1 Relevant questions in selecting the best program for the purpose Which building energy simulation program can be used for this particular project This particular question among others comes to mind when one is introduced to a new project There are several ways to answer it one can simply use the programs available even though it is not capable of issuing the relevant parameters in the project or the following questions can be asked and guide one in the direct
40. SW _ part 1265 122865 Every time the vertex of a surface is changed for example after the changes of the vertexes surface SE _part the message enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES is displayed in the Surface topology of menu cf Figure 78 Surface topology of kontor_3 446 enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES Surface INo IWerts anti clk name Ivertlfrom outside a Sli_part 412 6 5 b SE_part 6 28 27 26 3 7 c NE_part 4348 7 dNWlext_ wall 10 4 15 8 4 e ceiling 45 6 7 8 f floor 6 1 4 3 26 25 g SE_door 4 910 11 12 h NW_frame 16 13 14 22 21 24 i NW_win_low 4 17 18 19 20 j NW_win_up 4 21 22 23 24 k Part_kon PE 4 25 26 27 28 add insert copy a surface delete a surface gt transforms browse surface vertex topology check surface vertex topology help exit to zone definition menu Figure 78 The content of the Surface topology of menu where problem edges are displayed as enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES in the top of the menu when the vertices are changed for the surface SE_part ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The problem edges are highlighted in the graphical feedback window and are given as text feedback in the text feedback window when the menu item check surface vertex topology is selected in the Surface topology of menu cf Figure 78 As seen from Figure 79 the 8 problem edges are eliminated when updating changing the vertices for the surfaces Part_kon PE Floor and SW_part cf Figure 79
41. The content of the Network definition edit menu The numbers is parenthesis describes the number of components included in the different menu items ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 23 2 2 1 Different plant amp system types ESP r allows modelling of different plant amp system types mechanical ventilation systems water based heating system electrical heating systems and general HVAC systems When selecting one of Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 175 Networks the simulation types cf menu item b in Figure 135 the simulation is being optimised around the system being modelled in respect to plant matrix type The matrix type used for mechanical ventilation systems is energy and two phase flow for water based heating system is energy and one phase flow for electrical heating systems is energy only simulation and for general HVAC systems is energy and two phase flow respectively The matrix type for a plant amp system is automatic set up to the appropriate type when selecting the plant amp system type in defining a new plant amp system network 23 2 2 2 Description of components The components in the plant amp systems facility are represented as nodes where as in the fluid flow network facility connections represent components This is explained through paragraph 23 and is illustrated in the end of the included example for the pant amp systems cf paragraph 23
42. a good tool for students and design engineers for a wide range of projects and analysis possibilities After an appropriation to the interface the order of modelling and the structure of the program it is manageable and easy to use Experienced users of building simulation programs such as Bsim2002 can also learn to use ESP r The user will especially appreciate the possibilities and documentation especially compare to Bsim2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 226 LIST OF SYMBOLS 29 LIST OF SYMBOLS List of Symbols E2 g val m AP Photocell Refrac Rfsol Rfvis r_ sol o Rsol1 Rsol2 Rvis1 Rvis2 Sensor SHGC Specularity Split flux The flow coefficient m s Pa for type 10 kg s Pa for type 15 kg m s Pa for type 17 The absorptance for the outer glass layer for solar radiation at a given incidence window 4 1 5 1 Absorption for pane number 1 WIS The character used to represent the English word at the flow exponent The thermal conductivity of the panes W mK window 4 1 5 1 The climate severity index for ambient temperature The climate severity index for direct solar radiation The climate severity index for diffuse solar radiation The climate severity index for wind The specific heat capacity of air at constant pressure J kgK The Infrared longwave emittance of the glazing layer exterior facing side
43. air entering the zone is set to 15 C the throttling range for proportional control is set to 2 degrees the integral action flag is set to 0 and the derivative action flag is also set to 0 Both the integral and derivative action flag are not included in for simulation The data for period number 2 and 3 are entered in the same way except from the set point temperature and period start time The two parameters are set to 21 C and 0800 for the second period and 15 C and 1700 for the third period The data entered for Saturday and Sunday are similar to the data entered for the weekdays with a set point temperature of 15 C and the period start time is set to midnight Figure 158 show the Control periods menu for the plant control facility after the editing of the three periods Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 3 perl startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flux control 1 0 5000 0 0 0 15 b 2 8 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flux control 1 0 5000 0 0 0 21 c 3 17 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flux control 1 0 5000 0 0 0 15 add delete a period help exit Figure 158 The content of the Control periods menu for the plant control facility after the editing of the three periods ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Control periods menu and the Editing options menu can be exited Another control loop for cooling
44. and executing permissions on the files and the other users will only have reading and executing permissions 4 Change to the directory usr esru src esp r bin and execute the command esp r dir to create the ESP r directory structure If ESP r is to be installed at a random place on the system then the file esp r dir has to be edited and the second line has to be changed from DESTdir usr to the path to the directory esru The line could be as follows DESTdir appl bespr esru Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 28 Installation of ESP r and Radiance This editing requires that the link in point 1 is set up 5 The file Install in the directory usr esru src esp r contains a guide which guides one through the installations process and lists questions regarding the workstation e g if it is a UNIX or a Linux workstation and where the graphic files are placed etc 6 The command Install is executed for a complete installation or the command Install h is executed for other installation possibilities If for example the directory esru is placed under appl bespr the command Install d appl bespr esru is executed 7 Locate the file cshrc located in the root directory This can be done by the root user with the commands cd Is al If one is not and can not become the root user the file must be edited by the administrator and if the file is located then edit it and
45. clear_04gvb is selected from the material database None of the material data is changed and the menu item exit is selected The material is accepted and a thickness of 0 004 m is entered The procedure for adding two more materials iso kl 39 and Concrete reinf to the external wall is done similar to the above described procedure The materials are to be added in the mentioned order The property of the exterior wall 1125C80 is then identical to Figure 49 Construction editing a Construction 1125C80 b General typet Opaque c Optical properties OPAQUE No of layers 5 0 2310m thick d Layers aret NONSYMMETRIC Layer Priml Thick Description Idb m of material 242 0 006 ip68S4nespc 0 016 air 0 73 0 73 0 73 243 0 004 clear_O4qvb 201 0 125 iso kl 39 5 21 0 080 Concrete reinf Standard U value 0 24 add or delete a layer help exit this menu Bera m WN Re Figure 49 The property and data for the exterior construction 1125C80 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The two following possibilities are available via the menu item add or delete a layer in Figure 49 Delete and Insert and they are used as follows Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 68 Databases Delete To delete a material the menu item add or delete a layer cf Figure 49 the button Delete in the dialog box and the relevant material is selected The facility is ended with the menu item exi
46. comfortable pleasant 22 ai f s w 3 6 f oor o2 e comfortable pleasant 23 20 6 22 5 66 23 2 0 03 0 32 comfortable pleasant The heading in Table 33 is called similar names as is seen from the tabular output in the indoor air quality result facility in ESP r Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 221 Discussion 27 Discussion The aim of the thesis is to write a manual for the building simulation program ESP r that will increase confidence for new users in using the program During the use of ESP r the author of this thesis has encountered knowledge on the advantages and disadvantages of using the program and some possibilities to change the disadvantages into advantages are included in the sub paragraphs to this paragraph 27 1 Advantages One of the advantages using ESP r as a building simulation program is the wide range of useful possibilities that can be addressed to make models realistic These facilities include e Computational fluid dynamics that makes it possible to model realistic air flows in double skin facades zones and make it possible to evaluate draughts e Detailed modelling of plant systems and mass flow networks which makes it possible to study the performance of different plant component and to optimise the plant system around a building e Include mean radiant temperature sensors at random places that can calculate the mean radiant temperat
47. control the zone temperature and the total solar radiation respectively and the blind shutter facility will be activated if just one or both of the controls schemes is greater than the specified set point Another example is that the same screen can be defined for two settings with two different sets of optical properties Then the setting that allows the most solar radiation to enter can be used when the zone temperature rises above 22 C and the setting that allows the smallest amount of solar radiation to enter can be used when the zone temperature rises above 24 C Transparent surfaces in the same zone can be controlled via a single sensor or via separate sensors e If defining a single sensor the surface containing the sensor can be specified and the shading of all transparent surfaces of the same transparent multilayer construction TMC type in the associating zone will act upon the control function specified for that particular sensor on that particular surface The sensor is located upon an inside facing or outside facing surface depending on the specified control scheme e If defining separate sensors then each transparent surface of the same TMC type will be considered to have its own sensor and will be treated separately Only the transparent surfaces which receive greater than the specified set point will be replaced with the defined shaded transparent surface ESRU Report 2001 If different transparent surfaces in a zone need di
48. days are not saved e The used climate file and folder e g the Danish Design Reference Year located in the folder esru esp r climate If some or one of the above described parameters have been wrongly entered they can be changed in the next menu by selecting one of the menu items Input model description and Assign climate file cf Figure 173 ESP r integrated simulator a Input model description b Assign climate file t Invoke trace facilities w Warnings gt gt OFF r Reporting gt gt silent Help Quit Figure 173 The ESP r integrated simulator menu where the already entered parameters can be changed result not normally included in the in the result library can be included and a simulation can be initiated ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Other facilities can be set in the ESP r integrated simulator menu as tracing facilities warnings and reporting level and they are described below e The menu item Invoke trace facilities cf Figure 173 gives the possibility to dump up to 30 selected intermediate results which are not normally included in the result library The results can be obtained from any number of zones The available trace facilities are for example electrical calculation zone shading and insolation solar radiation summary etc The information can be displayed as text feedback in a terminal or saved to a file e The menu item Warnings cf Figure 173 can be set to either on or off If it is set t
49. dbs ituc materialdb for the material database is accepted The model must have been geometrically constructed before the dbs folder exists It saves time moving and readdressing files on the system if the model is geometrically constructed before establishing new databases Note If no path is written the new material database is placed in the catalogue from which ESP r was started Yes is answered to the question A file named ituc materialdb was found overwrite it because there are no other files with that filename in that directory The Material Classes menu for a new material database has the same appearance as Figure 43 but the numbers in brackets equals 1 because a standard material is included for each material class in a new material database Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 63 Databases 13 4 1 1 2 Adding a material to the material database To add or delete a material the menu item database maintenance in the Entry level menu in Figure 34 is selected materials in Figure 35 and browse or edit this file cf Figure 45 is here after selected A list of material classes will appear in the control option menu The material gypsum can be added to the material class Plaster cf Figure 43 and is done via the following step The menu item Plaster cf Figure 43 add delete element cf Figure 44 and Insert element next available slot is selec
50. e g 8 0 8 m s Wind direction degrees from the North calculated clockwise The relative humidity Degrees of longitude and degrees of latitude are included as well Cf paragraph 13 2 1 for the available sky distribution models The climate database can be edited or new ones can be chosen by activating the menu item climate cf Figure 35 The user is then confronted with four relevant options in the dialog box use current db select form list search or cancel e use current db gives the user the option to look through or to edit the relevant climate database Cf paragraph 13 2 2 if an examination or editing of the climate database is wanted e select from list draws up a list with climate databases for different towns that are included in the file usr esru esp r climate climatelist User defined and new climate database can be loaded from here using the menu item user defined climate db cf Figure 36 or a new climate database can be established by choosing the menu item new climate db all zeros cf Figure 36 A climate database in the list can be chosen for the relevant project Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 52 Databases Climate sets ESRU standard climates Default UK clm Climate Belfast IWEC WMO 039170 Birmingham IWEC WMO 035340 Jersey CH ISL IWEC WMO 038950 Finningley IWEC WMO 033600 Gatwick IWEC WMO 037760 Hemsby UK IWEC WMO 034960 Oban UK IWEC WHO
51. file have been defined and need to be removed from the building model it can be dereferenced from this menu 14 1 2 Creating geometry and surface attribution From the Zones Definition menu the geometry and surface attribution is constructed via the menu item geometry and attribution cf Figure 66 and the button create via dimension input in the dialog box The new zone is named described and it can be build via an extruded rectangle floor plan extrusion polyhedra or from points on a bitmap a scanned image of the site plan or floor plan Dimensions given to ESP r are treated as the bounded zone volume which does not change when constructions are added to the different surfaces Important When defining the zone geometry different methods can be addressed regarding dimensions One option is to relate dimensions to internal faces which preserve the bounded zone volume On the other hand by using internal dimensions all transmission losses through edge effects are left out of consideration ESRU Homepage FAQ How about thermal exchanges on the outside Using construction heart line centre dimensions seems like a better approach The wall areas used for calculating transmission losses are then closer to reality and there is only a relatively small error involved in evaluating ventilation rates which are usually very error prone to begin with A draw back is that for intra zone longwave radiation exchange we wo
52. for all the inside surfaces except from the window frame and internal door are added by selecting the menu item Temperatures cf Figure 181 Surf inside face T SW_part SE_part NE_part NW_ext_wall ceiling floor NW_win_low and NW_win_up and Exit The performance matrix is listed by selecting List data cf Figure 181 and the results are shown in Figure 182 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 212 Result analysis Timestep performance metrics Lib ituc res Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun 00h59 tot Mon 9 Jun 23h59 Year 2003 sim 1m output 60m Time Ikontor_3 4 kontor_3 41SiI_patkontISE_patkont INE_patkont Nil_extkontlceilitkont floortkont Nll_witkont I NW_witkont 14G HeatInjl4G CoolInjlor InSurT lor InSurT lor InSurT lor InSurT lor InSurT lo InSurT lor InSurT lor InSurT ku kb deg C deg C deg C deg C deg C deg C deg C deg C OOhOL 0 00 0 03 21 36 21 35 21 36 22 18 22 04 21 98 20 21 20 21 OLhOO 0 00 0 02 21 12 21 12 21 12 21 97 21 91 21 80 19 92 19 92 O2hOL 0 00 0 02 20 84 20 84 20 83 21 74 21 77 21 60 19 51 19 52 OShOL 0 00 0 02 20 53 20 53 20 52 21 49 21 62 21 39 19 11 19 12 04hO0 0 00 0 03 20 30 20 31 20 30 21 25 21 47 21 19 18 95 18 97 O5hO0 0 00 0 05 20 21 20 22 20 20 21 06 21 34 21 04 19 11 19 13 OBhOO 0 00 0 06 20 23 20 25 20 23 20 92 21 24 20 96 19 50 19 53 OFhOO 0 00 0 06 20 34 20 35 20 34 20 84 21 18 20 93 19 99 20 02 OBhOO 0 36
53. for computer aided design lighting visualisation and report generation The audience for the program are mostly engineers researchers and energy consultants because it requires expertise to use many of the different facilities within the program Detailed input is needed for defining different plant systems control systems fluid flow systems etc and this requires understanding of thermo physical processes in buildings environmental systems and controls Simple models and operating regimes can be composed in a few minutes and extended in steps to comprise a more detailed solution of air flow networks plant systems CFD indoor air quality lighting assessments etc Building and flow simulations can be simulated at time steps of one minute to one hour A stand alone simulation for plant and system can be in time steps from fractions of a second to an hour and lighting simulation can be undertaken in time steps of five minutes or one hour depending on the climate data input The results analysis facility includes a wide range of available information on the different parameters simulated as detailed plant system fluid flow network Integrated Performance View indoor environment moisture casual gains etc The ranges of analyses are essentially unrestricted and data can be exported to other analysis and graphing tools ESP r has hundreds of users around the world but they are mostly based in Europe Denmark only has a few users where the Da
54. inlet air are listed in Table 8 The control type for natural ventilation through the bottom window is set to on off control and the set point temperature for the different periods is listed in Table 8 Table 8 Day type period in the day type set point temperature for heating and cooling of the inlet air and the set point for opening the lower window for the natural ventilation Day type Period Start time Heating set point Cooling set point Set point for opening the lower window hr C PC C Weekdays 1 0 0 15 24 18 2 8 0 21 24 23 3 17 0 15 24 18 Saturday 1 0 0 15 24 18 Sunday 1 0 0 15 24 18 The shading on the upper window is activated when the irradiance entering the zone is 100 W m which is similar to the solar radiation on the exterior face of the pane of 270 W m Two photocells are installed at room height in the office kontor_3 44G and are facing down to control artificial lighting The lighting is controlled via ideal dimming control based on Radiance pre calculated daylight coefficients The imposed control is set to maintain a general lighting level of 200 lux from 0800 to 1700 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 50 Databases 13 Databases Constructional and operational attribution is achieved when describing the problem in the Zone Definition facility by selecting products and entities from the su
55. is a 100x100x100 mm cube and they are placed at certain positions in a zone to find the view factor weighted mean radiant temperature The dimension of the sensor can be altered to represent an occupant or an object and the MRT sensors can be placed anywhere within a zone It is also possible to place more than one MRT sensor in a zone and to calculate the mean radiant temperature at certain positions in a zone The view factors and MRT sensor facility should only be used when the geometry in the building model represents the final design Otherwise the positioning of zone contents may substantially modify the longwave exchanges The possibility to include multiple MRT sensors in a zone at random positions helps design engineers to solve indoor environment problems which are often registered in new office building with large glazed areas Documentation for the calculation method of view factors and the mean radiant temperature can be found in Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford Guido S Cor P de Wit M 1988 ESPmrt a new module for the ESP system University of Technology Eindhoven Institute of Applied Physics TNO TH MRT sensor is a tool used to obtain view factors for the mean radiant temperature at different positions in a zone 22 Inter surface view factors is view factors calculated between all the surfaces in a zone Inter surface view factors is similar to zon
56. latter option silent running mode uses the defined parameter set in the simulation presets facility and runs a simulation in automatic mode Both options are given in the dialog box The menu item fluid flow stand alone cf Figure 172 is useful when only one sub system e g air flow is to be appraised The fluid flow stand alone simulation will not be described in this manual since it is included in the integrated simulation for non predominantly pressure driven flows The last two simulation options visual impact and integrated performance view will not be described in this manual either Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 202 Simulation 25 1 Advanced integrated simulation The advanced integrated simulation can be initiated in two ways via the integrated simulation menu item when the simulation presets has not been defined and via the buttons integrated simulation and run interactively in the dialog box when the simulation presets has been defined When an integrated simulation has been initiated the bps module opens and the following questions have to be answered e The system configuration file name root name for the model cfg located in the cfg folder e The simulation start up period The building can adapt to the different systems and temperatures in the building model in this period This is not included in the defined simulation period and the data for these
57. of the Composite Construction db menu in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 In the manual a reference can be made for the menu item extern_wall in the Composite Construction db menu Selection and description of menu items buttons data and text entry in different programs This type of word is the most used type in the ESP r manual and describes selections of menu items in a referenced figure buttons data and text entry in the programs ESP r WIS and Window 4 1 5 1 It is important to notice that this type of words has nothing to do with data and text entry in files Examples Press a in the Composite Construction db menu in ESP r to select the menu item extern_wall cf Figure 11 Choose the menu item database maintenance climate and select form list with the mouse to select a new climate database from the available databases in ESP r Choose the button in the dialog box in ESP r before the selection of a menu item button or subject and see an overall objective description of the possibilities in the menu Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 12 Document conventions The arrow means that the next step in the process is to do as follows and an explanation may also be added in the process The methods used referencing used literature is Surname year This kind of references is used when the written text is based on information from this aut
58. of the Shading amp insolation menu from where the analysis of the shading of outside facing surfaces and the insolation on the inside facing surfaces can be analysed ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 126 Shading and insolation 19 2 1 1 The different analyses techniques This paragraph deals with the ASHRAE and the sun facility menu item b c d and e listed in Figure 96 The menu item Zone cf Figure 96 supplies the possibility to change between different zones where obstructions have been connected and only between these zones Within the menu item ASHRAE window calc cf Figure 96 one can calculate the shading factor 0 no shading to 1 fully shaded via the ASHRAE method for any window associated or not with the established building model The dimension of the window an overhang possible windows reveal and the azimuth has to be entered in order to undertake this kind of analysis The menu item Mercator Sun Path cf Figure 96 gives the graphic view belonging together values of the altitude of the sun and its azimuth The sun azimuth is the abscissa and its altitude is the ordinate The curve in the figure contains hourly values which express the apparent position of the sun on the sky cf Figure 97 Svendsen 1998 MERCATOR SUN PLOT Tate 1 Jul lat 55 4 long 2 8 Too te tre o gt FF fH WwW amp OH DP a wD w I E
59. of the data for the material is changed and the menu item exit is selected The material is accepted by answering yes to the next question The thickness of the material is set to 0 006 m If the material is not accepted as previously written then a new material can be used from the material database Note All numbers are entered in SI units Note Layer is toward the outside Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 67 Databases Note If there is a ventilated cavity in the construction then there is no need to go to the material database Instead choose to manually enter the material reference number type 0 and enter the thermal resistance in the x y and z direction for the cavity The next layer in the external wall is an argon air cavity of the shadow box This layer is added by selecting the menu item add or delete a layer cf Figure 49 and the button Append inside face in the dialog box Instead of entering the material database the material reference number 0 is entered for any gas cavity The thermal resistance is set to 0 73 for x y and z direction and the width is set 0 016 m The next material to be added to the external wall is 4 mm clear glass which is the inner glass of the shadow box in the external wall and this material is added by selecting the item add or delete a layer cf Figure 49 and the button Append inside face in the dialog box The material
60. of the months and the absolute temperature maximum and minimum throughout the year Furthermore it contains Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 57 Databases information on when the typical weeks of the seasons begin This gets listed when the user chooses to study the climate documentation for the selected climate database in Figure 36 A season for the northern and southern hemisphere is listed in Table 10 Table 10 Seasons and their months for the northern and southern hemisphere Nielsen June 2003 Seasons Northern hemisphere Southern hemisphere Spring March April may September October November Summer June July August December January February Autumn September October November March April May Winter December January February June July August Furthermore information on help_start can be found in the analysis of the climate database in ESP r 13 2 4 1 Implementation of a new standard climate database The set up of a new climate databases as standard will have the effect that the standard climate database is loaded each time the program starts and therefore it will be unnecessary to choose it when a new project is started To make dk_DRY which is not included in the ESP r package and must therefore be manually implemented the standard climate database a terminal is activated and the folder is changed to usr esru esp r It can be a
61. of validity cf Figure 149 is thereafter selected in the Editing option menu cf Figure 149 and the period 1 1 and 31 12 is entered as 11 and 31 12 The menu item period data cf Figure 149 is the last editing item option of this day type and the menu item is selected The three periods is listed and all of them need to be edited cf Figure 165 Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 3 perl startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 dry bulb gt flow on 7 off 0 0 1 0 b 2 2 00 dry bulb gt flow on off 0 0 1 0 c 3 3 00 dry bulb gt flow on 7 off 0 0 1 0 add delete a period help exit Figure 165 The content of the Control periods menu for the control of the lower window in the vent hydronic facility The three periods needs to be edited to suit the needed control ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 197 Controls The editing is performed in succession and the data for the tree period is selected and entered as follows Period no 1 is selected an on off control a period start time 0 and the set point temperature of 18 C and 1 00 is entered for direct injection Period no 2 is selected an on off control a period start time 8 and the set point temperature of 23 C and 1 00 is entered for direct injection Period no 3 is selecte
62. pp 110 The shading calculation can be undertaken for a single month several consecutive months or for a whole year The ish module generates updates a shading insolation database shd for each relevant zone for use in a simulation It is possible to include one or more external surfaces in the shading calculation which have external exposure The temporal insolation pattern is a separate calculation and the differences between the two facilities are Shading works on surfaces facing the outside e Insolation works on the internal face of surfaces and takes any reductions from obstructions from shading on the external face of transparent multilayer constructions and from the radiation entering the zone via the transparent multilayer surfaces into account ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Important The shading analysis must be done prior to insolation analysis Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 125 Shading and insolation In the absence of the shading insolation file or if the shading insolation file does not contain data for the period or surface under consideration in a simulation then the simulator will default ignore the shading on the external surfaces ESRU Report 2001 Shading by adjacent zones is not automatically taken into account and the shading factors need to be calculated by setting up adjacent zones as obstructions blocks and thereafter run the ish
63. predicted as hourly values for one month or as a sequence of months Using the button manual surface selection in the dialog box the outside facing transparent surfaces with interest can be selected for the prediction As for all applicable surfaces this gives the possibility to predicted insolation as hourly values for one month or as a sequence of month s e The View insolation facility cf Figure 96 only supplies tabular data as output The tabular data can be viewed as a list of the shading insolation file via the button list file content in the dialog box containing data on both shading and insolation for one month at a time It is only possible to scroll the text feed back window to analyse the data set for two whole months The shading data is presented as the shading factor 0 no shading to 1 fully shaded for the selected month The insolation data is presented for each transparent multilayer construction as a percentage of the insolation striking the involved inside facing surface for each sun up hour for the selected month The second option in the viewing facility is to list an insolation synopsis via the button insolation synopsis in the dialog box containing information on how many percent of the total insolation through a transparent multilayer construction is received to the surfaces included in the prediction The insolation pattern in this tabular mode is given as a percentage for each sun up hour for the day judged to be clos
64. pres coef set list db update db help exit this menu MNNMNMMYNYNYNY YM P NYP RP RRB RP PBR RB BRR PowuVyvr RP Oe KX Fc ores saA VIS Be ree TFoORMMACTYA Figure 41 The different pressure distribution sets in the pressure distribution database pressc db1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 13 3 1 1 Editing of pressure distribution coefficients The relevant topic for editing e g 2 1 exposed roof gt 30deg is chosen A new designation can be entered and the relevant coefficients can be changed A Warning Do not forget to update the database if the changes are to take effect This is done by using the menu item update db in the Pressure Coefficient db menu cf Figure 41 13 3 1 2 Add delete and copy pressure distribution coefficients The menu item add delete copy press coef set in the Pressure Coefficient db menu cf Figure 41 is used to add delete or copy a set of pressure distribution sets After the function has been activated the options add manually add via calculation delete copy and continue are given in the dialog box The use of these options is described below Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 59 Databases add manually By using this option the designation of the set and subsequently the 16 pressure distribution coefficients are typed in to this set The individual values are entered and must lie between 1 5 and 1 5 add via calc
65. problems are solved in the next version which is available to the author of this thesis but is not at present time 26 6 03 available for the public 22 2 1 Direct conflation of ESP r and Radiance during simulation A calculation approach of control casual gains for lighting has been included in the ESP r platform where a direct conflation of the ESP r and Radiance system is used and ESP r is providing the overall supervisory control at simulation time cf Figure 121 Clarke et al 1998 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 156 Casual gain control Lighting control ESP r RADIANCE Climate parameters sun position solar irradiance etc Sky model Zone parameters blind position glazing transmittance etc Window model Energy simulation interrupted Internal illuminance Energy simulation proceeds distribution Photocell actuation and luminaire control t Power consumption and internal heat gains Figure 121 ESP r Radiance interactions at the time step level Clarke et al 1998 At each simulation time step ESP r s luminaire control algorithm initiates the daylight simulation Radiance is then driven by ESP r to find the illuminance status for defined photocell locations Clarke et al 1998 This involves several interaction tasks as seen in Figure 121 Radiance calculates the sky model window model and internal illuminance distribution for defined photocell
66. r System Version 10 4 Configuration usr esru esp r training house syph cfg linford cfg Doo O Figure 3 The ESP r interface displaying a 3D model and the menu containing menu items used to access the different possibilities within the program ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 2 2 The indoor environment The estimation of the indoor environment in ESP r is based on the outcome of the work of Professor P O Fanger A dynamic simulation of the indoor environment is included in simulations in ESP r which makes it possible to optimise the technical solutions as plant system controls constructions and etc of the model in the design phase in regards to indoor environment cf Figure 4 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 6 A quick introduction to ESP r 9 6 2003 t air gr C MRT gr C Rh PW PPD Hour hh Figure 4 A graphical illustration of some of the possibilities in evaluating the indoor environment in ESP r 2 3 Daylight and artificial lighting control Models can be coupled with Radiance for a pre calculation of daylight coefficients direct simulation runtime coupling and for visualisation studies where glare can be evaluated cf Figure 5 Figure 5 Radiance calculated glare for a given time in a day in a building model The calculated glare is based on CIE clear
67. rate is unknown and the following two choices are available 1 Selection of a component that vents air to outside of the inlet system if its flow rate is the same as the actual component 2 If the flow rate for the vent and supply component differ then any driving component fan can be selected in the plant network The MDR for the vent then has to be modified so that the flow rate equals the needed flow The flow rate will then be used as the inlet flow rate to this component The connections to the driving component are not affected ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 23 2 2 4 Description of containments data The menu item Containment cf Figure 135 defines the immediate boundary conditions of a plant component From this the component s parasitic heat loss or gain will be established The available containment data is 1 Ambient air temperature plus or minus some fixed difference 2 A plant component temperature plus or minus some fixed difference 3 A fixed temperature 4 A zone air surface or within a surface temperature ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Only in point number 4 will the heat loss from the plant be injected to the building zone and vice versa For the other mentioned points the heat loss or gain to the environment is balanced by a heat gain or loss to the containing system Hensen 1991 The heat gain or loss to the building zones is defined in the control facility cf paragraph 24 23 2 2 5 Des
68. rcf The scene purpose is set to Daylights factors cf Figure 106 for the floor in the zone kontor_3 44G The grid is set 0 85 m above floor level and the grid is transformed to the inside of the zone The grid is set to be parallel to the vertex 1 and 2 and the grid density is set to 6 rows parallel to edge and 4 columns perpendicular to the edge refer to the graphical feedback window in Figure 117 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 147 Lighting analysis and visualization Radiance descriptions scene t ituc_Day_fa purpose Day_fact sky type location amp time zone amp outside composition other furniture fittings edit display grid return to main menu Figure 117 The grid in the zone kontor_3 44G which is used for the daylight factor calculation and the connected Radiance description menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The simulation is cancelled in order to illustrate the set up of the simulation environment the sky the different material and the Radiance files The scene name scene root name and scene description is accepted for the scene configuration file update A simulation can now be performed using default values or one can edit or view these The latter is chosen and the Radiance desktop menu appears cf Figure 117 The menu item create edit scene details cf Figure 117 sky type cf Figure 108 is selected
69. roof surface of the zone is set to ceiling and the roof height is set 15 13 m The power law wind profile is set to an urban profile where K 0 35 and a 0 25 cf appendix 3 The wind reduction factor is calculated to 0 69 23 2 1 5 5 Link network to zone The nodes linked to a zone will have a temperature matching the zone temperature The only node that should be linked to the zone is the zone node kontor_3 44G To define a linkage of nodes to a zone the menu item Link nodes and zones in the Fluid flow Network menu cf Figure 123 select a node and the node kontor_3 44G is selected 23 2 2 Plant and systems The philosophy for the plant and system facility is to describe detailed plant systems which have time dependant characteristics and inertia by dynamic performance In most cases both simple and complex representation can be defined for components as boilers heat exchangers and radiators The simultaneous modelling technique is used in respect to the dynamic plant simulation in ESP r The definition of simultaneous modelling technique is The simultaneous modelling technique involves representation of plant parts a part of a component a component a sub system etc by discrete nodal schemes and by the Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 174 Networks derivation of energy and mass flow equation sets which represent whole system internode exchanges o
70. rotated to represent any position of e g a sitting person Assuming there is no rotation e The width of the MRT sensor is its distance along the X axis cf Figure 101 e The depth is along its Y axis cf Figure 101 e The height is along its Z axis cf Figure 101 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 132 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors MRT sensor origin Building origin Figure 101 An illustration of the co ordinates for the MRT sensors which are needed in defining these Note It is not possible to delete MRT sensors so be sure to add the right amount Use the menu item Update MRT sensors amp view factors cf Figure 100 to update the data to a vwf file If too many MRT sensors have been added then avoid updating the data The view factors can manually be added or edited via the menu item Edit zone view factors or can be calculated for MRT sensors via the menu item Calculate zone or MRT sensor view factors in Figure 100 e The editing function supply possibilities to manually enter or edit the calculated zone view factors for each surface in the zone Note that the sum of view factors from one surface to another surfaces must be in unity e g from a surface named NW_ext_wall to the other 5 or more surfaces in the zone e The menu item Calculate zone or MRT sensor view factors gives the possibility to c
71. step user manual Contain a poor shading control No explicit possibility of defining linear thermal transmittances and thermal bridges ESP r is available from the University of Strathclyde and the source code is also included in the program package The program can be used for commercial and non commercial work for free It is strongly recommended that new users takes courses in the program at the University of Strathclyde for approximately 500 which is similar to approximately 5500 DKR ESRU Manual 2002 4 2 2 The building energy simulation program Bsim2002 The Bsim2002 package is easy to use and is a flexible program for evaluating the indoor climate and energy conditions as well as the designing of the heating cooling and ventilation plants The Bsim2002 package comprise the programs SimView for visual representation of the 3D building geometry tsbi5 holds the routines for thermal and moisture simulations XSun for analyses of the solar distribution and shadows in and around buildings SimLight contains simple algorithms for estimation of the daylight conditions in a concave room Bv98 compliance checker and SimDXF is a filter allowing the user to use CAD drawings in DXF format as basis for creating the geometry of the building model Bsim2002 works in the operating system Windows and is not very well documented Bsim2002 permits calculation on complex buildings with several or many thermal zones and rooms simultaneously It
72. strategy these data form the base for calculating the power demand and energy consumption necessary for running the ventilation plants Results analysis includes any of the calculated parameters for each construction layer each thermal zone plus data from ambient climate as output on hourly weekly monthly or periodical basis in either tabular or graphic form The variables can also be presented in sum graphs or tables Finally the energy balances for each zone or the whole building can be shown Outputs can be copied or exported to other analysis or graphing tools Strengths is user friendly contains a good user guide has a good graphical interface is reputable and can analyse the indoor thermal and moisture climate in complex buildings It allows simultaneous simulations of energy and moisture transfer in building constructions It uses simple definition of plant and ventilation systems Weaknesses A simple model for air flow i e the air flow caused by wind pressure on the facades is not taken into account A simple way for defining plant and ventilation system limits the possibilities of studying these It does not in the present version include the absorptance and the thermal capacity of windows The program cannot in the present version perform a detailed coupled whole building and daylight simulation with a third party daylight calculation solver Not very well documented Bsim2002 is available from the Danish Building and Urban
73. sunny Glare is calculated in luminance ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Radiance is a strong tool for calculating and analysing the visual environment in a design project and the generated images can be used for presentation purposes The calculation of glare in the coupling between ESP r and Radiance and the calculation of the illuminance distribution as a separate task in Radiance for the ESP r generated building models can help decide the type and control scheme for shading Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 7 A quick introduction to ESP r 2 4 Networks and plant amp systems Both fluid flow network and plant amp systems can be composed in great details in ESP r and the two systems can be coupled together in order to simulate a system as close as possible to a real system in which building and plants are represented The description of a fluid flow network comprises a fluid type air or water nodes flow components inter connections and boundary conditions cf Figure 6 Figure 6 An example of a fluid flow network in a 4 zone model The components are here represented as flow through an open door a horizontal division an open window cracks and ventilations apertures Hensen 1991 The description of a plant amp system network comprises of component connections containments data and electrical data cf Figure 7 heating coil cooling coil hea
74. that there is a lot of time saved rather than spend doing so 3 Itis only essential to include parameters that have an effect on topics to be analysed A Warning Perform the modelling in steps and test each step in a combined simulation and result analysis Experience has shown that there is a lot of time saved rather than spend doing so A lot of time can be consumed on searching for one or many errors in a large complex project 11 2 Strategy of using ESP r It can be difficult for a novice user to figure out in which order to model buildings and how the program works A novice should follow the following step by step procedure closely while the experienced user may prefer a different strategy that either bypasses or alter some steps Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 45 The strategy of modelling 1 Analyse the design problem in hand and decide which features shall be included in the model 2 Decide on the minimum number of building zones and plant components to be included in the model which will yield the performance measures required 3 Constructing a building model in ESP r can now be commenced The underlying procedure is as follows e Define the zone geometry and the relevant databases The constructions and operations are then to be modelled This results in the creation of tree mandatory files per zone At any time the databases can be accessed and an item contained
75. the defined parameters settings described in paragraph 21 1 1 to generate all the information required satisfying the scene purpose If an internal or external image is to be rendered it can be displayed to the screen or saved in a file If it is rendered to the screen it can be important to issue the command exposure when a is listed in the bottom of the screen This can especially important when rendering an external image because some times nothing seems to appear The command adjusts the expose to similar visibility to what would be experienced in the real environment More commands to control the image via the Radiance rview file can be found in the Radiance manual pages pp 150 152 The menu items view study purpose results in Figure 114 View the results of the Radiance calculation of daylight factors or glare 21 2 Example set up of on internal visualization This is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial but is performed to show that ESP r can be used for presentation purposes When the building model has been created the visualization and lighting analysis facility can be carried out for an internal image In the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 the menu item visualisation is addressed and the button Colour rendered is chosen in the dialog box If a scene configuration file ituc rcf is present in the cfg folder the prefix has to be changed Another file has been defined and the filename ituc rcf is c
76. the displayed ESP r platform ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 2 1 The interface The modules in ESP r have a similar interface like the one displayed for the Program Manager in Figure 2 and Figure 3 The geometry is among other things composed in the Project Manager and is displayed as a 3D model in the upper left hand cf Figure 3 Addition the menu containing menu items used to access the different possibilities within the program is displayed in the upper right hand cf Figure 2 and Figure 3 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 5 A quick introduction to ESP r bg Project Manager enquiries to esru strath ac uk Project Linford house in winter buffer vent mode lower flow ratas definitions Hodel Definition a idt linford cfg in folder usr esru esp r tr b registration details c model context d upgrade from older format composition f visualisation Networks___ 1 included g plant amp systems h vent hydronic defined i electrical Controls___ 10 included j zones 10 loops plant amp systems vent hydronic global system n define uncertainties Actions o simulation results analysis reporting leev el 4 zi la lel save model help ESP r Project Manager Version 4 40a exit this menu of December 2002 Copyright 2001 Energy Systems Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Welcome to the ESP
77. the inlet air temperature to 24 C during weekdays Saturdays and Sundays has to be added The control loop has to be defined in the same way as for heating the ventilation air but with minor changes Control loop 1 is copied using the menu item add delete copy control loop or day type cf Figure 159 copy loop loop 1 and the new Controls menu will look like Figure 159 33 The upper set equals the set point plus half the throttling range and the lower set point equals the set point minus half the throttling range Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 193 Controls Controls a control focus gt gt plant b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops ee cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid Iperiod loop location location typelduringlin day e i p OO a Doukd gt 1 365 3 f Sat 1365 1 g Sun 1365 1 ho t 0 0 1 a kd 103652 3 i Sat 1365 1 j Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 159 The content for plant amp system Controls menu after the configuration and copying of the first control loop ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Menu item h cf Figure 159 is selected for defining the sensor details actuator details period of validity and period data for the second control loop in Figure 149 The menu items sensor a
78. the menu item exit this menu in two subsequently upcoming menus Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 109 Zone operations 16 Zone operations Zone operations are included in a zone operation file opr The zone operation file contains information on casual gains infiltration and basic inter zone ventilation cf Figure 83 Zone operations Vv zonet kontor_3 446 description nil_operations edit scheduled air flows edit casual gains update air flow amp casual gains help exit this menu Figure 83 The content of the Zone operation menu where basic infiltration and inter zone ventilation can be defined Casual gains for occupants lighting and other appliances can also be added ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The zone operation menu item is located in the Zones Definition menu cf Figure 84 Zones Definition ZONES 444 aoc 1 included composition status geometry amp attribution constructions operation Topology 6 6 connections e connections amp anchors Options shading amp insolation convection calculations view factors amp radiant sensors casual gains control computational fluid dynamics adaptive gridding amp moisture ro Fw bh Special components building integrated renewables active materials 3 global tasks help exit this menu J Figure 84 The content of the Zones Definition
79. the shading device in Figure 192 via different controls as on off 0 50 100 or dynamic shading The last two methods shall both be activated from the top of the pane and downwards to the coordinate z illustrated in Figure 192 plus some extra centimetres The coordinate zz can be calculated from equation 8 z tan x z 0 1 m 8 Where Zi the height of the sensor m Z2 the height of the imposed shading device minus 0 1 m m x the distance from the sensor to the window m a the altitude of the sun 0 1 extra distance in lowering the shading device A possibility of calculating the last two controls 0 50 100 and dynamic is for the simulator to divide the pane into a number of vertical sections and change the optical properties of each pane in steps according to the sensed set point and the imposed control The shading facility must be one simulation time step in front of the actual simulation and pass the shading results back to the actual simulation The control of Venetian blinds build up as obstructions becomes more complex than the control of the blind shutter facility Not only should there be a facility to regulate the height of the Venetian blinds but also to regulate the angle towards horizontal of the lamellas Sensors can also be added to the zone and the same control schemes and algorithm as used for adjusting the height of the blind shutters can be used to control the height of the Venetian blinds The sensed param
80. the sky distribution file name is confirmed and the default sky data is listed and can be changed The data is changed to 27 6 the time is set to 1400 and a CIE standard overcast sky is often used in daylight factor calculation and is also used here Christoffersen et al 1999 The sky description is generated via the menu item Generate sky description cf Figure 110 The menu item zone amp outside composition cf Figure 117 is selected Generate description and the filenames for glazing properties if a blind shutter facility is included in the model then create the alternative glazing properties opaque material properties inside composition and outside composition properties are confirmed The obstructions are included in the daylight factor calculation The scene is ready for the calculation of daylight factors and the following procedure is used the menu item return to main menu cf Figure 117 is selected calculate view scene cf Figure 107 calculated daylight factors cf Figure 118 and the maximum total difference between iterations are set 0 25 and the calculation is started Depending on the computer processor power how much memory is available the complexity of the building model grid density etc the calculation can last from a few minutes to hours The daylight factors are viewed using the menu item view daylight factor result refer to the control option menu in Figure 118 Investigatio
81. water node type cf Table 26 height above datum a reference height temperature and supplementary data The possibilities of representing nodes are listed in Table 26 Table 26 The possibilities of representing node types and pressure in a fluid flow network ESRU Report 2001 Type Description Supplementary data 0 Internal unknown pressure None 1 Internal known pressure Total pressure Pa 2 Boundary known pressure 1 total pressure Pa 2 fluid temperature indicating 0 node temperature is constant 1 node temperature equal to outside air temperature 3 Boundary wind pressure 1 wind pressure coefficient index 2 surface azimuth clockwise from North Type 0 in Table 26 An internal and unknown pressure node describes the volume of air inside a building usually a zone The pressure and temperature are solved at each time step A node temperature can be set to the temperature of another node or to a start up temperature for the beginning of a simulation ESRU Report 2001 7 Only allowed for the fluid type air Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 162 Networks Type 1 in Table 26 An internal and known pressure node is describing the volume of air inside a building usually a zone The pressure is fixed and is specified by the user ESRU Report 2001 Type 2 in Table 26 The boundary and known pressure node is describing the conditions at the
82. 1 12 h Nul_frame 16 13 14 22 21 24 i Nul_win_low 4 17 18 19 20 j Nl_win_up 4 21 22 23 24 k Part_kon PE 4 25 26 27 28 add insert copy a surface delete a surface transforms browse surface vertex topology check surface vertex topology help exit to zone definition menu IN W Vv Ee Figure 77 The content of the Surface topology of menu where problem edges are displayed as enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The reason for the message PROBLEM EDGES is that a part of the copied surface disorganizes other surfaces vertex compositions The surfaces involved in two adjacent zones have to be updated Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 103 Definition of zones to follow the vertex convention All vertices and intersections of a surface must be registered within the surface topology A vertex can be defined in the menu item vertex coordinates in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 A defined or an existing vertex can then be included in a surface through via the menu item surface list amp edges in the Zone Composition menu and the actual surface Important Remember to save the zone every time changes have been made in order to register them in the zone geometry file 14 4 3 Example Adding a zone and handling problems This example is not included in the ITUC building construction but is used to illustrate how t
83. 1 and 31 12 is entered as 11 and 31 12 The menu item period data cf Figure 149 is the last editing item option of this day type and is selected The three periods is listed cf Figure 157 and all of them need to be edited Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 3 perl startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flow control b 2 2 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flow control c 3 3 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flow control add delete a period help exit Figure 157 The content of the Control periods menu for the plant control facility before the editing of the three periods has begun ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The editing is performed in succession and the data for the tree period is selected and entered as follows Period 1 cf Figure 157 is selected senses dry bulb actuates flux P PI PID for type 0 2 4 6 8 10 controller period start time is set to midnight 0 PID mode is set to 1 which is a non recursive positional control for heating No of misc data items is set to 7 for proportional control maximum heating and cooling capacity W is set to 5000 which is sufficient for temperature control of the inlet air minimum heating and cooling capacity W is set to 0 the set Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 192 Controls point temperature of the
84. 10 mm is added to the x axis Block Details a origin X Y Z 1 00 1 00 0 00 b block W DH 1 00 1 00 1 00 c rotation 0 00 d name t new_blk e construction NONE block coords x Y front left 1 000 1 000 front right 2 000 1 000 back right 2 000 2 000 back left 1 000 2 000 top B 1 000 2 zone bounds x F max 10 000 4 000 3 000 mint 0 000 0 000 0 000 help exit Figure 94 The content of the Block Details menu where the placement of the bock the size name and construction can be determined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 It is assumed that the depth of the window sill is 0 15 m The dimension of the block is changed via the menu item block W D H width depth and height cf Figure 94 and set to 0 15 2 1 and 0 01 respectively to represent the shading reflection from the window sill The name of the obstruction block is changes to win_sill via the menu item name cf Figure 94 and the composition is changed to window_sill via the menu item constructions cf Figure 94 The obstruction block is rotated 9 East via the menu item rotate transform obstruction cf Figure 92 rotate win_sill exit 9 a user defined point is specified for the rotation is set to x y Z 0 073 0 395 12 43 metres and the rotation is finished by selecting the button ok in the dialog box 19 1 1 2 Creating a window reveal in connection to the frame A window reveal is created via the O
85. 13 7 1 1 Import of data LBL Window 5 1 The program Window 4 1 is a dos based program Window 5 1 is however a newer version which is based on the operating system Windows Export of files in Windows 5 1 is saved in another Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 76 Databases format than can be read of ESP r It would be more time consuming to edit this rtf file format from Window 5 1 to another format corresponding to the one Window 4 1 exports It is therefore recommended to create a pane in Window 5 1 and manually implement the results in ESP r The data that are to be transferred from Window 5 1 to ESP r are seen in Table 11 Table 11 Data from Window 5 1 which can be used in build up a pane in ESP r Menu items in the Optical Property The necessary data from Window 5 1 Set menu in ESP r c visible transmission at 0 Tvis at 0 d solar abs amp refl for docu 0 Rfsol for solar refl and Rfvis for solar abs Both at an angle of incident of 0 40 55 70 and 80 e U value for docu U value f direc trn Tsol at an angle of incident of 0 40 55 70 and 80 g heat gain doc SHGC at an angle of incident of 0 40 55 70 and 80 h refrac abs 0 abs 80 Refrac is typically 1 52 for glass and 1 0 for air Abs 1 at an angle of incident of 0 40 55 70 and 80 j refrac abs 0 abs 80 Refrac is typically
86. 145 elements and calculates a coefficient for each element with an arbitrary luminance imposed Janak et al 1999 The daylight coefficient for each photocell position is calculated via Radiance prior the energy simulation within ESP r The daylight coefficient method uses a light source for each patch so that the contribution from each patch is known as a function of the brightness of the patch i e during the Radiance simulations each patch has the same luminance Then during the integrated simulation the sky model is used to calculate the actual brightness of each sky patch based on the current climate data and a simple multiplication is used to calculate the real contribution from each patch Conversation with I Macdonald ESRU 22 2 2 1 Example Modelling daylight coefficients for use in a simulation This is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial but is included in this manual to illustrate how daylight coefficients are modelled and calculated The menu item composition is activated in the Model Definitions menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 and casual gain control is used to initialise the pre simulation of daylight coefficients The needed data is defined according to the example in paragraph 22 1 7 After finishing the casual gain control definition and exiting the facility select the button create and edit model listed in the dialog box to set up the Radiance model This will invoke the Radiance desktop module in automatic mode which c
87. 2 gt z external Nyy ret fan duct_4 duct_3 duct_2 TO ekeke e kontor_3 44G fan_out duct_out Figure 145 Diagrammatic representation of the building and network configuration The red dots indicate the nodal scheme for the fluid flow network and the blue dots indicated the nodal scheme for plant amp system network solution Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 183 Networks It is apparent that the nodal schemes in the plant amp system and the fluid flow network facility are quite different This is because the nodes for the plant amp system network solution represent components while in the fluid flow network the connections between nodes represent components for example the connection internal_ NW1 to the heater represents the flow through the heat_coil component cf Figure 145 The linking of a plant amp system here the ventilation system with heat recovery to the fluid flow network is done from the Network definition edit menu via the menu item Link to fluid flow network cf Figure 137 The menu item is selected and the linkage is performed manually and via simple selections The selections are performed according to Table 32 Table 32 The connection from the plant amp systems network facility linking to the connections in the fluid flow
88. 2 The selection of the menu item air condition leads to a list of the available air conditioning components in the active plant component database and the menu item air duct 1 node model is selected cf Figure 140 Components list a air mixing box or converging junction 1 node model b spray steam humidifier 1 node model flow rate control c centrifugal fan 1 node model flow control d air cooling coilt 1 node model flux control e air heating coil 1 node model flux control f air duct 1 node model g air duct dampert 1 node model flow ratio control h air cooling coilt 1 node model water mass flow rate control i air heating coil 1 node model water mass flow rate control j air air plate heat exchanger 2 node model k air cooling coilt 1 node 0 by type32 water mass flow rate control 1 Cooling tower 2 node Merkel model ISV gt 20 r Figure 140 The different kind of flow components available for the selected component type air conditioning in Figure 139 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The duct is named duct_1 and the thermal component parameters cf Figure 141 are changed according to appendix 12 The flow parameters are set in the ventilation and hydronic fluid flow network facility Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 180 Networks Plant comp duct_1 a Component total mass kg 9 2500 b Mass weighted average specific heat J kg
89. 2 3 4 5 and 6 The data are then imported by selecting the menu item Import data in Figure 63 The Tabular menu cf Figure 62 appears and is then exited and the menu item Save import export TDF db cf Figure 61 and the button save db is selected in the dialog box to save the new database and the temporal definitions database is then exited The temporal definitions database is then entered again to assign the database for simulations and the button select db entities is selected in the dialog box and the database dk_dry_5min index 1 ALLCLMT for all climate is accepted and no is answered to if other temporal items are needed in simulation The defined temporal definitions database dk_dry_5min will be used during simulation However two important restrictions are 1 The number of time steps in the simulation should be the same as in the temporal definitions database 2 The whole simulation period including the start up period should have data defined in the temporal definitions database Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 89 Definition of zones Mandatory facilities of ESP r 14 Definition of zones A thermal zone is a volume of air which is assumed well mixed and bounded by closed polygons A building model in ESP r can be build up upon 50 building zones and ESP r can be used to represent building models which are a direct mapping from reality ESR
90. 6 9 at 2400 This is done by selecting the menu item Display period cf Figure 187 entering the day of the month the month and the time where the period starts as 9 6 1 then entering the day of the month the month and the time where the period ends as 16 6 24 the output time increment is set to 60 which is equal to one output per zone hour and it is selected not to average the results over each output period Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 216 Result analysis Time series plot 2 3 5 Be wre Tonagqandindcs q gt amp result set display period output gt gt graph ambient temperature wind speed wind direction ambient RH press node press diff conn stack pres conn node temperature mass flow rate volume flow rate air changes velocity conn watts assoc w flow edit selections display to gt gt screen datat as values clear all selections set axis scale add another profile draw graph Figure 187 The content of the Network air wtr flow facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The temperature for the zone node kontor_3 44G is drawn by selecting the menu item node temperature cf Figure 187 kontor_3 44G and Exit which draws the graph The volume flow rate between the zone and the outside via the lower part of the open window is added via the menu item volume flow rate cf Figure 187 individual connectio
91. 8 platform can be downloaded from the following homepage http www redhat com apps download Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 27 Installation of ESP r and Radiance The installation guide can be downloaded from http www redhat com docs manuals Linux RHL 8 0 Manual install guide Linux only support a part of the laptop market and problems can occur during the installation process Consult the homepage http www Linux laptop net to see what kind of laptop computers and hardware Linux is supporting It is possible to install and the later use the Linux workstation on laptop computer not included in the homepage http www Linux laptop net Consult the homepage http bugzilla redhat com bugzilla to get around error messages during installation or booting the installed RedHat 8 platform RedHat Linux will not work perfectly but will be capable for all kind of ESP r simulations During installation of the RedHat Linux software it is possible to select the different applications for example network tools which is supposed to be included or excluded on the system The advice is to include all the applications which eliminates the possibilities of ESP r not working due to uninstalled facilities 6 3 The Installation of ESP r on a Linux and UNIX machine As mentioned above the focus of the installation process will only be on the Linux and UNIX workstations with th
92. 96 Definition of zones Figure 70 The zone kontor_3 44G without windows a door and obstructions ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 14 2 Modify surface attributes The surface attributes surface name composition and facing is set through the menu item surface attributes in the Zones Composition menu cf Figure 68 The attributes can be modified one by one via subsequently selections or many surfaces can be attributed simultaneously cf Figure 71 Surface Attributes a surface name piSurfad Surfaces in kontor_3 446 b surface type OPAQ ae c surface location VERT Name Composition Facing x a Surf 1 UNKN UNKNOWN surface area m 2t 16 854 b Surf 2 UNRN UNKNOWN azim amp elevation 189 00 0 00 eet UNKN UNKNOWN perimeter length 16 714 d Surf 4 UNKN UNKNOWN d surface indentation m 0 0000 e Surf 5 UNKN UNKNOUN e construction UNKN f Surf 6 UNKN UNKNOWN f environment UNKNOWN attribute many add glazing door opening help help exit Surtf 1 exit to zone description Figure 71 A list of surfaces in a zone and by selecting Surf 1 its different attributes can be specified or by selecting the menu attribute many a few or many surfaces can be attributed simultaneously ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A detailed display of a surfaces attributes is accomplished by selecting one of the surfaces within the menu displayed in Figure 71 which can also be changed from here The different surface attribute
93. Air Infiltration Calculation Techniques An Applications Guide With precision these can be used for buildings of up to 3 storeys ESRU Report 2001 13 3 1 Example Editing the pressure distribution database The pressure distribution database is entered via the menu item pressure distributions cf Figure 35 the path and file name to the relevant pressure distribution database is entered and one can Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 58 Databases examine the database The following options for editing are edit add delete and copy a set of pressure distribution coefficients cf Figure 41 The description 1 1 1 2 or 2 1 used in Figure 41 refers to the width height ratio Pressure Coefficient db 1 exposed wall 1 exposed roof lt 10deg 1 exposed roof 10 30deg 1 exposed roof gt 30deg 1 semi exposed wall 1 semi exposed roof lt 10deg 1 semi exposed roof 10 30deg 1 semi exposed roof gt 30deg 1 sheltered wall 1 sheltered roof lt 10deg 1 sheltered roof 10 30deg 1 sheltered roof gt 30deg 1 exposed long wall 2 exposed short wall 1 exposed roof lt 10deg 1 exposed roof 10 30deg 1 exposed roof gt 30deg 1 semi exposed long wall 1 semi exposed short wall 1 semi exposed roof lt 10deg 1 semi exposed roof 10 30deg 1 semi exposed roof gt 30deg 1 sheltered long wall 1 sheltered short wall 2 1 sheltered roof lt 10deg Page 1 of 2 add delete copy
94. High results friendly friendly Suggests Optimisations Table 4 A general comparison on the use of the two programs Feature ESP r rating Bsim2002 rating Interface Poor Good Documentation Good Poor Open source Yes No Manually develop features Yes No Descriptive manual Poor Good Price Free cf Require license cf ESRU Manual 2002 www bsim dk prices Based on the description in paragraph 4 2 1 and 4 2 2 and the comparison in Table 3 and Table 4 one can conclude that ESP r is the strongest simulation tool of the two and that it has a powerful capability to simulate many innovative and leading edge technologies In the construction of an ESP r building model the model needs detailed information on facilities as plant system fluid flow networks electrical networks system control systems coupling to Radiance CFD system near and remote obstruction casual gains and perform detailed calculations on the topics addressed in the program The degree of input details in ESP r differ from the degree of input details in Bsim2002 which will have and effect on the feedback from the program A brief overview of the examples and simulated results included in this thesis is presented in paragraph 4 3 1 Paragraph 4 3 1 4 and 4 3 1 4 describes a method for modelling double skin facades and floor heating 4 3 1 Examples displaying areas where ESP r is superior to Bsim2002 ESP r is superior to Bs
95. Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r Unders gelse og anvendelse af bygningssimuleringsprogrammer specielt ESP r Project Manager enquiries to esru strath ac uk fans n R F Model Definition Project IT University of Copenhagen as constructed in the Bsim2000 tutorialt tions ee 2 22 thot in folder c model context e composition f visualisation g plant amp systems vent hydronic global system Actions o simulation p results analysis q reporting lLzil Ll le ESP r Project Manager Version 4 41a save model of April 2003 Copyright 2001 Energy help Systems Research Unit University of exit this menu Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Loading supplied model description Site location 55 4N 2 8W of local meridian Ground reflectivity 0 20 Site exposure typical city centre b registration details d upgrade from older format Zones 1 included Networks___ 2 included h vent hydronic defined i electrical Controls___ 5 included j zones 1 loops k plant amp systems 1 m n define uncertainties o 7 defined 2 loops 2 loops Composed by Per Haugaard July 2003 BYGeDTU ti Preface Preface This thesis forms the master thesis Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r The project is composed by the undersigned at BYGeDTU at th
96. K 500 00 c UA modulus WK 14 000 d Hydraulic diameter of duct m 0 12500 e Length of duct section m t 5 0000 f Cross sectional face area m 2 t 0 12270E 01 Figure 141 The component parameters for the thermal side of the duct The flow parameters are entered in the ventilation and hydronic facility cf paragraph 23 2 1 5 2 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The rest of the components are added via the same procedure and the needed components are duct_2 duct_3 duct_4 heat_ex heat_coil sup_fan ret_fan and cool_coil The data for the components is listed in appendix 12 23 2 2 8 2 Adding connections Connections are added via the menu item Connections in the Network definition edit menu cf Figure 137 The menu item Connections is selected for creation of a connection between the outside air and the heat exchanger A new connection is added via the menu item add delete copy cf Figure 142 gt add the receiving component for the connection is set to the heat exchanger heat_ex the component node is set to the upper air node which is equal to air node 1 and the connection type is set to From ambient air and since the inlet flow rate is unknown the driving component which vents air to the outside of the inlet of the ventilation system is set to sup_fan the mass diversion ration is set to 1 0 Connections Sending comp Node to Receiving comp Node Conn Type Mass Div add delete copy Fi
97. Radiance lib lib gamma pic to display the file gamma pic It is an image of two columns of grey values immediately adjacent to a region of black and white horizontal lines Blur your eyes as one look at the image and find the grey value that on the right side that matches the black and white horizontal lines on the left side When your eyes are sufficiently blurred one cannot distinguish individual horizontal lines and the number next to this grey value is the gamma for ones monitor Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 To implement this gamma value for Radiance the environment variable DISPLAY GAMMA is set equal to this number in the file bash_profile for example setenv DISPLAY_GAMMA 1 3 export DISPLAY_GAMMA Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 143 Lighting analysis and visualization The specularity and roughness parameters control the way light will be reflected off the material If both are set to 0 the surface is perfectly diffuse and reflects light equally in all directions By varying these values different types of reflections can be defined The specularity factor the amount of light reflected by specular mechanism greater than 0 1 and roughness values greater than 0 2 is not very realistic Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 21 1 3 Calculate view scene An ESP r Radiance scene can be calculated or visualized via the menu i
98. Research By og Byg P O Box 119 Dr Neergaards Vej 15 DK 2970 Hersholm Telephone number 45 4586 5533 Fax 45 4586 7535 The program requires licence and the prices can be found on the following home page www bsim dk prices 4 3 ESP r vs Bsim2002 To elaborate upon a more detailed comparison of the strengths and weaknesses between ESP r and Bsim2002 a table is made where the features of the two programs are compared The comparison is based on tickmarking description and or method and the level of detail on the different features in the two programs The level of detail is given on a scale from low to high where high corresponds to performance of detailed calculations cf Table 3 Another comparison is made on the use of the program based on a descriptive rating cf Table 4 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 17 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 Table 3 A schematic comparison of the two programs ESP r and Bsim2002 Model build ESP r Description and or Levelof Bsim Description and or Level of up features method detail 2002 method detail Climate data Import from Medium X Import from dat High availability epw and text and epw files 1 files 1 hour time hour time step files step files Manually create files with other time steps Daylight Coupling to High X Export to Radiance Medium visualisation Radiance ray r
99. SP r and Radiance in pre simulation mode If ESP r is used in stand alone mode the algorithm calculates the daylight factor on a horizontal work plane via a simple split flux method for interreflected components If ESP r and Radiance is coupled then this algorithm calculates the daylight factor on a horizontal work plane by a combination of analytical formula for sky component and split flux method for interreflected components ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Daylight factor on a horizontal work plane must be provided from the user and they must be determined from separate calculations or measurements Shading and obstructions must be included in the performed calculations or measurements Is solved internally in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Global illuminance sensed by an external horizontal or vertical placed photocell Is solved internally in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A direct run time coupling between thermal and lighting simulation at the time step level using Radiance as illuminance solvers cf paragraph 22 1 7 A ray tracing method is used in Radiance This is computationally intensive ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A set of pre calculated daylight coefficient is being used to calculate the photocell illuminance at each simulation time step level Radiance is used as illuminance solver to calculate the daylight coefficient based on a ray tracing method This is computationally intensive ESP r Version
100. SP r to gather these climate databases in the list in ESP r cf Figure 36 This makes the various climate databases easy accessible To prepare this list the file climatelist must be edited The program uses this file when the climate databases are listed for selection cf Figure 36 and it is therefore a good idea first to make a back up copy of the climatelist file and then edit the original file The file is in the catalogue usr esru esp r climate also contains information of the climate databases cf Figure 40 item name Default UK clm Climate aide Climate data as distributed with ESP r for testing purposes dbf l fusr esru esp r climate clm67 euinter_s 2 1 12 3 30 10 31 12 spring_s 133 14 5 4 9 29 10 summer_s 155 3 9 ewinter_t 6 2 12 2 20 11 26 11 spring_t 17 4 23 4 210 8 10 summer_t 3 7 9 7 avail ONLINE help_start ocation is 52 0N and 0 0E The solar radiation is Direct Normal Month Minimum Time Maximum Time Mean Jan 6 4 20h00 Sun 8 12 7 1dh0O Sun 29 3 8 Feb 1 9 ShOO Tue 14 12 2 13h00 Thu 2 5 2 Mar 0 8 24h00 Fri 31 16 1 15h00 Tue 21 6 8 Apr 1 9 2h00 Sat 1 19 4 15h00 Mon 17 Fel May 0 0 3h00 Wed 3 22 7 1dhOO Thu 11 10 4 Jun 5 0 2h00 Fri 9 21 1 15h00 Tue 6 13 6 Jul 9 4 3h00 Mon 3 27 7 12h00 Mon 17 18 0 Aug 7 7 4h00 Sat 5 24 4 12h00 Tue 1 15 6 Sep 5 0 6h00 Thu 21 22 2 12h00 Tue 26 13 5 Oct 2 2 5h00 Mon 30 19 4 13h00 Sat 7 10 8 Nov 0 8 5h00 Mon 27 14 4 1idhOO Sat 11 5 2 Dec 4 2
101. Sat 1 Jan Set display period lt Importtexport data Help Exit to TIF contents Figure 62 The Tabular menu in the Temporal definitions database where the 5 minutes climate data and data with other frequencies can be imported ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 88 Databases Import specs Entry name Undefined Description Site climate Import file tdf imp Import type ASCII Begin reading line 1 H M Column associations Diffuse hor solar rad lW m2 Ambient DB temperature C Direct nortglob hr solar lim Wind velocity m s Wind direction deg clockwise Relative humidity 2 hoa oOo Oo ocoococccc co View start of import file lt Import data Help Exit to timestep display Figure 63 The Import specs menu in the Temporal definitions database where the path and name of the climate data file is entered the different climate data are associated to the relevant lines in the climate data file The climate data is imported from this menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The path and name of the import file is entered via selecting the menu item Import file cf Figure 63 and entering nome Per projekter ituc dbs dk_dry_5min The columns associations for menu item a to f in Figure 63 are set to be similar to the example in paragraph 13 8 which from menu item a to f is equal to 1
102. The shading corrections factor used in ESP r is calculated according to EN 832 1998 and is based on the total solar energy transmittance g according to formula 2 E ON F 0 30 2 S g 037 2 Where Zps the total solar energy transmittance g with permanent shading g the total solar energy transmittance g without shading Note When constructing a shaded pane which has to replace a pane in the blind shutter control then the two panes must have equal number of layers A new pane is constructed in the optical properties database To add a new pane the menu item import add delete copy element cf Figure 58 is selected and the button add is selected in the dialog box There are no standard pane profiles representing a blind on the outdoor side so the menu item other cf Figure 57 is selected and 3 layer is entered The menu item type cf Figure 58 is set to IT_Uni_shd the description is set to For use in the IT Uni in Copenhagen and the rest of the used output data from WIS 2 0a Test03 is listed in Table 15 and more detailed information on the pane can be found in appendix 10 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 83 Databases The pane calculated in WIS has 5 layers two panes an external Venetian blind and two air gaps The absorptance for the exterior Venetian blind and the absorptance for the exterior facing glass have to be added to account for the
103. The standalone version of the bps module is the stand alone flow simulation module m s which allows independent fluid flow studies of building and or plant configurations which are predominantly pressure driven The module includes buoyancy effects but the user defines the fixed zone temperature ESRU Manual 2002 9 14 The topology program The topology tool cfg assists the user in describing the boundary conditions for all the surfaces in the constructed building model The module reads the problem configuration file to access information on zone geometry and construction used and asks the user for defining the surface topology The topology of a zone is the glue which holds a simulation problem together ESRU Homepage tutorial_7 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 42 Included examples in ESP r 10 Included examples in ESP r A number of examples are included in ESP r Each example focuses on a solution to different aspects in the construction process of a model The pre constructed examples of different complexity focus among other things on daylighting zones networks constructions HVAC systems CFD simulations and etc cf Figure 26 Exemplar Sets simple models realistic models real projects models with a special focust d network ventilation e HYAC f HAC network ventilation g construction processes h windows and daylighting i J k l orm i acous
104. U Report 2001 The part of a building represented by one or more zones may vary in included systems according to the aims of the simulation study The essence of modelling building models is to abstract from the concrete project and only include facilities which will have an effect on the focus area of the simulation study Before using the ESP r facilities for zone definition it is a very good idea to sketch the problem showing the various dimensions and list the properties of the constructions and internal gains 14 1 Design of a zone A new thermal zone is modelled via the Entry Level menu of the Project Manager by selecting the menu item commence new cf Figure 64 Entry Level introduction to esp r database maintenance T o project definition exemplars select existing commence new export current model archive current model O wh 0 A A h validation i reporting gt gt summary j tool set up help exit Project Manager Figure 64 The Entry Level menu which will appear when either ESP r is started from scratch or when the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 is exited in order to address one of the listed menu items in this menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The user is prompted several questions in definition of a thermal zone e The system configuration file name which holds links to the definition of the zone s plant and or controls files to be simulated and it also contains referen
105. _3 446 Surface Type Composition Optics a Sli_part OPAQ G26150G262 7 b SE_part OPAQ G26150G262 c NE_part OPAQ G261506262 d NlJ_ext_wall OPAQ 1125C80 e ceiling OPAQ Lin2C340 f floor OPAQ Lin2C340 g SE_door OPAQ Int _door h Nul_frame OPAQ Frame_Alu_ll i Nil_win_low TRAN 4 16Ar LwE6 org_IT_Uni_1 Zone constructions j NuJ_win_up TRAN 4 16Ar LwE6c org_IT_Uni_2 a kontor_3 446 defined 1 list construction details M Update all zones cesses 2 transparent layer properties tnol inear properties 3 linear thermal conductivity hel gt update construction details er help exit this menu kontor_3 44G exit this menu Figure 82 The Composition of menu used to create the construction files when the building model has been defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Important If geometrical or construction changes have been made for the building model then an update of the construction files is necessary for the changes to be included in a simulation 15 1 Example Creating the mandatory construction file The menu item constructions is entered from the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 66 and the zone kontor_3 44G cf Figure 82 is selected if a prior construction file had been established the menu item update all zones can be used A new file is created by selecting the button Create new file using this name in the dialog box update construction details cf Figure 82 and is finished by selecting
106. a can be exported to other analysis programs and graphing tools The result analysis facility is located under the menu item result analysis in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 170 and the content of the parent result analysis menu is visualised cf Figure 176 results analysis 1 Select result db 2 Select result set 3 Define output period 4 Select zones a Graphs c Timestep reports d Enquire about e Plant results f Indoor air quality g Electrical results h CFD i Sensitivity j IPY r Report gt gt silent Setup res Help Quit Figure 176 The content of the result analysis menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The results analysis menu cf Figure 176 can be used to analyse the simulated building plant network model The analysis can be undertaken graphically via time step reports via a summary on the building performance via plant results or via an indoor air quality analysis The electrical results to the IPV Integrated Performance View in Figure 176 will not be included in this manual The menu item Select result db cf Figure 176 can used to change from one result library files to another if different result library files were saved under different names the menu item Select result set cf Figure 176 can be used to change between different results set in the same result library file the menu items Define output period and Select zone cf Figure 176 needs no further descript
107. a component define connections cf Figure 128 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 168 Networks Figure 128 A general representation of a 4 zone model with configuration of nodes represented as dots linkage points represented as two parallel lines and reference heights The reference heights of the zone nodes are shown as z with a letter as a subscript The reference height of the linkage point of the component is shown as z with a number as a subscript Hensen 1991 There is a positive side and a negative side of the connection The concept of a connections having a positive and a negative side is to keep track of the direction of the fluid flow i e the flow is positive when it happens from the positive side towards the negative side Therefore a connection joining node A to B is different from one joining from B to A More connections can be made to one node ESRU Report 2001 A convenient way to express a flow components inlet or outlet height is via the use of h or hz depending on the interdependence of location of the zone node and the flow component linkage point on the same side h and hy is expressed according to Hensen 1991 cf Figure 128 as h z z m 4 h 2 Z m 5 The reference height to the vertical placed component denoted with the numbers 3 and 4 is found via the use of h or hy depending on the interdependence of the location of the zone node
108. abases Temporal definitions 1 TDF file dk_dry_Smin tdf 2 Description Entries 1 3 period 1 Jan to 1 Jan 2000 4 Timesteps per hour 1 entry name Idescription a Undefined Site climate add delete copy database entry r Reporting gt gt OFF Setup TIF options gt Savelimportlexport TDF db Help Finish TIF Figure 61 The Temporal definitions menu in the Temporal definitions database where the item ALLCLMT which is going to include the climate data from the Danish Reference Year is to be set up ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Tabular Climate datat ALLCLMT 1 Entry name Undefined 2 Description Site climate a Radiation flag O DN 123 GH 0 time difuse dry direct wind wind RH of dayl solar bulb solar speed direc 2 b 0 08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 c 0 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e 0 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f 0 42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 g 0 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 h 0 58 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 67 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 k 0 83 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 92 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m 1 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 1 08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 1 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p 1 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 q 1 33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r 1 42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 s 1 50 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 t 1 58 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 1 67 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v 1 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page Part 1 of k
109. ack window text feedback or to a file file The feedback contains a list with all the profiles in the relevant database Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 85 Databases 13 8 The Temporal definitions database The temporal definitions database is build up around the temporal definition module tdf which manages the description of schedules and much of the time dependant data required for combined heat and mass transfer simulation A range of information can be defined in the temporal definitions database including static and period based attributes The period data held within the database can be defined from minutes to hours A typical use of the temporal definition database would be for assigning short time step climate data in a simulation The temporal definitions database is activated via the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu cf Figure 34 and temporal definitions cf Figure 35 and the temporal definition module will be started cf Figure 60 Temporal definitions 1 TDF file dk_dry_Smin tdf 2 Description Entries 0 3 period 1 Jan to 1 Jan 2000 4 Timesteps per hour 1 entry name Idescription add delete copy database entry r Reporting gt gt OFF Setup TIF options gt Savelimportlexport TIF db Help Finish TDF Figure 60 The Temporal definitions menu in the Temporal definitions database A database wit
110. actuator details period of validity and period data cf Figure 149 is hereafter subsequently selected and edited The menu item sensor details is selected in the Editing options menu cf Figure 149 is set to senses temp in a specific zone the zone kontor_3 44G is selected the location of the sensor is set to zone ait point and no nested control functions is attached to the system The menu item actuator details is selected in the Editing options menu cf Figure 149 is set to air point or surf in kontor_3 44G and the specific location is set to zone air point The menu item period of validity is selected in the Editing options menu cf Figure 149 and the period 1 1 and 31 12 is entered as 1 1 and 31 12 The last item within the Editing options menu period data cf Figure 149 is selected to define the control period The upcoming Control periods menu listed in Figure 153 needs to be edited Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 1 peristartisensed actuated control law data no ltime Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 db temp gt flux flux zone plant 1 0 1 0 1 0 99000 0 99000 0 2 0 add delete a period help exit Figure 153 The content of the Control periods menu for the zones control facility before the editing of period 1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes es
111. add the line setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ust esru esp r lib Note Note that the path usr may have to be replaced with the actual path to the directory esru if ESP r is to be installed in a different place on the system If one is working in UNIX with the platform SUN4 and Solaris 8 the following line has to set up or the bracket has to be added at the end of the line containing set path Set path HOME estu bin HOME estu esp t bin 8 Within the same directory and the home directory for all the users the file bash_profile for a Linux workstation with Red Hat 8 or the file profile in UNIX workstation with SUN4 and Solaris 8 is located The following lines are to be added to these files if these are not already included cf Figure 10 pp 12 bash_profile Get the aliases and functions if f bashrc then bashre fi User specific environment and start up programs PATH PATH HOME bin ust esru bin ust estu esp r bin usr esru bin Radiance export PATH unset USERNAME Note Note that the path usr may have to be replaced with the actual path the directory esru if ESP r is installed in a different place on the system 9 It is necessary to include the following lines in the file login for a Sun4 workstation with Solaris 8 in order for the graphic version of ESP r to work The home directory is often found by the other users typing cd Is al Investigation and implementation of b
112. added by selecting the menu item add delete copy invert the button add at end of list in the dialog box and the build up is done by selecting the following menu items in Figure 49 e Construction The name is entered 4 16Ar LwE6 e General type The type of construction is set to Transparent e Optical properties Is set to org_IT_ Uni 1 e Linked with This menu item is only automatically used for partitions Note All numbers must be entered in SIJ units When the optical properties is set to the pane type org__IT_Uni_1 from the optical properties database a message appears regarding the pane having more layers than listed in the Construction editing menu The only layer in a new construction is 0 250 m Paviout brick cf Figure 48 which needs to be changed to the actual glass layer and two more materials needs to be added in the Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 69 Databases Construction editing menu cf Figure 49 In the construction process of the pane the data for the glass and the gas is needed in order to determine the U value diffusion resistance factor and etc The menu item 0 250 Paviour brick cf Figure 48 is selected and changed to the ip6834nespc LowE Glass from the material database None of the data for the material is changed and the menu item exit is selected The material is accepted and yes is replied to the next question The thickness o
113. ading coefficient usually used to compare the transparency of windows to solar radiation and shading from diffuse radiation If the sky had a uniform light distribution working out how much of the sky dome was visible using the shading table would work as a measure of diffuse exposure However the distribution of light over the sky dome is isotropic usually varying with Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 22h LIST OF SYMBOLS Terminal t_vis t_vis Tsol Tvis Tir Ufactor U value gt Oa Os both azimuth and altitude There are numerous algorithms to predict its distribution under different conditions clear sky overcast etc The Split Flux Daylight Factor Method can be used as a first take on the diffuse component as it assumes a CIE overcast sky distribution calculating a worst case scenario cloudy day in winter Each of the components SC ERC IRC represents the percentage of overall sky illumination arriving at a point not the percentage visible sky dome It does not consider external inter reflections in great detail and uses a relatively simple formula for internal reflections but its quick to calculate and reasonably close The reason RADIANCE would be better is that it can take any isotropic sky distribution it has several available via gensky and calculate the full effect of both internal and external reflections including the albedo of surroun
114. ages on the following homepage http www esru strath ac uk The tutorial can also be manually addressed on the homepage http www esru strath ac uk The content of the tutorial pages contains a general description on ESP r and its facilities Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 41 ESP r Modules and facilities 9 11 The View factors Module The View Factors Module mrt calculates the black body view factors between zone surfaces which are used by the Simulator to evaluate the longwave radiative exchange The module also evaluates the zone comfort level variation The shapefactor program provides facilities to compute the view factors between surfaces in a zone and to define the placement of the mean radiant temperature sensors within zones for detailed indoor environment analysis 9 12 The Insolation and Shading Module The Insolation and Shading Module ish takes the relevant zone geometry and obstructions defining other buildings facades overhang and etc into account for calculating the temporal distribution of shading patterns on exterior surfaces and the distribution of insolation within zones The module also generates and or updates the shading insolation databases 9 13 The Flow Simulation Module Building and or plant fluid flows can be simulated via the Simulator bps jointly with the heat balance calculation taking full account to buoyancy driven air movements
115. agraphs which can be addressed to describe the scene for use in Radiance with the lighting analysis facility calculating daylight factors ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item Sky type location amp time in Figure 108 and Figure 109 Allows the user to define a sky condition CIE clear sunny uniform cloudy CIE standard overcast and CIE clear with no sun date location and ground conditions for use with this scene cf Figure 110 Sky description a Site Latitude 55 4 b Site Longitude 2 8 c Year 1998 d Datet Tue 9 Jun O9h00 e Ground refl 0 2 f Sky gt gt CIE clear sunny g Generate sky description Browse edit sky info file Help exit Figure 110 Parameters that can be altered in order to describe sky and ground conditions for a specific date ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A scene for visualization and lighting analysis can be defined for a specific year day and hour The data is saved in a sky file when a sky description has been generated via the menu item Generate sky description in Figure 110 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 140 Lighting analysis and visualization The menu item Zone amp outside composition in Figure 108 and Figure 109 This facility is used to define compositions for the Radiance scene in terms of materials blind shutter control obstructions inside and outside geometry cf Figure 111 Outside amp Zone compos
116. ails of ESP r Graphic feedback wireframes and graphs Control options menu hd Project Manager enquiries to es u strath ac uk Model Def nition in folder usr esru esp r tr b registration details c model context d upgrade from older format composition f visualisation Networks___ 1 included g plant amp systems h vent hydronic defined i electrical Controls___ 10 included j zones 10 loops plant amp systems vent hydronic global system n define uncertainties Actions o simulation p results analysis q reporting save model help exit this menu L 4 e image control ESP r Project Manager Version 4 40a of December 2002 Copyright 2001 Energy Systems Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Configuration usr esru esp r training house sun_space cfg house_sum cfg Configuration usr esru esp r training basic cfg bld_basic_tm2 cfg Configuration usr esrifesp r training plant hvac_bas cfg bld_recirc cfg pid Configuration usr esru esp r training house svph cfg 1inford cfg ey IS Text feedback window Dialog box Image controls Figure 16 The ESP r graphical interface ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 34 Interface details of ESP r root localhost Screenshots prj mode text Welcome to the ESP r System
117. ains and losses from the zone can be listed The item ventilation air load in Figure 185 is inter zone ventilation Important The losses from the controlled casual gains for lighting involving daylight coefficients Controlled Lights in Figure 185 is not displayed correctly in the result menu or any other menus where the unit is either W or kWhrs This is currently being addressed at the University at Strathclyde If the casual gain from lighting is to be analysed then the controlled fraction of the lighting gain has to be multiplied by the lighting load defined in the operation facility in this case 18W 96W 114W for each simulated time step A simple program was set up in MatLab to calculate the controlled casual gain from lighting The lighting gain was calculated to 63 kWh The incorrect displaying of controlled casual gain from lighting will also affect among other things on the gains and losses from the plant and infiltration cf Figure 185 since the internal temperature will change a little It has not been studied if this is the case for the simulation and result handling in ESP r 26 4 Example The network air and water flow results facility The plant result facility is brought forward by selecting the menu item Graphs from the result analysis menu in Figure 179 Network air wtr flow in Figure 177 and the flow library name is set to ituc nrl The result can be viewed via statistically tabular or graphically output by in
118. al scheme for the defined ventilation system and for opening windows is added according to Figure 130 internal MA heater fanin cooler duct_in internal_Nvy 2 gt external_Nvy ret_fan duct_4 duct_3 duct_2 Lk AO lt lt an kontor_3 44G fan_out duct_out Figure 130 Diagrammatic representation of the nodal scheme representing the fluid flow network according to the later defined ventilation system The nodes for the fluid flow network are sketch in red The menu item Nodes is selected from the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 129 and an internal flow node is added for the zone kontor_3 44G is via the menu item add delete copy node cf Figure 131 add the internal node is named kontor_3 44G the node is defined as an air node the node type and pressure is set to internal unknown the node is associated with the zone kontor_3 44G the node volume is set to 40 m the node height above datum ground level is set to 13 43 m the node temperature is set to Set initial or constant value at 21 C Nodes Name IFluid Type Height Datal Data2 add delete copy node Help Exit Figure 131 The content of the Nodes menu where nodes can be added deleted or copied ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A new external boundary node is added to the network from the Nodes menu cf Figure 131 via the menu item add delete copy node cf Figure 131 add
119. al side of the actual pane with the surface index number 10 The set point for the shading is set to 270 W m 455 W The blind shutter control facility is located within the constructions facility of the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 The facility can be located through the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 constructions the zone kontor_3 44G the defined construction file contains the original construction data for the ITUC building and the menu item Continue with it is selected transparent layer properties cf Figure 90 and only a blind shutter control facility is defined for the TMC type 2 which is identical to the pane NW_win_up cf Figure 90 Therefore no is selected in the dialog box for the blind shutter control for TMC type 1 and yes is selected in the dialog box for the blind shutter control for TMC type 2 Composition of kontor_3 446 Surface Type Composition Optics a Sli_part OPAQ G261506262 b SE_part OPAQ G261506262 c NE_part OPAQ G261506262 d Nul_ext_wall OPAC 1125C80 e ceiling OPAQ Lin2C340 f floor OPAQ Lin2C340 g SE_door OPAQ Int door h Nul_frame OPAQ Frame_Alu_W i NWl_win_low TRAN 4 16Ar LwE6 org_IT_Uni_1 j Nul_win_up TRAN 4 16Ar LwE6e org_IT_Uni_2 1 list construction details 2 transparent layer properties 3 linear thermal conductivity gt update construction details help exit this menu Figure 90 The Compo
120. alculate zone view factors based on an area weighted calculation or on ray tracing calculations and the possibilities are listed in the dialog box The upcoming menu after selecting one of these possibilities is displayed in Figure 102 The MRT sensor view factors the menu item MRT sensor attrib amp calcs in Figure 102 can be based on the prior selection of zone view factor calculation method The menu item MRT sensor attrib amp calcs in Figure 102 will activate the mrt module and with this module one can calculate the MRT sensors view factors for one or more sensors located at a user specified position in a zone 3 MRT sensor view factors are view factors between the rectangular MRT sensor body and the surfaces in the zone Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 133 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors Yiewfactors amp MRT w model ituc cfg path b zonet kontor_3 446 calculation Parameters grid division 6 patch division 10 ao zone view factor calcs MRT sensor attrib amp calcs t M reporting gt gt summary display surface info update file vo J ng uv exit mrt Figure 102 The content of the View factors amp MRT menu when entered from Calculate zone or MRT sensors view factors selecting Based on ray tracing calcs in the dialog box The calculation parameters can be defined and the zone view factors can
121. alculation of photocell illuminance and a control algorithm can set up ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 22 1 1 Casual gain type and control period The menu item Wkd Wkend control in Figure 120 defines which casual gain type to control The control is by default set to lighting system during weekdays Saturdays and Sundays which can be seen from the index 2 2 2 For the control to act on other casual gain types the index can be altered to e0 do not supply control on this these day type s e g 2 0 0 is lighting control for weekdays only If this is the scenario in the casual control facility the gains defined for Saturday and or Sunday in the operation facility will be fully accounted for for the casual gain control to act on occupants e2 for the casual gain control to act on lighting e3 for the casual gain control to act on equipment Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 152 Casual gain control Lighting control The start and ending hours for the active control algorithm can be defined via the menu item Control periods cf Figure 120 Only one control period can be defined for the three day types and for the lighting zones in the selected thermal zone This is usually adequate for most lighting control applications Only one casual gain type can be controlled in the casual gain control facility 22 1 2 Lighting zones A lighting zone can be added or deleted wit
122. also utilises data from all structures in the thermal and moisture evaluation Bsim2002 can import 2D AutoCAD drawings for model making and daylight calculations Results from Bsim2002 can be exported as boundary conditions for CFD programs and building models can be exported as input files to Radiance or for detailed lighting analyses The users of the program only need general knowledge on building design and thermal behaviour to create a building model Mostly consulting engineers engineering universities as DTU and researchers uses Bsim Most of the licences are within Denmark The program can be used within a wide range of projects as Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 16 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 commercial buildings residential buildings and complex buildings where building simulation energy simulation indoor climate daylight and thermal analyses are important Internal loads e g persons lighting equipment moisture load natural ventilation e g infiltration venting heating floor construction and or radiator and ventilation systems are defined by the physical component as well as how it is controlled A supply and exhaust fans as well as total pressure rise and total efficiency define the ventilation system across the fans Units of heat recovery heating and cooling coils and humidifiers can be included in the definition Together with the control
123. and analysed in a simulation E Hodel 3 zones with convective heating amp basic control Figure 28 The selection of the example 3 zones with convective heating amp basic control The button browse and own it can be used to either browse or own the exemplars For a detailed description of the examples consult the log file associated with the model or select the menu item exemplar documentation in the list with the actual example The procedure for viewing the exemplar documentation is to select the menu item exemplars in Entry Level menu cf Figure 27 e g simple models cf Figure 26 exemplar documentation and e g with pre heat controller which will be shown in the text feedback window Note If it is the first time the user is dealing with ESP r it is a good idea to analyse the simple one zone examples and gain understanding on how these are constructed and then proceed to more complex multi zone models with different network and control facilities included Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 44 The strategy of modelling 11 The strategy of modelling When constructing a building model in ESP r there are certain conventions on what facilities has to be included the mandatory facilities and what can be included the optional facilities For each zone in the building model a geometry construction and operation file must be established To enl
124. and the flow component linkage point on the same side h and h4 is expressed according to Hensen 1991 cf Figure 128 as h z z m 6 h Z z m 7 If a flow component is a part of a duct pipe or door network h and hz will be equal to 0 23 2 1 4 Wind reduction factor The wind reduction factor is the ratio of the local wind speed at roof height equals the reference level for wind pressure and coefficients of the measured wind speed as read from the climate file The wind reduction factor can be set or calculated from different models Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 169 Networks Directly entered Powerlaw wind profile Logarithmic wind profile Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory air infiltration model wind profile The supplementary data for different terrain type are listed when using this facility to calculate the wind reduction factor The wind reduction factor can be defined by selecting the menu item set wind reduction factor seen from Fluid Flow Network menu in Figure 123 23 2 1 5 Example Constructing a fluid flow network This paragraph describes the construction of a fluid flow network The network describes the air flow in a natural ventilation system that occurs with open windows and the air flow in a mechanical ventilation system based on heat recovery with an attached cooling unit This facility is included in the Bsim2000 tutorial
125. ange one glass type to another by changing its optical properties Data of the single profiles and the options for editing are activated by choosing the relevant pane the menu item add delete copy layer cf Figure 58 and the upcoming buttons in the dialog box are referred to below Add insert The design of the profile appears in the control option menu Here the glass where the new layer is to be placed can be selected and the new layer will have the same optical properties as the selected glass There are no restrictions as to how many layers can be added Delete The design of the profile appears in the control option menu It appears from the menu that the inner layer is not included in the list cf Figure 59 One of the other layers can be deleted by choosing the layer and ending with Exit Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 84 Databases Optical layer select one to copy a refrac abs Q abs 40 abs 55 70 G80 b 1 520 0 310 0 330 0 350 0 370 0 370 1 000 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 Help Exit Figure 59 The Optical layer menu The menu is the same for both copying and deleting a glass in a pane ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Copy Here the design of the profile appears in the control option menu It appears from the menu that the inner layer is not included in the list Choose the layer to be copied and close with Exit The copied lay
126. aph 6 but will also be present in the rest of the manual Filenames directories and paths are represented in this style The type indicates an actual file path or directory on your Red Hat Linux UNIX Solaris Radiance or ESP r system Examples The file usr esru tutorial esp r tut contains a description of many different subjects in ESP r where usr esru tutorial is the directory and esp r tut is the file Linux and UNIX Commands This type of words is mostly used in describing the installation procedure of ESP r Linux and UNIX commands are represented in this style which indicates that a command or a phrase is to be entered on the command line in a terminal and followed by pressing enter cf Figure 9 The phrase sometime contains more than one type of style Examples Use the command less climatelist to view the content of the file climatelist where less is the command and climatelist is the relevant file cf Figure 9 Per localhost Src esp ridatabases Skal Konsol lt 2 gt Session Redig r Vis Ops tning Hj lp Per localhost Per s cd home Per Src esp r databases a Per localhost databases less climatelist Figure 9 A section of a terminal where the command less climetelist can to be carried out with pressing enter This type of words is mostly used in describing the installation procedure of ESP r and Radiance in paragraph 6 File editing This type of words is mostly used in describing the installation proced
127. arge the details one or more of the following files can be set up and some of them replace the mandatory files a shading insolation file a blind shutter control file a view factor file an air flow file plant amp systems file a casual gain control file Integrated Performance View file and a convection coefficients file All these files can be created and or edited through the Project Manager Database files and files created by the simulator are will be included on the system ESP r offer many ways in which to represent a building model and analyse the built environment but ESP r also expects that the project is correctly modelled and that it has a thermophysical sense ESRU Homepage tutorial_5 This can cause many problems in designing a building model for a novice if a few simple rules and some good advices are not followed So before using ESP r it is a good idea to study this manual and later combine it with exercises on the following homepage http www esru strath ac uk gt courseware and ESP r 11 1 Simple modelling advices It can be a good idea to follow a few simple advices in the access to model a building model in ESP r 1 Do not use ESP r or and other building simulation tools until after the planning consideration of design and usable tools This will result in a more effective use of the program 2 Perform the modelling in steps and test each step in a combined simulation and result analysis Experience has shown
128. assive Solar Programme CAC s PASSYS project and SERC founded projects ESRU Manual 2000 These activities have ensured that ESP r will continue evolving in regards to validation technical development and interface improvement well into the future It is possible for users to further develop change or include source code within ESP r ESP r is programmed in the programming languages Fortran 77 and C Technical and operational information on ESP r can be found on the homepage http www esru strath ac uk Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 26 Installation of ESP r and Radiance 6 Installation of ESP r and Radiance 6 1 Machine environment software and installation ESP r differs from the normal known programs by not running optimal in a windows environment A few parts of the program should work in windows but it is recommended that following paragraphs are used in according to the machine environment software and installation 6 1 1 Machine environment ESP r requires the following hardware and software e A UNIX or Linux workstation offering X Windows and with at least 128 Bytes memory Implementations exist for SUN OS and Silicon Graphics platforms ESRU Manual 2002 e Linux offering a RedHat Mandrake platforms and all kind of UNIX platform can be used e It is recommended to have a disk capacity of 10 or 20 Gbytes to store the program source code and simu
129. atabase is entered via selecting the menu item database maintenance in the Entry level menu cf Figure 34 constructions cf Figure 35 and make a new database The path and the file designation dbs ituc constrdb is accepted The model must be geometrically constructed in order to make use of the dbs folder It saves time moving and readdressing files on the system if the model is geometrically modelled before establishing new databases Note If no path is typed the new constructions database is placed in the catalogue from where ESP r was started yes is answered to the question A file named ituc constrdb was found overwrite it because there are no other files with that filename in that directory 13 4 2 1 2 Adding a new construction The construction database is entered via the menu item database maintenance in the Entry level menu cf Figure 34 constructions cf Figure 35 and browse or edit this file and the available constructions in the active database is listed in the Construction database menu cf Figure 46 A new construction exterior wall cf paragraph 12 1 is added by selecting the menu item add delete copy invert cf Figure 46 and the button add at end of list in the dialog box and the Construction editing menu opens cf Figure 48 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 66 Databases Construction editing a Constr
130. ation programmes especially ESP r 47 A presentation of the IT University of Copenhagen 3104 342 ae kontor_3 446 700 4364 2000 a 502 2100 502 Figure 30 A plan and a sectional elevation drawing of the worst case office kontor_3 44G All the dimensions are in mm Madsen et al 2001 The constructions and the materials used are described in paragraph 12 1 and the casual gain and the ventilation included in the model is described in paragraph 12 2 12 1 The constructions used The different constructions and the dimensions of the material used for the office kontor_3 44G in IT University of Copenhagen is described this section The code name used to represent the different constructions in the manual is listed in appendix 2 The external wall is put together of 80 mm concrete on the inside 125 mm insulation and a shadow box a sealed pane with two glasses covering on the outside Madsen et al 2001 which is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial but is in this one cf Figure 31 U value 0 24 W m K The partitions are put together of 26 mm gypsum on the inside 50 mm insulation and 26 mm gypsum on the outside Madsen et al 2001 cf Figure 31 U value 0 58 W mK 231 102 Facade Partition 26 mm shading box 2 13 mm gypsum 125 mm insulation kl 39 30 mm insolation kl 39 80 mm concrete 2 13 mm gypsum Figur
131. ay tracing tracing internal external images daylight factor and glare Thermal Add to U value Low Add to U value Low bridging Windows Manually include Medium X Automatically Medium panes and frames includes both panes Incident angles and and frames Poor on support double skin double skin facades Import facades Thermal from Window 4 1 performance of support WIS and panes to be support Window improved soon 5 1 Shading On off control of Medium X Diffuse sky Medium shadings and low radiation is not include near and blocked by remote obstructions only obstructions Do by overhangs and not calculate side fins On off diffuse shading step wise and Obstructions do not continues control of diminish the diffuse shading solar radiation Work around exists for including diffuse solar radiation for both shading and obstructions Plants User defined High X Predefined HVAC Medium HVAC system system water borne electricity and air Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 18 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 Built from components as boilers heating coil and etc Controls X Multiple control High X Limited control Medium options as PID options linear and hysteresis etc on off Model import X AutoCAD v14 and High X 2D import of floor Medium XZIP for 3D model plans import Panes from Window 4 1 Mod
132. be adjusted as needed The letters below references to Figure 38 e Table one day analysis Under this function there will be made a list by the day of all the parameters of the climate databases for analysing the requested days f Radiation gt gt dir normal this parameter can only be changed to global horizontal radiation by typing in a password that is obtainable by application to the department ESRU at University of Strathclyde in Glasgow Scotland g Edit climate data Here it is possible to edit the parameters of the relevant climate databases h Export data to text file Here the climate can be exported to a text file i Import data from text file Here climate can be imported from a text file j S Here it is possible to control the environment and the format of the output 13 2 3 Installing a new climate database Refer to appendix 5 13 2 4 Addition of climate databases to the list in the climate database function Adding a new climate database to the file usr esru esp r climate climatelist can save much time If a climate database is standard for many of the projects that are projected it is also a good idea to install this as the standard climate databases in the program Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 56 Databases When many projects are worked on around the world and many of the same climate databases are reused it can facilitate the work with E
133. be calculated ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The calculation parameters grid and patch listed in Figure 102 are used if the analytical calculation method of view factors cannot be used e g in more complex geometries Instead a bubble method based on ray tracing is used Refer to the above listed documentation for a detailed description of this The surface rectangle is divided into a smaller sub rectangle and a bubble semi sphere is placed on each Each bubble is divided into a number of rings and each ring is divided into a number of patches The patches must have equal surface area to yield equal solid angles The view factors are then numerically determined via ray tracing in which a large amount of rays is send out from the surface through the bubble towards the other surfaces The view factor to a surface is then determined by the fraction of rays striking a given patch on the bubble on its way to the surface The grid division bubbles on a surface and patches in the bubble rings can be set in this menu Guido et al 1988 The facility can also be used for re evaluation previously calculated MRT sensors view factors if a change concerning MRT sensor placement have is to be made The default given value for emissivity can must be set to actual values used in the construction composition The temperature of any surface can be set to a given temperature in order to analyse the impact of surface temperature variations on the m
134. be changed are the F files solar F for the solar algorithms These files are placed in a sub folder to the following folder usr esru src esp r e g the file solar F placed in usr esru src esp r esrubps The source code can be changed with a regular text editor as vi After changing the source code the module s using the F file must be re compiled or the whole program must be re compiled Figuring out which modules uses the changed F file s the file Makefile in each of the usr esru src esp r esru folders can be examined for containing the F file To re compile the modules the directory usr esru src esp r is entered and the command Install bps is issued if the file solar F was changed More modules can be compiled at the same time e g if two modules bps and pro needs to be re compile enter the command Install bps pro The whole program can also be re compiled by entering the command Install in the folder usr esru src esp r 7 Structure and functionality of ESP r 7 1 The directory structure of ESP r The most important directories in the ESP r system usr esru esp r The parent directory of among other things the below listed folders bin Folder containing all the modules to ESP r climate Folder containing the climate library files where the file dk_dry hourly values for the climate data for the Danish design reference year and dk_dry_5min 5 minutes values for the climate data for the Danish design referen
135. box A list appears where the composition of the window type shall be chosen and the options are a single layer glass or a pane with or without shading cf Figure 57 Typical glazing types a Out Iglass Inside b Out Iglasslairlblind Inside c Out Iglasslairlglass Inside d Out Iglasslairlglasslairlblind Inside e Out Iglasslairlblindlairlglass Inside f Out Iglasslairlglasslairlglass Inside g Out Iglasslairlglasslairlglass lairlblind Inside h Out Iglasslairlglasslairlblindlairlglass Inside i Other Help Exit Figure 57 The Typical glazing types menu where the pane can be defined with or without the use of shading ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The shading can either be placed on the inside or be placed within the pane cf Figure 57 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 80 Databases Choose a type that corresponds to the topical system continuing using the menu item exit and a list corresponding to the Optical Property Set menu shown in Figure 56 appears The contents of the list can be edited according to output from Window 4 1 and 5 1 for American products and for European products the contents of the list can be edited with data generated by the program WIS 13 7 3 2 1 Example adding a low energy pane according to the CEN method A pane 4 16Ar LwE6 cf paragraph 12 1 is being constructed in WIS 2 0a Test03 which is close to being si
136. bstruction menu create window reveal cf Figure 92 The surface window of which the reveal is relevant is chosen NW_win_low the root name for the reveal is entered as win_lo and the depth of the window reveal is set to 0 02 metres The composition of the reveal is set to Frame_Alu_W Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 124 Shading and insolation The procedure is repeated for the window NW_win_up and the zone kontor_3 44G with obstructions has the appearance shown in Figure 95 Figure 95 The zone kontor_3 44G with windows a door and obstructions placed in connection with the window in the ITUC building The window reveal is displayed in bold ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 19 2 Shading and insolation analysis If there has not been taken any notice to obstruction blocks and solar insolation distribution in this facility all internal surfaces will receive diffuse solar radiation ESRU Manual 2002 The ish module provides a facility to calculate and store the temporal variation of distribution of shading patterns on external surfaces and the distribution of insolation within zones It consults the model configuration for the relevant zone geometry and obstructions The facility can be activated from the Obstruction menu via the menu item shading amp insolation cf Figure 92 or via the Zone Definition menu shading amp insolation cf Figure 84
137. but is handled differently and cooling is no included for that ventilation system In order to simulate a system as close to as possible to a real system in which building plant and flows are coupled together a detailed ventilation system exemplar is constructed The data used for window openings and different components can be found in appendix 13 The menu item vent hydronic is selected from the Model Definition menu cf Figure 122 The air flow network is defined as a network with all air and a new file nets ituc afn is created cf Figure 129 for the upcoming Fluid Flow Network menu Fluid Flow Network a Network nets ituc afn air based network b Network title lt N A gt No of nodes i 0 c Nodes No of components 0 d Components No of connections 0 e Connections Wind reduction factor 1 00 f Set wind reduction Browse network Update network help Exit Figure 129 The content of the Fluid Flow Network menu The numbers is parenthesis describes the number of item included in the different menu items except from the for the wind reduction factor which describes the magnitude of the wind reduction factor ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 170 Networks 23 2 1 5 1 Adding nodes Nodes are added via the menu item Nodes in the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 129 The nod
138. c in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 122 There are two possibilities in defining air movement within this menu by schedules or networks The scheduled air flow is similar to the one earlier defined via the zone operations facility cf paragraph 16 This part of the manual focuses on the networks facility cf Figure 123 Hydronic of relating to or bring a system of heating or cooling that involves the transfer of heat by circulating a fluid as water or vapour in a closed system of pipes Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 161 Networks Fluid Flow Network a Network networks vent_rec air amp water network b Network title lt N A gt No of nodes 11 c Nodes No of components 6 d Components No of connections 11 e Connections Wind reduction factor 0 44 f Set wind reduction Browse network Update network help Exit Figure 123 The content of the Fluid Flow Network menu The numbers is parenthesis describes the number of items included in the different menu items except from the number included for the wind reduction factor which represent the used wind reduction factor ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 23 2 1 1 Description of fluid flow nodes The nodes in a fluid flow network represent either internal or boundary pressure The menu item Nodes cf Figure 123 are characterized by name fluid type air or
139. ce year cf paragraph 13 8 1 can be placed databases Folder containing the different databases distributed with the program manual Folder containing a tutorial for ESP r if there is no access to the internet training Folder containing all the files for the examples included in ESP r 7 2 User folder structure Separate from the directories for the system files the user of ESP r will have a separate folder for each started projects modelled in ESP r It is a good idea to have a parent directory for the new projects and a directory for archived projects During the commencing of a new project the Project Manager creates the directory structure for each project that will contain the relevant project files The directories for a new project Project_name is Project_name parent project directory Project_name cfg contains the system files Project_name ctl contains the control files Project_name doc contains the reports and notes Project_name nets contains the network files Project_name temp files containing information on materials which changes thermophysical properties in a simulation gt is here the same as the path usr esru esp r Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 32 Interface details of ESP r Project _name rad contains the Radiance connected files Project _name dbs contains the project databases Project _name zones contains the zone files
140. ces to other associated files The system configuration file name is also the parent project folder name for the model The following subdirectories to the model will be established o cfg system files ctl control files zones zone files nets networks files doc report and note files O00 0 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 90 Definition of zones O O O temp files containing information on materials which changes thermophysical properties in a simulation dbs project databases libraries rad radiance connected files images image files Brief description of the model A project log file name containing the notes on the project which at any time can be edited Association of project images which can be included at any time Site latitude e g 55 4 for the Danish Design Reference Year Longitude difference from reference given in degrees from the nearest local time meridian e g 2 81 for the Danish Design Reference Year e Year for schedules and assessment The user is here after passed to the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 Model Definition a id ITUC cfg in folder ITUC cfg b registration details c model context d upgrade from older format e composition f visualisation Networks___ 0 included g plant amp systems h vent hydronic i electrical Controls___ 0 included j zones k plant amp systems l1 venthyd
141. ch makes the approach understanding and use of it both easier and faster The aim of the manual is to address the following topic e Installation Give a concise description on how to install the program and how to install the program Radiance that can be directly coupled with ESP r for lighting simulations e Background Understanding the different facilities included in the program will enlarge the use and understanding of it Specifically o Constructing models Handling databases constructing geometry and constructing mandatory files as simple operations o Installations Depending on the type of building to be modelled it will contain a variety of different installations as heating and ventilation systems o Coupling with Radiance Radiance is used as a third party illuminance solver which supplier detailed calculations of the solar radiation e Simulation and result analysis The most important part in constructing a building model is the simulation and the subsequent result analysis e Examples To make the program easier to use examples are included to illustrate different topics This is an important part of a manual since it often makes the use of the program easier and more understandable e Documentation ESP r is open source and a well documented building simulation program References to literature documenting the calculation procedure in the different facilities have been included where it is available The purpose of this man
142. component requires three categories in the specification Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 71 Databases 1 General component description 2 The connected volume discretisation scheme 3 The required thermophysical data ESRU Manual 1993 The entrance to the database plant components database is located via the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu in Figure 34 plant components cf Figure 35 and the ESP r plant db menu opens cf Figure 51 ESP r plant db a Db plantec dbl b List amp export compnts c Insert amp import compnts d Delete components e Edit a component Help Finish ESRUpdb Figure 51 The ESP r plant db menu where options for editing are choose a new database file draw up or export a list with the contents of the database add import delete and edit a component in the database ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The existing plantc db1 file contains a wide range of different plant components cf Figure 52 which can be used for a wide range of purposes as ventilation heating cooling etc There are rarely any needs for defining new plant components since both the thermophysical and flow data for each component can be altered during the definition of a plant amp systems and flow regimes 1 2 zs 4 5 p 7 8 g 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
143. connected to a calculation type in a lighting zone Table 24 Additional input data concerning the photocells in a lighting zone ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Calculation Additional input data Analytical DF e The photocell location is expressed with X Y Z coordinates m relative to Coupling the site origin amp e The photocell vector sensing direction expressed with X Y Z coordinates Daylight i e a horizontal photocell facing up 0 0 1 or facing down 0 0 1 coefficient User DF e The photocell location is expressed with X Y Z coordinates m relative to the site origin e The photocell vector sensing direction expressed with X Y Z coordinates i e a horizontal photocell facing up 0 0 1 or facing down 0 0 1 e One daylight factor for each transparent multilayer construction and daylight factors is expressed as a ratio Extern e The surface number for photocell position photocell e Photocell orientation 0 horizontal and 1 vertical 22 1 7 Example defining casual gain control for lighting This example is defined using another control form ideal dimming than in the Bsim2000 tutorial where an on off control is used Due to the simulation time a daylight coefficient method is used with one lighting zone containing two photocells in preference to multiple lighting zones and a direct simulation coupling with Radiance The daylight coefficients are calculated by Radiance in pre simulatio
144. connection connected connected zone type lemmiter supply extract Add Delete Copy Figure 146 The Linkage menu where the connected zone the connection type the inlet and extract component to a zone can be defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 184 Controls 24 Controls Control is a key component in an ESP r simulation and is achieved through the manipulation of driving variables such as heat flux to bring a state variable i e temperature to a desired level ESP r provides two paradigms for control ideal controls for use in early design investigations and a more realistic implementation which can be associated with detailed representations of plant systems ESRU Homepage tutorial_3 It is often convenient in early design stage investigations of building models to include plant systems that are ideal in their representations The plant systems using the ideal control facility are set to have no inertia and time dependant characteristics ESRU Homepage tutorial_3 Plant system control functions are defined by sensors actuators schedule of operation set points and control laws The specification of controls is done within the Project Manager via selection from lists with options and specification of values The control strategy for a building can be established to comprise one or more control fu
145. cription of electrical data The menu item Electrical data cf Figure 135 can be used to define the electrical data for the plant amp system This facility will not be included in this manual 23 2 2 6 Link to fluid flow networks In order to simulate a system as close as possible to a real system in which building plant and flows are represented e g a mechanical ventilation system and building openings the plant network fluid flow network and building must be linked together The linkage to the building zones can be done when both the fluid flow and plant network has been defined The linkage of the plant Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 177 Networks network to the fluid flow network via the menu item link to fluid flow networks in Figure 135 is set up in terms of plant connections to fluid flow connections and not vice versa Each plant connection must have a mapping to a fluid flow network component The mapping of the plant network and flow network requires that the fluid flow network contains similar connections as the sketched the plant amp system network components e g ducts and fans are represented in the fluid flow network description 23 2 2 7 Link plant to zone The defined plant can be coupled to one or more building zones depending on the plant definition The following procedure is carried out when using the menu item Linking a plant to a building zone s
146. d an on off control a period start time 17 and the set point temperature of 18 C and 1 00 is entered for direct injection The sensor details actuator details period of validity and period data entered for Saturday and Sunday are similar to the data entered for the weekdays but with a set point temperature of 18 C and with a period start time set to midnight 0 Figure 166 show the Control periods menu for ventilation and hydronic control after editing of the three periods Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 3 per startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 06 00 dry bulb gt flow on off 18 0 b 2 8 00 dry bulb gt flow on off 23 0 c 3 17 00 dry bulb gt flow on Z off 18 0 add delete a period help exit Figure 166 The content of the Control periods menu for the control of the lower window in the vent hydronic facility after the three periods has been edited ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Control periods menu and the Editing options menu can be exited and the Controls menu looks like Figure 167 after the editing of the first control loop Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 198 Controls Controls a control focus gt gt vent hydronic b descriptiont Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops ae l cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivali
147. d correctly Both MatLab and Bsim2002 calculations shows a good agreement on the irradiation striking these two surfaces On the other hand ESP r shows a difference of up to 13 of the irradiation striking these surfaces Another problem is that the default Perez sky distribution model is an old version from 1987 Finally the detail in which modelling or other kind of error are displayed during a simulation The error MZPMXT warning component 3 node 2 is a connector with no with no exit connection points out that the linkage between the plant amp system and the vent hydronic network has not been set up 27 3 Possible solutions to the disadvantages of ESP r This manual will hopefully solve some of the problem that new users will have using ESP r A possibility of including a step wise control on the blind shutter facility could be to include one or more sensors in a zone sensing for example incident radiation and or glare in user defined locations in a zone cf Figure 192 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 223 Discussion Figure 192 adjusting the height of a blind shutter or a Venetian blind according to two internal sensors is the angel from horizontal to the sun and the known z coordinates can be used to calculate the unknown coordinate z in which plus some extra centimetres the shading shall be pulled down to The shading can be imposed to the lowest coordinate z2 for
148. d in the dialog box The menu item type cf Figure 56 is set to org_IT_Uni_1 and the description is set to No shd pane IT Uni in Copenhagen The relevant output data from WIS which is to be entered in ESP r is listed in Table 14 The input of the WIS data in the Optical Property Set menu can be seen from Figure 58 and more detail information on the pane can be found in appendix 9 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 81 Databases Table 14 Output data from WIS 2 0a Test03 needed in ESP r for defining a pane The data which is to be implemented in ESP r can be found via the buttons Report and Create in WIS 2 0a Test03 List with the relevant data from the created Data Inserted in ESP r under report in WIS 2 0a Test03 t_vis at an angel of incidence of 0 0 674 visible transmission at 0 abs 1 abs 3 0 33 solar abs amp refl for docu r_sol_o for solar refl 0 33 Both at an angel of incidence of 0 U value 1 09 U value for docu t_sol at an angel of incidence of 0 40 55 70 0 34 0 32 0 29 direc trn and 80 0 21 0 1 g val at an angel of incidence of 0 40 55 70 0 37 0 37 0 33 heat gain doc and 80 0 24 0 14 abs 1 corresponding to glass number 1 at an angel 0 31 0 33 0 35 refrac abs 0 abs 80 of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 0 37 0 37 abs 3 corresponding to glass number 2 at an a
149. d period loop location location typelduringlin day e 1 1 060 0 312 Owkd 1365 3 f Sat 1365 1 e Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 167 The content for vent hydronic Controls menu after the control configuration of control loop 1 has finished ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Another control loop for the upper opened area of the button window is also added The control loop is defined similar to control loop 1 with minor changes Control loop 1 is copied using the menu item add delete copy control loop or day type cf Figure 167 copy loop the control function index to copy is set to index number 1 and the result of the copying is displayed in Figure 168 Controls a control focus gt gt vent hydronic b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops 2 2 cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid Iperiod loop location location typelduringlin day e 1 1 60 0 312 Owkd 1365 3 f Sat 1365 1 g Sun 1365 1 h 2 1 0 312 Owkd 1365 3 i Sat 1365 1 j Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 168 The content for vent hydronic Controls menu after the configuration and copying of the first control loop ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Menu item h cf Figure 168 is se
150. d for three periods for the casual gain type equipment computer In the morning Lunch break In the afternoon Start and finish hour 8 12 12 13 13 17 Gain is specified as Watts Watts Watts Sensible and latent gains W 100 0 25 0 100 0 Radiant amp convective fraction 0 2 0 8 0 2 0 8 0 2 0 8 General and task lighting are added in two similar procedures as for equipment via the menu item add delete copy gains cf Figure 86 the button add Lights and is only defined for Weekdays which is selected in the dialog box The questions after the selection of Weekdays are answered according to Table 21 Table 21 Data entered for casual gain type lighting General lighting Task lighting Start and finish hour 8 17 8 17 Gain is specified as Watts Watts Sensible and latent gains W 96 0 18 0 Radiant amp convective fraction 0 8 0 2 0 8 0 2 People load is added in the same way as the equipment and lighting was added via the menu item add delete copy gains the button add Occupt Weekdays in the dialog box The people load as the lighting level also differs during the day The load is set to on full from 0800 to 1700 13 The sensible and latent gains is referenced from ESRU Report 2001 14 The radiant and convective fraction is referenced from ESRU Manual 2002 S The sensible and latent gains is referenced from ESRU Report 2001 The radiant and convective frac
151. d in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 pp 94 add delete copy a surface inserted into a surface and the surface SE_part is selected The new surface is inserted in the base the button at base in the dialog box of the existing surface SE part and the x offset with and height of the new surface is set to 0 2 and 2 5 respectively and the position is thereafter accepted The name of the new surface is set to Part_kon PE the construction for the inserted surface is set to Lin2C340 and yes is answered to update the adjacent surface The surfaces SE_part contains more vertices than is needed including the surface SW_ door which can course problems when defining boundary conditions for the surfaces SE_part Part_kon PE Floor and SW_part The surfaces SE_part Part_kon PE Floor and SW_part cf Figure 78 pp 105 are subsequently selected in the Surface topology of menu cf Figure 78 pp 105 and the associated vertices are listed in the dialog box These are changed as listed in Table 18 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 104 Definition of zones Table 18 The order of vertices for the actual surface are changed as listed in order to eliminate the problem edges Surface Original vertices New vertices SE part 2 25 28 27 263 76291211109 28 27 26376 Part kon PE 25 26 27 28 2 2627 28291211109 Floor 14326252 143262
152. date the database if the changes are to take effect Choosing the menu item update db in the Pressure Coefficient db menu does this cf Figure 41 13 4 The Material and construction database The specification of the thermal properties for materials and the definition of constructions are built up in the material and construction databases respectively After activating the entrance to one of the databases the menu items material and constructions in Figure 35 the following options are given e browse or edit this file If the database is available it can be looked through and if the user has written permission the materials or the constructions can be edited new items can be added and others can be deleted It is also possible to add material types and invert constructions If the database is a standard ESP r database it is a good idea first to make a copy of this cf the bullet point make project copy of database e select another file Here the path and the filename can be given to a new database If this is found it can be viewed and edited if the user has rights to write to the file e make a new database Here a new empty database is installed with the file designation that is chosen The users can then freely add delete and edit topics in it e make project copy of database The standard database or other user defined databases can here be copied to the relevant project folder dbs and a standard filename is added to this da
153. days but is possible to define in Bsim2002 The menu item vent hydronic in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 148 is activated If controls for zones plant amp systems vent hydronic or global system have not been added then a control file named ituc ctl is created It is assumed that a prior control scheme for zones and plant amp systems have been added otherwise consult paragraph 24 1 and 24 1 1 1 for listed questions The Controls menu for vent hydronic control is shown in Figure 163 Controls a control focus gt gt vent hydronic b descriptiont Heating during the heating c description no descrip loops Eoy cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid Iperiod loopllocationllocationltypelduringlin day add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 163 The vent hydronic Controls menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item control focus cf Figure 163 is set to vent hydronic and a new control loop is added using the menu item add delete copy control loop or day type cf Figure 163 add loop for the day types weekday Saturday Sunday and the periods in the three day types are set to 3 1 and 1 respectively cf Figure 164 which illustrates the Control menu after the definition of the three day types Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 196 Contr
154. de was not been investigated Based on the prior mentioned assumption the different facilities have been analysed modelled simulated and as a part of the validation of the modelling the results was studied The modelling process is described in Figure 1 Build up of a facility vw ee 7 inulation of the building mode vw Result studying and comparing with theory and expectations vY D th f It gr with theory and exp ta tior No Yes Changing the facility Figure 1 An illustration of the procedure for modelling The modelling process described in Figure 1 contained the following steps 1 A facility e g the principles of a ventilation system was studied and modelled 2 A simulation was performed for critical periods 3 The results of the simulation were studied and a quality assurance of the output was carried out The quality assurance was based on comparing the results with the described theory and Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 3 Introduction with the expectations of the magnitude of a result For example a constant mass flow rate was modelled for the ventilation system and the result showed changes of the magnitude of the mass flow rate of up to 10 which was not expected and did not match the theory 4 If the result did not agree with the studied theory and expectations the input data for the facility was changed and the pr
155. defined profile in Figure 72 a profile must be created This is done from the Model definition menu cf Figure 65 selecting the menu items model context ground temperature profiles and add profile Ground temperature data can be found in DS418 6 udgave 2002 04 02 or calculated from prEN ISO 13370 1998 Important Prior to attribute a partition an inverted copy of the partition must be constructed in the constructions database cf paragraph 13 4 2 Note Note that in principle any multi layer construction can be applied to any surface e g the surface name extern_wall is just a label for a particular construction 14 2 1 Example Modifying surface attributes The menu item surface attributes from the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 is selected for modifying the surface attributes Many surfaces are modified subsequently for the surface name compositions and boundary conditions The menu item attribute many cf Figure 71 surface name All items Exit and the name in columns two of Table 16 is used for the surface names Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 98 Definition of zones Table 16 The modified surface attributes for the zone kontor_3 44G Original surface name New surface name Composition Boundary conditions Surf 1 SW part G26150G26 Dynamic similar to this zone Surf 2 SE part G26I50G26 Dynamic
156. ding buildings and inter reflections between them It takes longer to calculate a lot longer but will give you a better result ECOTECT pretty much leads you by the hand through all the complex RADIANCE settings so it shouldn t be too daunting Cardiff University home page A terminal is the same as a dos window with a dos prompt in a windows workstation The light transmittance WIS The light transmittance WIS The solar transmittance of the glazing layer t value window 4 1 5 1 The visible transmittance of the glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The thermal infrared transmittance of a glazing layer window 4 1 5 1 The total heat transfer coefficient for the window system W m K window 4 1 5 1 The U value of the pane W m K WIS Means that the next step in the process is to do as follows and an explanation may also be added in the process The zone air temperature C The supply air temperature C Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 228 References 30 References ESRU Manual 2002 The ESP r System for Building Energy Simulation User Guide Version 10 Series ESRU Manual U02 1 University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland ESRU Report 2001 Data Model Summary ESP r Version 9 Series Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland ESRU Manual 2000 The ESP r System for Building Energy Simulation User Guide Version 9 S
157. ds menu for the zones control facility after the editing of period 1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Control periods menu and the Editing options menu can be exited Before the zones Control menu cf Figure 152 is exited the defined control loop is linked to the zone kontor_3 44G via the menu item link loops to zones and the defined controls and changes are updated by selecting the menu item update control data cf Figure 152 24 1 2 Modelling of plant and systems control Prior to using this facility the plant amp system network must be defined as described in paragraph 23 2 2 The control scheme acts upon the components of the defined plant amp systems network facility cf Figure 145 The content of this facility is similar to the description in paragraph 24 1 24 1 2 1 Example defining proportional control for the defined ventilation system with heat recovery Ventilation with heat recovery is an effective way to control air flow air change and to save energy during the process Ventilation can also be used as a part of temperature control and night cooling The menu item plant amp systems in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 148 is activated If controls for zones plant amp systems vent hydronic or global system have not been added then a control file ituc ctl needs to be created It is assumed that the zone control scheme for zones has 32 The rate at which heat is injected by the plan
158. ds to the opposite zone cf Figure 76 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 102 Definition of zones Rt Figure 76 A building model illustrating the overlap of constructions and internal zones ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The best way to divide a surface is via the menu item surface list amp edges in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 pp 94 for the actual zone It is also possible to add surfaces copy surfaces and delete surfaces within this menu item A surface is modified via the menu item surface list amp edges cf Figure 68 pp 94 add insert copy a surface cf Figure 77 and the appropriate option for modification is selected and the attributes can be described as in paragraph 14 2 consult the multizone exemplars for more help 14 4 2 Problem edges When copying a surface within zones or from one zone to another complication can emerge and is displayed as PROBLEM EDGES The problem edges can be displayed via the menu item surface list amp edges cf Figure 68 pp 94 and check surface vertex topology in the Surface topology of menu cf Figure 77 Surface topology of kontor_3 446 enclosure 8 PROBLEM EDGES Surface INo IVWerts anti clk name Ilvertlfrom outside a Sli_part 44 2 6 5 b SE_part 6 28 27 26 3 7 c NE_part 434867 d NWlext_wall 10 4 1 5 8 4 e ceiling 45 6 7 8 f floor 6 1 4 3 26 25 g SE_door 4 9101
159. e Technical University of Denmark DTU during the period February 1 to July 31 2003 The thesis mainly focuses on developing a manual for the Scottish developed building simulation program ESP r but the thesis also contains a comparison on the possibilities in using ESP r and the Danish developed building simulation program Bsim2002 and finally it outlines guidance for selecting the most suitable program for different design projects The appendices are found in a separate report Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r Appendices Professor Svend Svendsen Ph D student Peter Weitzmann and assistance professor Toke Rammer Nielsen was respectively supervisor and co supervisors on the thesis This thesis could not have been completed without the help and the support of many people to whom I am very grateful My gratitude is sincerely expressed to Professor Svend Svendsen for his guidance and never ending stream of ideas while this study was undertaken I wish to thank in no particular order Ph D student P Weitzmann DTU assistance professor T R Nielsen DTU Ph D student Gregers Reimann Dr J Hand the University of Strathclyde Dr I A Macdonald the University of Strathclyde and Dr N Kelly the University of Strathclyde for their help guidance and the useful conversations Per Haugaard c971819 Kgs Lyngby d 31 7 2003 Investigation and implementation of build
160. e 31 A sectional elevation of the external wall and partition used in the IT University of Copenhagen All the dimensions are in mm Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 48 A presentation of the IT University of Copenhagen The pane used in the external wall is without any optical properties but with thermophysical properties since it is not possible to combine opaque and transparent properties in constructions The horizontal division is put together of 2 mm linoleum on the inside and 340 mm concrete to the zone below The light and the ceiling panels below the concrete are estimated to be minimum 80 of the horizontal division and full mixing with the zone below is expected This is the reason why the light and ceiling panels are not included in the model Madsen et al 2001 U value 1 77 W m K Storey partition 2 mm linolium 340 mm reinforced concrete 700 mm air gap 40 mm ceiling sheet 1082 Figure 32 The storey partitions used in the IT University of Copenhagen All the dimensions are in mm The window in the North West fa ade consists of two separate windows cf Figure 33 The top window cannot be opened and contains the solar shading and the button window can be opened and is used for natural ventilation The data for the two similar windows is listed in Table 6 Table 6 The type U g and t value for the used pane and frame
161. e 9 to June 15 2003 cf Figure 175 for the outcome of the monitor state variables is different than the defined simulation period for the building model which is set from January 1 to December 31 2003 This is done because the monitor state variables facility is most usable for short simulation periods since longer period tends to become too closely packed Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 206 Simulation Project IT University of Copenhagen as constructed in the Bsim2000 tutorialt Period Mon 9 Jun to Sun 15 Jun Year 2003 Temp deg C EXT 2 kontor_3 448 2 1 1 8 4 0 0 24 43 72 96 120 144 168 Time h Figure 175 The output during June 9 to June 15 2003 for the Monitor state variable function for zone temperature The blue line with triangles indicates the dry bulb temperature in the zone kontor_3 44G and the thin black line is the ambient temperature The internal dry temperature is kept between 14 and 22 C as an outcome of the heat recovery heating and cooling of the intake ventilation air Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 207 Result analysis 26 Result analysis The results analysis module is used to view the simulation results for a variety of performance appraisals and to explore the interactions between assessment domains The ranges of analyses are essentially unrestricted and dat
162. e RedHat 8 and Sun4 with Solaris 8 platforms respectively It is a good idea to perform the installation and later use of ESP r in a terminal It is possible to enter commands which increase efficiency during the installation and the later use of the program The installation process originates from notes on a lecture given at ESRU during a course in ESP r 1 Become the administrator with the user name root Create the directory usr esru If necessary this can be linked to a directory named esru located anywhere on the system The link has to be made by the administrator or by a person who has the same rights as the administrator A link is set up by entering the folder usr and typing in the following line In s nome Per esru usr esru It is a good idea to become a user with unique username which will offer more protection by preventing others from overwriting the ESP r files 3 Become the special user and change to the directory usr esru and create the sub directories src esp r The downloaded ESP r files from the homepage ftp ftp strath ac uk Esru_public ESP r are placed in the esp r folder These files contain source code examples and documentation The Tar gz files is unpacked with the file unpacktargz located on the same homepage The command to unpack the files is unpacktargz If the message on access problems to the files is listed then type in the commands chmod 755 and chmod 755 which give the administrator reading writing
163. e actual climate database during a simulation The defined network is then constructed by connecting a number of internal nodes boundary nodes and components cf 23 2 1 2 At least one of the nodes in the fluid flow network must be with known pressure Each node is assigned a node reference height cf Figure 124 that is used in the buoyancy calculation and it defines the mean height of the associating building zone or plant component 8 The azimuth for a wind induced boundary node is required to define the direction of the actual zone s surface where the boundary node is attached The azimuth for north is 0 and is calculated clockwise The azimuth for vertical surfaces has no meaning and may therefore be set to zero Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 163 Networks ALALLA AAL LLL LL LLL GIR GLL LLR GLL LL LLL LLL LLL LL LLG L LR GLL GL ALLL LLLA LG LRG L GL GL LLL GLL GLG LLLP LLLA G LLL LL LLL LILL LILLA LLL LILLA LLL Figure 124 A general representation of a 4 zone model with configuration of nodes represented as dots linkage points represented as two parallel lines and reference heights The reference heights of the zone nodes and the node outside are shown as z with a letter as a subscript The reference height of the linkage point of the component is shown as z with a number as a subscript Hensen 1991 The node reference height may be expressed relative
164. e files and databases It is recommended to read the synopsis of each of the modules Simulation work with ESP r tends to involve several modules being active at the same time Figure 25 shows the relationship between the program and database modules that form the simulation environment User Domain Technical Domain Project Product Manager model Simulator lime series Support applications Users Developers databases tutorials etc Results Analyser state variables Figure 25 Structure of ESP r ESRU Manual 2002 An outline of the different modules is described in the following sub paragraphs More detailed information on the different modules than described in the below sub paragraphs can be found ESRU Homepage tutorial_7 and ESRU Manual 2002 9 1 The Project Manager The Project Manager prj manages the description of simulation problems including their form and fabric HVAC plant and occupant schedules as well as invoking a number of applications to manage databases define problem topology calculate radiation exchange perform simulations and recover simulation results ESRU Homepage tutorial_7 9 2 The Simulator The Simulator bps takes the model description from the Project Manager into account and produces one or more result libraries which can be analysed with the result analyser module cf paragraph 9 3 The simulator is the building and plant simulation
165. e g for a daylight utilisation study shall be defined as obstruction blocks as described in paragraph 19 1 Figure 89 The zone kontor_3 44G with Venetian blind defined in the solar obstruction facility The distance between the lamellas is set to 5 cm rullegardin Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 117 Blinds and shutters The principle of imposing a blind shutter control is that a pane is replaced with another pane when a defined set point is reached Note When constructing a shaded pane which has to replace a pane in the blind shutter control then the two panes must have equal number of layers A day period can be divided into three distinct periods control periods that may or may not span a complete day For each period a shaded pane is defined which will replace the original pane but only if the solar irradiance direct solar radiation impinging on the pane with the defined shading from obstruction taken into account illuminance zone or ambient temperature is greater than the specified set point defined as W m lux or C The shaded pane can be defined manually within the blind shutter control facility or a pane defined in the optical properties database can be chosen to represent the shading Two or three control periods can overlap each other different controls can be defined for the overlapping periods e g two periods both from 0800 to 1600 can
166. e mouse and change it When a request is listed in the dialog box default values can be supplied by selecting the button d The two buttons besides d next to the number are ok and used to accept the input or to open a help window displaying a short comment on the subject Selecting the button click to dismiss cf Figure 23 closes the window The dialog box also request input for problem descriptions result descriptions file names etc cf Figure 24 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 38 Interface details of ESP r window Problem description Office model for network flow studies ok 2 a Figure 24 The graphical presentations on request for text input Selecting it with the mouse editing it and selecting the button ok can change the text ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The dialog box cf Figure 24 can contain a pre written sentence or be empty Text can be entered and the buttons ok and d are described above Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 39 ESP r Modules and facilities 9 ESP r Modules and facilities ESP r is composed of a series of modules which each contribute to certain areas of the modelling and simulation process The central desktop manager the Project Manager activates the relevant modules when required The modules share a common interface style and access many of the same descriptiv
167. e view factors Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 131 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors 20 1 The view factors and MRT sensors facility The view factors and radiant sensors facility is found via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 view factors amp radiant sensors and the menu in Figure 100 opens Viewfactors in kontor_3 446 Viewfactor filet zones kontor_3 446 vuf Edit zone viewfactors Calculate zone or MRT sensor viewfactors oro No of MRT sensors 0 8 0t lt i S s S Sensor Origin m Size m Rot name Xcordl cordlZcordllen Iwid Iht Ideg Add a MRT sensor tti i s sSCSC S Update MRT sensors amp viewfactors List zone viewfactors Help Exit to model definition Ie Figure 100 The content of the View factors menu where MRT sensors can be added and zone view factors calculated ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A MRT sensor can be added to the zone via the menu item Add a MRT sensor in Figure 100 When a MRT sensor is added the origin size and rotation is set to the default values and this data can be altered to satisfy the needs for evaluation of the mean radiant temperature at any position in a zone e g nearby a glass facade The origin m indicates the location of the MRT sensor in the actual zone the size m indicates its dimensions and the MRT sensor can be
168. ean radiant temperature Note Note that the surface emissivities are not currently being used in ESP r version 10 4 of 23 Dec 2002 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 and that the surface temperatures in this menu have no impact on either the MRT sensor or zone view factor values in a simulation The menu item MRT sensor attrib amp calcs activates the MRT sensor calculations menu cf Figure 103 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 134 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors MRT sensor calculations VIUF zones kontor_3 446 geomt zones kontor_3 446 nb of sensors 2 list edit surface temps list sensor details oT calc sensor viewfactors e calc MRT using viewfactors comfort calculations a gt update file help exit to main menu Figure 103 The content of the MRT sensor calculation menu when entered via the menu item MRT sensor attrib amp calcs cf Figure 102 Both the sensor view factors and the MRT can be calculated from here ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The calculation method listed in Figure 102 and Figure 103 is based on ray tracing and is a part of the view factor module Another parameter that can be calculated in the view factor module is the vector radiant temperature VRT This is a vector quantity which gives information about the radiation asymmetry in a room in the x y and z direction The VRT
169. ears when entering the visualization menu item from the Model Definition menu and selecting an external image for visualisation ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 21 1 1 Create and or edit scene details A Radiance scene can be created or an existing scene can be edited by selecting the menu item create edit scene details in Figure 107 The possibilities for scene creation one for an external image and one for calculating the daylight factors are displayed in Figure 108 and Figure 109 This menu item create edit scene details in Figure 107 exists for both the visualization and the lighting analysis facility The Radiance scene can be constructed in several sections Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 139 Lighting analysis and visualization Radiance descriptions scene ituc_Extern purpose External sky type location amp time zone amp outside composition other furniture amp fittings scene view points ao oc yw help return to main menu Figure 108 The several paragraphs which can be addressed to describe the scene for use in Radiance with the visualisation facility making an external image ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Radiance descriptions scene t ituc_Day_fa purpose Day_fact sky type location amp time zone amp outside composition other furniture amp fittings edit display grid return to main menu Figure 109 The several par
170. edge of the magnitude of such flows is necessary to obtain for heat transfer analysis including load and energy calculation thermal comfort assessments including plant control analysis and contaminant and moisture dispersal analysis including ventilation and smoke control calculation Hensen 1991 Documentation for the calculation method of networks can be found in Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford Hensen J 1991 On the thermal interaction of building structure and heating and ventilating system Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Networks in ESP r are constructed in great details which require a many input data and calculations to construct these The network facilities included in ESP r are shown in Figure 122 Networks___ 0 included g plant amp systems h vent hydronic i electrical Figure 122 The content of the Model Definition menu in connection to Networks ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 It requires knowledge on air flow plant amp systems in order to model the network facilities described in Figure 122 correctly If one is not an expert on these topics one is forced to look up literature and documentation which results in a longer modelling time If the network facility is used correctly is gives a good description on how air flows and plant systems behaves in real life For example the network fac
171. eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeereees 20 4 3 1 1 Adding two MRT sensors and calculating sensor View factors cccceescescesceeseeeeeeeeeeseenseceeeeseeeseeees 20 4 3 1 2 Modelling Radiance daylight coefficients for simulation purposes ceecceeceseeeteeeteeesecneeeeeeneeees 21 4 3 1 3 Modelling networks a E nesses chet E E A R E aae 22 4 3 1 4 The principles of constructing double skin facades 00 cececceesseesceesceeseeeeceeceseesecseecseecaeeeeceeeseeenes 24 4 3 1 5 The principles of constructing floor heating 2 0 0 0 cecesceseesseesseeseeeseeeseeseceeceseceseensecaecaeesaecaeenaeeneeenes 25 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r iii Table of Contents 5 DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY OF ESPG R cccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 6 INSTALLATION OF ESP R AND RADIANCE ssssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 27 6 1 Machine environment software and installation ssccssssscscssssscssssescsssscccssseccssssscssssceccsssscesssssssesseses 27 Oki Machme environments ic 22 8 el EESE vee ain lite aces Res ieee eid meee eas 27 6 1 2 Useful Unix and or Linux commiands c 03 cecedacesraion ic tara wae oe ha 27 6 2 Where to find the Linux software and manuals sscsscssscssssssssssssscsssssssssssssscsessssssssesesessnesssessessonseens 27 6 3 The Installation of ESP r on a Linux and UNIX machine eeseeseeseeseeeesoe
172. een 0 0212 and 0 0218 m s according density changes of the ventilation air which affect the mass flow rate and thereby the volume flow rate 26 5 Example The indoor air quality result facility The indoor air quality facility is used by selecting the menu item Indoor air quality from the result analysis menu in Figure 176 and the result can be viewed as a performance metrics for the traditional indoor air quality and as a graph for the myotoxins cf Figure 190 Indoor Quality 2 select result set 3 define output period 4 select zones a comfort b mycotoxin d glare gt output gt gt screen format gt gt 10h30 help exit Figure 190 The different indoor quality output facilities available in the ESP r result analysis facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item glare displayed in Figure 190 is not yet included in the indoor air quality assessments Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 219 Result analysis The growing conditions for a particular mould can be examined when selecting the menu item myotoxin cf Figure 190 and the available mould types to examine are Apergillus Repens Apergillus versicolor Penicilium chrysogenum Ulcladium consortiale and Stachybotrys A performance metrics the menu item comfort cf Figure 190 is selected for illustration for comfort assessment in the zone kontor_3 44G The values to access are zone dry bulb temperat
173. eesscssonseees 37 8 4 Feed back level issesscscsiesasscssacccscsctseasvsseseowaesesesseess cossesesseaseseicescesessossessenossopeadosseseowsesesescesvectesssnussoseavesseteanssseseeso 38 8 5 Editing text and NUMDEIS cscsscsssssssecssessscssscsssssssnsssssesssessessssssssssssssseensessseesssesssesssesssesseesssessssssesssnseoes 38 9 ESP R MODULES AND FACILITIES ssssssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 40 9 1 The Project Manager sscssscsssssssssssessccssesssessssesssssenessnesecscsssssesssssnsesnsesnsessssossensesesecsssssesoessonsccesscsssnseees 40 9 2 Ehe Simulator vssecvccvcessseccssnsvscsecsseorsesosssccecescaesesossssstessccvesveucseeeensseettsetesessorseseesssceaescaedssesssesecsnsssecrsesesstseoseccoesss 40 9 3 The Results Analysis Mod le cis5 ssccssceccscenasssvasdeenesseanceonsosdeseodesosvescvssesevesceniossetsebesssueseessessusesensesseatecvenosseosens 41 9 4 The Climate Database Management MOodulle cscssccsssssscssscsssscsssssccsscssssssessssssssesensesscsseessssssessesssonseens 41 9 5 The Plant Components Database Management MOdull scsssecssssssrsesssessscssssessssssssesecsssessssssssseseees 41 9 6 The plant network description facility ccccsccsscssscssccsscssscssssssssssesssssnsssssssssssssssssessssssesssesssessssssnseees 41 9 7 The Construction Data Management Module ssscssssssssssssssssssssscssscsnsesssessssessnessssssseessessoess
174. efinition of zones Note The surfaces Part_kon PE and SE_ door are automatically updated in the zone kontor_3 44G according to the changes made in the zone PE Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 108 Implementation of zone compositions to the building model 15 Implementation of zone compositions to the building model In order to undertake a simulation at a later stage a construction file s a con and a tmc if the zone contain any transparent multilayer constructions must be established The constructions file contains information on both the composition and material used in the building model The zone geometry and assigning constructions to surface has to be completed and the information saved before the making of a construction file s After the completion of zone geometry and assigning constructions to surfaces the surface attributes contain pointers to the appropriate database entries but the information is not saved anywhere and a construction file will contain this information A model construction file is created in the Zones Definition menu cf Figure 68 via the menu item constructions If no prior constructions file s has been established all zones must be addressed and a new file s must be created for each zone If the constructions file exist then an update is necessary to reflect possible changes to the building model cf Figure 82 Composition of kontor
175. egrated thermal and lighting simulation sccsscssssssssssssscsssccsessssssesessnsssessssssesseeeee 156 22 2 1 Direct conflation of ESP r and Radiance during simulation ccccsceescescceseeeteceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 156 22 2 1 1 Example Modelling a direct coupling of ESP r and Radiance in a simulation eee eeeeeeeeneees 157 22 2 2 Radiance pre calculated daylight coefficient for use in a SiMUIAtION eeeceseeeeteceeeeeeseeeeeeecneeeeenee 158 22 2 2 1 Example Modelling daylight coefficients for use in a SiMmUIatiON ee eee eeeeeecneeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees 158 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r vii Table of Contents 23 NETWORKS A airiran testis tectia desis tein teen tin deca deininteadeanads 160 23 1 Fluid TOW MECWOPKS vsisi usert erws sena isores oar e soscssensscubsed duvsddsoateuss doseseoascosseddeessssbeneeness 161 23 2 Modelling of networks in ESP r sssccccsssssssscssssssscscsssssscesocssssnsesocssssnscsocssssnscsocssesssccoesseesssscesesenseocses 161 23 2 1 The ventilation and hydronic fluid flow network 0 ecccesccesecesecececeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseeeseeseeeeeneensees 161 23 2 1 1 Description of fluid flow nodes cecceceessessseesceesceeecesecesecseceaecseecaeecaeeeaeeeaeseeeseeesseeeseeaeeaeceaeeaseaees 162 23 2 1 2 Description of fluid flow components cecceescesssessceseceseceseceeecseeeseeene
176. el building X 3D models simple High X 3D models simple High Simulation ESP r Description and or Levelof Bsim Description and or Level of features method detail 2002 method detail Indoor climate X Thermal comfort High MRT No Medium PMV and PPD placement of acoustics visual sensor perceived comfort and air quality and CO2 multiple MRT concentration sensors ray tracing Daylighting X Radiance ray High X Simlight method Medium tracing daylight similar to coefficients and radiosity no direct run time concave shapes no coupling at glare no double simulations skin facades no daylight guiding systems Air flow X Includes air flow High X No CFD Natural Low networks CFD and ventilation module wind pressure coming soon Environmental X Non renewable Medium Beat lifecycle assessment energy CO2 SO2 analysis and O Dynamic X Thermal High X Thermal High Simulation l l l Mediumi Light High Light ie Air flow High Air flow eu low Indoor climate High Indoor climate Medium Different time step Yes Different time step Yes Time steps Time steps recommendation No recommendation Yes Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 19 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 Error finding X Display of errors Low X Easy and user High during simulation friendly links to poor description help file Presentation of X Elaborate and user High X Elaborate and user
177. el is set up within ESP r the associated Radiance files are defined and an integrated calculation of the daylight coefficients is performed The total simulated controlled lighting gain for 1 1 to 7 1 2003 is displayed in Figure 13 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 21 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 120 T T T T T 100 I 80 60 Power for lighting W 40 J 20 4 l j 1 L 1 1 l Li 1 A i 0 l Lhi L 1 1 4 Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Figure 13 The controlled lighting gain simulated in MatLab for January 1 to January 7 2003 where January 1 is a Wednesday The lighting is not controlled during the weekend Refer to the content below the important sign on page 215 for an explanation on why MatLab is used to calculate the controlled lighting gain As can be seen from Figure 13 the light is controlled to supply the effect needed to satisfy a general illuminance of 200 lux in weekdays from 0800 to 1700 The total used energy for lighting in 2003 is calculated to 63 kWh 4 3 1 3 Modelling networks A plant system network in terms of a mechanical ventilation system with heat recovery is modelled The plant system consists of components connections and containments data The air flow through the ventilation and the air flow through a window are modelled separately as a ventila
178. elete one of the panes can be selected deleted via Exit and yes is answered to the question if the pane is to be deleted 13 7 3 2 3 Example copying a pane In order to carry out separate shading on the two panes in the North West facade of the ITUC building a copy of the pane 4 16Ar LWE6 is performed from the optical properties database via the menu item import add delete copy element cf Figure 58 copy the pane org_IT_Uni_1 and Exit is selected The only thing changed in the Optical Property Set menu to impose separate control on the shading on the two panes is the type of the new pane which it is changed to org_IT_Uni_2 refer also to paragraph 13 4 2 1 3 for the addition of windows for the handling of shading on two panes 13 7 3 2 4 Example adding a low energy pane with external shading according to the CEN method The same pane 4 16Ar LwE6 cf paragraph 12 1 is being constructed in WIS 2 0a Test03 with external shading According to the Bsim2000 tutorial a natureloxeret aluminium blind is mounted on the upper pane and is activated in certain conditions cf paragraph 18 1 A HD 0150 Venetian blind with slat angle of 50 degrees is used to represent the shading in WIS 2 0a Test03 The original shading had a slat angle of 45 degrees but is given a larger angle to vertical in order to obtain a shading correction factor of 0 3 which is similar to the shading correction factor for the pane in the Bsim2000 tutorial
179. elow the zone dry bulb temperature kontor_3 44G db T in the morning and 1 to 2 C above the zone dry bulb temperature in the afternoon The ambient temperature Ambient db Tmp the solar entering the zone from outside kontor_3 44G SolinEx and the heat absorbed in the inner glass of the pane have an influence on the mean radiant temperatures 26 2 Example The time step report facility The time step reports facility is used by selecting the menu item Timestep reports from the result analysis menu in Figure 176 In the Tabular Output menu cf Figure 180 the display of the results can be set to a time step performance metrics special material data and as a performance metrics specific for an air flow time step analysis Tabular Output 2 select result set 3 define period 4 select zones performance metrics special material data network air utr flow ye rw formatting output gt gt screen time gt gt 10h30 delim gt gt normal help exit v Figure 180 The different tabular output facilities available in the ESP r result analysis facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item performance metrics cf Figure 180 is selected for at time step illustration the cooling load heating load and the inside surface temperatures for all surfaces in the zone except from the window frame and internal door The displaying dates are changed to just contain 9 6 from 0100 to 2400 This is done by selecting
180. ementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 151 Casual gain control Lighting control 3 The illuminance data lux from the photocell is then transferred to the controller cf paragraph 22 1 3 4 The output data from the controller is then used to determine as a function of the active photocell control algorithm the luminaire status and hence the casual gain associated with the lighting system and distributed to the zone at the current time step At each time step a related ESP r controller adjusts model parameters such as blind shutter device as a function of the defined blind shutter control law Janek 1997 The Casual Gains Control facility is found via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 and casual gain control Lighting control can be added for each zone in building model cf Figure 120 Casual Gain Control Zonet kontor Desc no description supplied Wkd Wkend control 2 2 2 Control periods 818 Lighting zones 1 a oc Lighting zone gt gt 1 Control type t On OFF Calculation type Analytical DF Control data 500 0 1 5 O 1 O 1 90 Photocell datat 1 0 1 Posnt x Yo oZ ux uy uz 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 00 0 toman 3 add delete lighting zone list casual gain control information update casual gain control information help exit this menu lI S vV a E Figure 120 The content of the Casual Gain Control menu The c
181. ementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 79 Databases Type DAG2549_10nb descripiont Antisun grey 25 49 10mm no bli Optical Property Set a type DAG2549_10nb b descrip Antisun grey 25 49 10mm no 1 004 a Visible trn c visible transmittance 0 22 Direct trn d solar abs amp refl for docu 0 76 0 04 Reflection e U value for docu 2 70 ven Absorb deg 40deg 55deg 70deg 80deg 0 805 f direc trn 0 192 0 161 0 132 0 083 0 032 nec eae er EIT DAN Era My Borris a reflect 0 043 0 047 0 068 0 169 0 386 g heat gain doc 0 33 0 30 0 27 0 21 0 13 ty layers 0 605 oe refrac abs 0 abs 40 abs 55 070 080 1 520 0 726 0 755 0 765 0 720 0 563 1 000 0 001 0 002 0 003 0 004 0 005 1 510 0 038 0 035 0 032 0 024 0 014 osc mova 1 add delete copy layer help exit this menu 90 Degrees from normal Figure 56 The graphical feedback displayed in the graphical feedback window and the pane data displayed in the Optical Property Set menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The data marked with either doc or docu in the Optical Property Set menu cf Figure 56 are only used as documentation and can be used to perform a quality control of the profile 13 7 3 2 Addition of systems Addition of systems to the list in Figure 55 can be done by choosing the menu item import add delete copy element in the same figure and thereafter selecting the button add in the dialog
182. en_w and kontor_3 44G sen_r and Exit e The solar entering the zone from outside is added by selecting Solar processes cf Figure 179 Solar entering from outside The graph is drawn by selecting Draw graph cf Figure 179 and the results are shown in Figure 179 Lib ituc res Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun 00h59 to Mon 9 Jun 235h59 Yeart2003 t sime im output 1m Zones kontor_3 446 Load W 26 00 FOO 24 00 J ontor_3 446 2 HRT 6 e 22 00 a ontor_3 446 db T 00 P 20 00 00 18 00 Ambient db Tmp 16 00 00 C i 14 00 00 12 00 i 00 10 00 ontor_3 446 SolinEx 0 3 6 g 12 15 18 21 24 Time Hrs Figure 179 The content of the Time var graph facility and the illustration of zone dry bulb temperature ambient temperature mean radiant temperature at the defined MRT sensor locations and the solar entering the zone from outside ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 210 Result analysis As can be seen from Figure 179 the mean radiant temperature kontor_3 44G S 1 MRT and kontor_3 44G S 2 MRT or placed on to of each other cf Figure 12 pp 21 is almost identical for positions 1 metre and approximately 3 metres from the window This indicates that the surface temperature of the surfaces in the zone are approximately the same cf paragraph 26 2 The mean radiant temperature fluctuated between 21 and 24 C It is 1 to 2 C b
183. engine which can simulate problems related to buildings plant systems and mass flow separately or in combination Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 40 ESP r Modules and facilities 9 3 The Results Analysis Module The Result Analysis Module res operates with the simulation results located in a library generated by the Simulator The results analysis module allows the user to explore the performance of a particular problem via a range of graphic and tabular facilities 9 4 The Climate Database Management Module The Climate Database Management Module clm is used to analyse climate data collections A climate database contains hourly data values on dry bulb temperature direct normal or total horizontal solar irradiance diffuse horizontal solar irradiance wind speed wind direction and relative humidity The module offers prediction of solar radiation and curve fittings to daily maximum and minimum data and statistically analysis 9 5 The Plant Components Database Management Module The Plant Components Database Management Module pdb manages the plant components database and provides browsing editing analysis and data generation facilities for plant component data For each plant component a summary description is held along with plant component data ESRU Manual 2002 9 6 The plant network description facility The plant network description facility pdf accesses the
184. er is then placed on the inner side of the window profile cf Figure 59 Important After the copying of layers attention shall be put to the menu item reflect immediately under the menu item f in the Optical Property Set menu cf Figure 58 as this is changed when layers are copied and it can become negative Do not forget to change all optical properties of the profile after copying of materials The new values can be found in the procedures for identification of the angle dependent data earlier mentioned Edit layers The item is not included among the options in the dialog box but here a relevant menu item in Figure 58 can be selected and its data will appear in the dialogue box which can hereafter be edited Important Do not forget to change ALL optical properties for the new profile after and the total sum of Direc trn reflec and abs shall be 1 after the editing The items c d e and g do not change automatically 13 7 3 4 Drawing up the profiles of the databases in the text feedback window An optical database can contain many profiles and if the single profiles are designated in an inappropriate way it may be a good idea to draw up a list with all the optical properties of the profile The list can be drawn up by at choosing the menu item list optical properties db in the Optical Properties db menu cf Figure 55 Then in the dialogue box the user is asked whether the report is to be made in the text feedb
185. eries ESRU Manual U00 1 University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland ESRU Manual 1993 A program for Building Energy Simulation Version 8 Series ESRU Manual U93 1 University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Hensen J 1991 On the thermal interaction of building structure and heating and ventilating system Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Aasem E Clarke J Hensen J Pernot C Strachan P 1993 A Program for Building Energy Simulation ESRU Manual Version 8 Series ESRU Manual U93 1 University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford Sars G Pernit C de Wit M April 1988 ESPmrt a new module for the ESP system Institute of Applied Physics TNO TH University of Technology Eindhoven Perez R Seals R Ineichen P Stewart R Michalsky J 1990 MODELING DAYLIGHT AVAILBILITY AND IRRADIANCE COMPONENTS FROM DIRECT AND GLOBAL IRRADIANCE Solar Energy Vol 44 No 5 pp 271 289 Perez R Seals Michalsky J 1993 ALL WEATHER MODEL FOR SKY LUMINANCE DISTRIBUTION PRELIMINATY CONFIGURATION AND VALIDATION Solar Energy Vol 50 No 3 pp 235 245 Svendsen S 1998 SOLSTRALING NOTAT U 032 INSTITUT FOR BYGNINGER OG ENERGI the Technical University of Denmark Christoffersen J 1995 SBI Report 258 Daylight Utilisation in Office Buildings Danish Building Research Institu
186. ernal images daylight factor and glare profiles can for presentation purposes It is also a good tool to produce a valuable solution in project in co operation with architects 21 1 ESP r lighting and visualization facility The lighting analysis and visualization facility visualisation is located within the Model Definition menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 The facility creates descriptive files and executes Radiance Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 138 Lighting analysis and visualization for calculations Depending on the purpose of the facility different menu items will be presented cf Figure 106 when entering the Radiance desktop module Default scene a External images b Internal images c Glare sources d Daylight factors Teflt is item a help exit this menu Figure 106 The Default scene menu where the Radiance scene purpose can be set to an external image internal image glare and daylight factors ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 If an external image or one of the other three possibilities is selected in Figure 106 the Radiance desktop menu opens cf Figure 107 Radiance desktop a model ituc cfg path b scenes ituc ref c name t ituc_Extern RIF t ituc_Extern rif root ituc_Extern purpose External d create edit scene details e calculate view scene Figure 107 The content of the Radiance desktop menu which app
187. ersion 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 141 Lighting analysis and visualization In this menu the viewpoint and direction from where the Radiance image will be displayed can be selected For external images the perspective feedback may be preferable to set as a view For internal image the perspective feedback is not appropriate where a plan and elevation view is more suitable The menu item display gt gt in Figure 112 can be set to a plan south and west elevation and a perspective view The viewpoint can be changed with the menu item eye in Figure 112 in three ways listed in the dialog box e Eyepoint where the position X Y Z are entered directly into the computer e Pick an eyepoint on a plan by placing the cursor on the desired position e Accept perspective viewing eyepoint The viewing direction and angle can be changed via e The direction and elevation can be entered directly into the computer via the menu item direc azi elv in Figure 112 North is 0 east is 90 and so on The elevation is positive for upwards and negative for downwards The line below the menu item direc azi elv is the vector representation for use in Radiance e The view angle can be changed via the menu item view angle in Figure 112 The view angle represents the boundaries for how large an area to include in the image A large angle includes more ground profiles and
188. es especially ESP r 64 Databases 13 4 2 The constructions database The construction database uses the Construction data management module cf paragraph 9 7 and the constructions database contains information on the composition of different building units as walls windows and floor systems The database describes the thickness and positions of each material and where it is relevant a set of optical properties cf Figure 46 The building units in the database are given unique and easily recognizable designations A line in the database contains a menu item a designation of a building unit and type Opaque for opaque and a description of the optical properties cf Figure 46 Constuctions database d_glz DCF7671_06nb extern_wall OPAQUE roof_1 OPAQUE floor_1 OPAQUE intern_wall OPAQUE door OPAQUE grnd_floor OPAQUE dbl_glz DCF7671_06nb roof OPAQUE susp_ceil OPAQUE entry_floor OPAQUE int_doors OPAQUE first_compos OPAQUE ext_wall OPAQUE partition OPAQUE susp_floor OPAQUE susp_flr_re OPAQUE dummy_pnls OPAQUE mass_part OPAQUE int_part OPAQUE ecco spvyH VDoOoesB ee eae FTO 718 a 00 ceiling OPAQUE ceiling_rev OPAQUE roof_2 OPAQUE 1 add delete copy invert list database contents gt update database help exit this menu Figure 46 Different building units in the standard construction database multicon db1 which is included in the ESP r package ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The constructions are based
189. es can be added deleted copied and merged ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 If a new zone is to be created choose the item add delete copy merge cf Figure 75 the button add zone in the dialog box create via dimension input and follow the rest of the procedure as described in paragraph 14 1 2 Deleting a zone is done via the item add delete copy merge cf Figure 75 the button delete zone in the dialog box and the appropriate zone to be deleted is chosen When asked delete the files connected to the zone and update the system configurations file Zones can also be copied via the menu item add delete copy merge cf Figure 75 and placed at the designated position which minimizes the time spend on defining a large number of similar zones Another possibility is to merge two zones Merge zones copies all the surfaces in one zone into another zone as a separate task the zone where the surfaces were copied from can be deleted Typical use could be if an initial model has two rooms represented as two thermal zones and the designer changes mind puts a large opening between them and makes the two zones one large thermal zone 14 4 1 Divide surfaces attributions This will with no doubt be an important issue to most ESP r users The issue is relevant when a zone is added to the model and surfaces in adjacent zones overlap When surfaces overlap they must be divided into two or more matching surfaces where one of them boun
190. eseeeceeeeeensesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeessees 164 23 2 1 3 Description of fluid flow connections cccecceessessceesceeecesecesecseaecsaecaeecaeecaeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeaees 167 23 2 1 4 Ward TEdUCtl On factor anai sadec dae araa Sasa cc vod osetoda a a aaaea Aaa rae aae iA EAE AA aa Ea ania 169 23 2 1 5 Example Constructing a fluid flow network ssesesseeesseeeessesersesseesessesresstseesseseesesseeressesreseenesseseeses 170 23 2 2 Plant and SyStenns 22 E E costeae ded dias cb vosk E EE A E E 174 23 2 2 1 Different plant amp system types ccccecccesessseescesseeeeceecesecesecsaecsaecaeecaeeeseceeeseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeseesessseaees 175 23 2 2 2 Description of COMPOMNENES aar e a aaae aaa aaar aaa a a aar a a aaa aeaa aa aaraa a an aaa aaa a EEA aaaea ERATE 176 23 2 2 3 Description of COMNCCtIONS cecceceesseeseeseessceeeesecesecseceseceaecssecaeecaeseseeeaeeeeeeeenseeeseeaeenaecteeaeenaees 176 23 2 2 4 Description of containments data ccccceescesceseceseceseceeecseeesecsaecaeecseeeseeeeeeceeeeenseenseenseesaeeeaeesenaees 177 23 2 2 5 Description of electrical data ic ci c cccccccsscusscesceecseceseesscdeceuceesecedeeidecsaceseecoscacdesstsesducsteuddoniadedesseedaceecess 177 23 2 2 6 Link to fluid flow networks y c03 c cdetsesscegicescaheseestei ieii en i ie ai 177 23 2 2 7 Tanke plant to zome sic sce f cccceccesscceccucciccicesceds tas ceadicsudeudte dec EEE E EE EE E 178 23 2 2 8 Example constructing a ventilation
191. esssessonseens 41 9 8 The Event Profiles Database Management Module scssscssssssssssecsscsrsessssssssssssessssssscessesssesssesssssnseees 41 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r iv Table of Contents 9 9 The temporal definition MOUIC scssessessccssesssessscssesssscssscesssssessscsesnsesssessssessesseesssesssessceescsessessoeseees 41 9 10 The Tutorial Mod ler scccsscscccccsts scsssctussovestensesonsvesunessoeseeedesuesesvessovestensesevesccnnasteecetessones cosas sonssedusssoseeceeses secsens 41 9 11 The View factors Modules messire sovecenssssvcsessesesusstasndesecedevesscesescsesunssssnssbovedeeesssovessuases ESOR SES suasess 42 9 12 The Insolation and Shading MOdulle scssccssssssssssssecssscssssssssessssssssssssssssssssessssssssesssessseesssessessnseees 42 9 13 The Flow Simulation Module iisisssccsccssssesesssesssscesceaves seceseosse ssessasssosvcsenssssvoascessssdecsesonss svesdane sosbesdeon so scescbessesecsces 42 9 14 Fhe topology Prosram occcsssescccsssssoodesksssovesteanss ossvcvenssdecsceossesceseeseassveseessessouscennos teeseuesapsedsesnndsondsdeanssesdeedssesbeosees 42 10 INCLUDED EXAMPLES IN ESPER ccccseeseeeeceeesseeeccensseeecceesseeeceeenseessooenees 43 11 THE STRATEGY OF MODELLING eis sce cc ccoscececenscececenscecncenecs secetecesesetececedennceccoeastet 45 11 1 Simple modelling Ad Vites sosirii sisis stiro e seo E E E 45
192. est to the average value for the month cf Figure 99 for the illustration of this kind of insolation data for July Insolation data for Jul Source surface Nll_win_up 10 Hour Shading Receiving Percentage Surface index Received Sun not up 5 Surface totally shaded 6 Surface totally shaded 7 Surface totally shaded 8 Surface totally shaded 9 Surface totally shaded 10 Surface totally shaded 11 Surface totally shaded 12 Surface totally shaded 13 NE_part 3 55 03 floor 6 44 97 14 NE_part 3 53 81 floor 6 46 19 15 NE_part 3 50 00 floor 6 50 00 16 floor 6 59 11 NE_part 3 40 89 17 floor 6 80 00 NE_part 3 20 00 18 SE_part 2 76 89 SE_door iF 23 11 19 SE_door 7 46 67 Shi_part GT 26 67 SE_part 2 26 67 20 Shi_part 1 86 67 SE_door 7 10 67 SE_part 2 2 67 Sun not up Figure 99 A tabular presentation of the insolation pattern coming from the transparent surface NW_win_up for a day in July judged to be closest to the average value for that month At 1300 the floor receives 44 97 of the insolation and the North East partition NE_part receives the rest 55 03 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 129 Shading and insolation 19 2 2 Example Calculating shading and insolation The shading and insolation facility is activated via the menu item shading amp insolation in the Obstructions men
193. eter shall be calculated for the sensors without the obstructions in each time step in order to perform a correct judgement of when to impose the blinds and at what height the blinds shall be imposed This can be done by the simulator by ignoring the obstructions in the calculation procedure and if necessary impose it The determination of the angle to horizontal of the Venetian blind lamellas is more complex to specify The angle is a weight between minimizing the incidence radiation and maintaining visual contact to the outside Individual opinions exists for this the determination of the variation of the angle should therefore be based on experiments and questionnaires Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 224 Discussion One way to calculate the angle of the lamellas to the horizontal plane is for the vector perpendicular to the surface of the lamellas the normal to have an angle a to horizontal which is the altitude of the sun in degrees cf Figure 193 Figure 193 The angle o to horizontal for the lamellas is the altitude of the sun in degrees and the point of rotation is set to the middle of the lamella As seen from Figure 193 the point of rotation is set to the middle of the lamella The shading facility must be one simulation time step in front off the actual simulation and pass the shading results back to the actual simulation All involved linear thermal transmit
194. evel 100 50 and 0 respectively ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 e Dimming The following three control algorithm are available for dimming control o Ideal Ideal dimming control algorithm where a photocell normally is placed at a horizontal work plane ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 o Integral reset Adjusts the dimming level so that the measured photocell signal is kept at a constant reference value Requires night time calibration of photocell from artificial lighting only Usually the photocell is located at the ceiling ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 o Closeloop Adjusts the dimming level so that it is linear function of the difference between the photocell signal and the night time reference level Requires both night and day time calibration of photocell from artificial lighting only Usually the photocell is located at the ceiling ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 e Probab User probability On Off switching algorithm based on the Hunt algorithm Conversation with I Macdonald ESRU Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 153 Casual gain control Lighting control 22 1 4 Calculation type The menu item Calculation type cf Figure 120 gives the possibility to select a number of photocell illuminance calculation methods which are listed below Analyt DF User DF External photocell Coupling DayCoeff This function can be used with ESP r or by coupling E
195. ext feedback window cf Figure 55 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 78 Databases Optical Properties db a SC_8985_04nb Clear glass 89 85 4mm no blind b SC_8985_04ib Clear glass 89 85 4mm int blin c SCF8783_06nb Clear float 87 83 6mm no blind d SCF8783_06ib Clear float 87 83 6mm int blin e SCF8477_10nb Clear float 84 77 10mm no blind f SCF8477_10ib Clear float 84 77 10mm int blin g SCF8285_12nb Clear float 82 75 12mm no blind h SCF8285_12ib Clear float 82 85 12mm int blin i SSF5165_06nb Spectrafloat 51 66 6mm no blind j SSF5165_06ib Spectrafloat 51 66 6mm int blin k SRF3352_06nb Reflectafloat 33 52 6mm no blind 1 SRF3352_06ib Reflectafloat 33 52 6mm int blin m SAZ5060_06nb Antisun bronze 50 60 6mm no blind n SAZ3348_10nb Antisun bronze 33 48 10mm no blind o SC_fictit Fictitious 99 99 4mm no blind p DC_8074_04nb Clear glass 80 75 4mm no blind q DCF 671_06nb Clear float 76 71 6mm no blind r DCFV671_06ib Clear float 76 71 6mm int blnd s DCF 365_10nb Clear float 73 66 10mm no blind t DSF4554_06nb Spectrafloat 45 54 6mm no blind u DAGES49_06nb Antisun green 63 49 6mm no blind v DAZ5060_06nb Antisun bronze 50 60 6mm no blind w DAGH260_06nb Antisun grey 42 60 6mm no blind x DAZ3348_10nb Antisun bronze 33 48 10mm no blind y DAG2549_10nb Antisun grey 25749 10mm no blind z DCF 671_6omb Clear float 76 71 6mm open mid blnd O
196. f the material is set to 0 006 m Another material argon air is added for the cavity in the pane by selecting the menu item add or delete a layer cf Figure 49 and the button Append inside face in the dialog box Instead of entering the material database the material reference number 0 is entered for an air cavity The thermal resistance is set to 0 73 for x y and z direction and the width is set 0 016 m The last material clear_04gvb is added via the menu item add or delete a layer cf Figure 49 gt the button append inside face in the dialog box yes is answered to search the material database for the relevant material the material class Glass is selected for the material clear_04gvb Exit the material is accepted and the thickness is set to 0 004 metres and the button ok is used to finish the construction definition The property of the pane 4 16Ar LwE6 is then identical to Figure 50 Construction editing a Construction 4 16Ar LwE6 b General typet Transparent c Optical properties org_IT_Uni_1 No of layerst 3 0 0260m thick d Layers aret NONSYMMETRIC Layer Prim lThick Description Idb m of material i 1 242 0 006 ip6834nespc j 2 0 0 016 air 0 73 0 73 0 73 k 3 243 0 004 clear_O4gvb Standard U value 1 09 add or delete a layer help exit this menu Figure 50 The property and data for the pane org_IT_Uni_1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A similar pane is built up w
197. fferent control schemes it will be necessary to include different TMC types The parameter deciding between TMC types is the name of the optical property supplied in the optical property database If one transparent surface in a fagade needs shading and another transparent surface of the same TMC type does not the specific pane in the optical property database needs to be copied and given another optical property name The two transparent surfaces in the fa ade need to be given the two different optical properties in the optical properties and constructions database A different control scheme can thereafter be imposed on each transparent multilayer construction Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 118 Blinds and shutters Documentation for the calculation method of shading and insolation can be found in The file esru src esp r esrubld solar F 18 1 Example defining a blind shutter control The blind shutter control facility is different from the solar shading facility in the current version of Bsim2002 It is not possible to define two or more criteria in ESP r e g a maximum operative temperature and maximum solar radiation impinging on the pane which both have to be fulfilled before the shading is activated The criteria defined for the ITUC building is set to focus on solar radiation cf paragraph 12 2 The sensor type is defined as a single sensor and is placed on the extern
198. ffset is the distance from the lower left corner of the existing surface when looking from the outside of the new surface cf Figure 73 The entered values must be in metres 1 By choosing this boundary condition on has to defined the offset temperatures and radiation The offset temperature and offset radiantion is that the environment in the adjacent zone is similar to the actual zone but the temperature and radiantion can be set to differ some degrees offset temperature or watts per square metres offset radiantion The offset temperatures and radiation is both set to 0 which makes the zone on the other side identical to this zone Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 99 Definition of zones A N Y gt lt Figure 73 The co ordinate convention for openings The new surface is given a name and the construction can hereafter be selected from the constructions database 14 2 2 1 Example Adding a frame two panes and a door Two windows are added to the North West external wall and a door is added to the South East partition of the ITUC building The window frame is added before the two panes via the menu item surface attributes in the Zones Composition menu cf Figure 68 NW_part add glazing door opening and the frame is placed within surface The coordinates X offset Z offset cf Figure 73 width and height of the frame is set to 0 4 0 7
199. g two cases 1 Ifthe floor is adjacent to the ground a zone with constant temperature or has adiabatic boundary condition and 2 If your floor is adjacent to another zone with varying temperature The two cases are modelled as e For case number 1 Injection heat into a layer in the floor construction The zone actuator in the zones control facility is placed at a node within the surface layer containing the floor heating e For case number 2 If the floor is adjacent to another zone with varying temperature another approach is to be taken A thin zone that has the shape of the floor is created and the heat is injected into the small volume of air The heat transfer coefficients at each side of the thin floor zone are set to represent the actual conditions The actuator in the zones control menu is set to inject air into an air point in this thin floor zone The reason for this second approach is that the bookkeeping in the solver does not currently check that heat flux might be injected into a partition shared with another zone Only the zone with the control knows about the injection and the other zone does not and so energy balance is lost if this approach is not taken By acting on the air mass of a thin zone the adjacent zones get the correct heat transfer Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 25 Development and history of ESP r 5 Development and history of ESP r ESP r in an abb
200. good idea to make a back up copy of the file default which is to be edited for the purpose Before the editing it is a good idea to copy the relevant climate databases to the folder usr esru esp r climate The file default can be edited and the line clm usr estu esp t climate climate clm67 1S changed to clm usr estu esp r climate dk DRY 13 3 Pressure distribution database Before making cracks openings and leaks in a building it is necessary to ensure that a set of usable pressure distribution coefficients exists These are used to represent the connection between free stream wind velocities and the pressure generated on the outside face of surfaces of the building Each set of pressure distribution coefficients contains 16 values corresponding to an incident angle of the wind within set of 22 5 compass sectors The first coefficient is defined as the normal to the surface and the subsequent 15 coefficients each represent steps of 22 5 calculated clockwise from normal Thus each pressure distribution coefficient gives the surface pressure generated by the wind with a given incidence angle ESRU Report 2001 The procedure for calculating the surface pressure distribution from the coefficients is included in appendix 3 If any pressure distribution file is needed analysed refer to the ESRU Report 2001 The pressure distribution sets found in the file pressc db1 is based on a publication from the IEA s Air and Ventilation Centre
201. grt is edited in an Excel spread sheet and the beginning time step of each hour is listed in Table 33 Table 33 The result output from comfort assessment facility which lists the zone dry bulb temperature t air mean radiant temperature t mrt relative humidity rel h standard effective temperature SET Predicted Mean Vote PMV and PMV Predicted Percent of Dissatisfied PPD and comfort assessment based on PMV Time t air t mrt 7 SET PMV PM PPD Comfort assessment hrs DEE CEC ER CHE RESER A based on PMV 0 iC Cc a ae a slightly cool acceptable 1 slightly cool acceptable 2 slightly cool acceptable 3 cool unpleasant 4 cool unpleasant 5 cool unpleasant 6 187 25 so ad os on s slightly cool acceptable 7 15 slightly cool acceptable 8 Pa f ar f e f a oa fou f s comfortable pleasant 9 21 5 23 9 0 17 o 13 comfortable pleasant 10 a as se isos comfortable pleasant u 23 22 s2 2 4 ois 012 5 comfortable pleasant 12 22 22 s 236 f oos 02 6 comfortable pleasant 13 23 1 22 6 50 24 2 0 19 0 07 comfortable pleasant 14 aa a a as oar o comfortable pleasant 15 231 235 ss 248 03s 0 07 5 comfortable pleasant 16 comfortable pleasant 17 231 243 s57 253 047 o19 6 comfortable pleasant is 233 244 ss 253 0o47 ois 6 comfortable pleasant 19 comfortable pleasant 20 comfortable pleasant 21 216 z231 6 24 o17 012 5
202. gure 142 The content of the Connection menu where connections between components can be added deleted or copied ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item Connections is selected for creation of a connection between the heat exchanger and heat_coil A new component is added via the menu item add delete copy cf Figure 142 add the receiving component for the connection is set to heat_coil the connection type is set to From another component which is the sending component heat_ex the component node is set to the top air node and the mass diversion ratio is set to 1 0 The rest of the connections on the inlet side of the mechanical ventilation system are added via the same procedure and the needed component names and data for the connections on the inlet side of the ventilation system is listed in Table 30 The heat exchanger is a two node model and air node 1 represents the upper flow path in the exchanger and is used for the inlet air Air node 2 is used for as the extract flow path of the ventilation system The rest of the components are 1 node models Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 181 Networks Table 30 The components and their data used to represent the air flow network from the outside to the zone kontor_3 44G Sending Atnode to Receiving At node Connection type Mass component component di
203. h open windows e Type 120 is convenient to use for calculation of fluid flow infiltration between the inside and outside via cracks in the building envelope or for fluid flow inter zone ventilation via cracks below around the door e Type 130 is for use with large vertical openings i e a doorway Flows only occur if a temperature difference exists across the opening and can be bi directional Hensen 1991 General flow conduit component type 210 A more detailed expression for flow in ducts and pipes than introduced in type 10 15 and 17 Two types of fluid losses are taken into account frictional due to fluid viscosity and dynamic due to disturbances caused by fittings that changes the fluid flow path s direction and or area losses Hensen 1991 Conduit and junctions with flow ratio dependent losses type 220 230 240 and 250 These four different conduit type components links nodes in junctions and include the local losses in the component as well e Type 220 Conduit ending in a converging 3 leg junction It only represents half of a junction and both conduits ending in the junction must be represented by this fluid flow component cf Figure 126 and Table 27 e Type 230 Conduit starting in a diverging 3 leg junction It only represents half of a junction and both conduits starting in the junction must be represented by this type cf Figure 126 and Table 27 e Type 240 Conduit ending in a converging 4 leg junction i
204. h the 5 minutes climate data for the Danish Design Reference Year is to be set up ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The database contains the following elements designations of databases relevant period time step per hour import and export of files methods of date display examining and editing of elements and updating of the database The following data types can be applied for use in a 5 minutes time step simulation of climate data e ALLCLMT all climate data including the next 6 items e BDTEXTT ambient dry bulb temperature C e WINDVLT wind velocity m s e WINDDRT wind direction degrees clockwise from north e RELHUMT ambient relative humidity e DIFHSLT diffuse horizontal radiation W m e DIRSOLT direct normal solar radiation W m The above listed elements are just few out of many predefined data types available in the temporal definition database Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 86 Databases A text file containing the columns of data with the required time step i e each line represents the next time step can be imported and used in the definition of a temporal definition database An example of such a file for climate data could be 0 2 8 0 190 280 80 29 3 2 158 13 9 270 81 etc where column one represents the diffuse horizontal radiation column two represents ambient dry bulb temperature column three represents direct normal solar radiati
205. h the menu item add delete lighting zone cf Figure 120 As stated earlier only four lighting zones can be defined for each thermal zone One can scroll through the lighting zones by using the menu item Lighting zone gt gt in Figure 120 and alter menu items c to m in the same figure to suit the different lighting zone Each lighting zone can comprise one control type cf paragraph 22 1 3 calculation type cf paragraph 22 1 4 control algorithm data cf paragraph 22 1 5 and nine sets of photocells data cf paragraph 1 1 1 22 1 3 Control type Within the control type facility different control algorithms can be selected The internal luminaire status and hence the casual gain at the current time step is determined via this algorithm which is based on the internal illuminance data lux transferred from the photocells ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The different control types available under the menu item Control types cf Figure 120 in ESP r are e Always on Lighting is always turned on in the defined control period and the defined control data will be ignored ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 e Always off Lighting is not used in the defined control period e On Off Lighting is turned on if the illuminance set point is not met and turned off if it is met The illuminance level will vary according to the defined control algorithm data ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 e Step Step control algorithm that varies the lighting l
206. hanged to ituc_int rcf This will initialise Radiance desktop module A colour monitor is chosen and the prefix of the scene configuration file is changed to ituc_int rcf in the Radiance desktop module It is a new visualization and two visualization possibilities are listed in the dialog box e Silently mode is a scene using default or pre defined values e Interactively mode allows the user to control the scene creation Interactively mode is selected for use with an internal image in the zone kontor_3 44G The scene name scene root name and scene description is accepted for the configuration file update The season time for the sky is set to summer AM A simulation can now be performed using default Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 145 Lighting analysis and visualization values or one can edit or view these The latter is chosen and the Radiance desktop menu appears cf Figure 107 The menu item create edit scene details cf Figure 107 sky type cf Figure 108 is selected and the sky file name is confirmed The default sky data is listed and can be changed cf Figure 110 The data is changed to 27 6 the time is set to 14 and the sky description is generated via the menu item Generate sky description cf Figure 110 and the menu is exited The menu item zone amp outside composition Generate description is thereafter selected cf Figure 108 and F
207. he file in which the data can be changed is rad mat for the relevant project A part of the content of a file mat is listed in Figure 113 External MLC Colours void plastic rc_ex_G26150G26 o o 5 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 0 Internal MLC Colours void plastic rce_in_G26150G26 Figure 113 A part of the content of a rad mat file where line 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 0 indicates the number of numeric arguments red green blue reflectance and roughness fractions The construction displayed is the partition G26150G26 The letters rc_ex_ and rc_in_ before the name of the partition refer the exterior and interior face of the partition According to Larson et al 1997 the formula to compute the RGB red green and blue reflectance values is O 7 m 3 256 Where x is the RGB value for the red green and blue part of an actual colour The value can be found in many of the today used graphic painting programs gamma the gamma settings for the monitor output of the computer Most monitors have a gamma between 1 7 and 2 7 Stanford University home page Determining the monitor s gamma can be done via the file gamma pic located in the folder usr esru lib Radiance lib First adjust the brightness and contrast settings of the monitor so that the white area of the monitor is as bright as it can be while keeping the black borders truly black Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 Issue the command ximage g 1 b usr esru bin
208. he only data which needs to be set differently than in control loop 1 is the PID mode which is set to 1 for non recursive positional control for cooling and the cooling set point is set to 24 C The same editing procedure is performed for the day types Saturday and Sunday for the control of the cooling coil Figure 161 show the Control periods menu for the plant control facility after the editing of period 1 and the deleting of period 2 and 3 Control periods function 2 day type 1 number of periods 1 perl startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flux control 1 0 5000 0 0 0 24 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 add delete a period help exit Figure 161 The content of the Control periods menu for the plant control facility after editing period 1 and deleting period 2 and 3 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Control periods menu and the Editing options menu can be exited The defined control data in the Controls menu looks like Figure 162 Controls a control focus gt gt plant b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops eoa cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid Iperiod loop location location typelduringlin day e i110 60 1 4 1wkd 1365 3 f Sat 1365 1 g Sun 1365 1 h 2 1 0 0 1 9 1wkd 1365 1 i Sat 1365 1 j Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt u
209. he validation also included locating some source code errors within ESP r that needs to be changed in order to improve the program Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r il Table of Contents Table of Contents PRRE PAG S EE A AA E EAE AE E E AE EE EAE E EE E E E l PBS TRAG a E i EEE E E E E A T Il TABLE OF CONTENTS ii essasienscsscecace vies nies wae case caca seca win a so acc nas nama cd cea ecacmencenececaiepacevececece III TABLE OF CONTENTS APPENDICES 0 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeees X T INTRODUCTION vise cetccctaseccenecetcidiacetchsnadetadecatetahene sebenecstetsnensGetahesesetcnetascaassagedecaensaiects 1 1 1 BaCk KILTI Na POE E TAE E E 1 1 2 PUrPOSC scessssessevossrscssssssssssesvucsssssrssssestevosstesasesssisvocosesossirscesostos sts osso tosstersosss usero osts sssots os sivosseross ss usoross tssss 2 1 3 Methods csssssssoseseosssossecsresstessciosoe sosse sesoeoeseossiesisrotoseie oris Sos os sonses Soesto ne e eoe bs senosios Eoee ssn ee Ee o SSeS 3 2 A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO ESPSR Q W cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeees 5 2 1 ABTA a E KU EE AEAT E T S 5 2 2 The Indoor environment serseri resres r s Eo eE SoSo ES oE oSer SS TE Eo ioo E Essa 6 2 3 Daylight and artificial lighting control cscssscssesssssssssesssessssssessessssesesesenssssssssesseeseessesscessensesssessseesens 7 2 4 Net
210. here is a small window sill which covers the radiator and even though a window reveal is not included in the ITUC building it will be included in this manual to illustrate the procedure for adding these The depth of the window reveal is assumed to be 0 02 metres and the depth of the window sill is assumed to be 0 15 metres The solar obstruction facility is entered via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 66 pp 91 geometry amp attribution the zone kontor_3 44G and solar obstruction If a site obstruction have not been created then the zone obstructions file is created by typing in its path and filename Zones kontor_3 44G obs and the Obstruction menu is displayed as in Figure 92 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 123 Shading and insolation 19 1 1 1 Creating obstruction blocks defining an internal window sill The default obstruction block 1 First NONE in Figure 92 is used to represent the window sill The default block is edited by selecting the menu item 1 First NONE cf Figure 92 The origin cf Figure 94 for the default block 1 First NONE is edited via the menu item origin X Y Z edit origin and the coordinates are changed to x y z 0 073 0 395 12 43 metres and stored by selecting the button ok in the dialog box The co ordinates for the lower right hand corner of the frame are used for the block origin and
211. here the only changes are the menu items Construction cf Figure 50 which is set to 4 16Ar LwE6c and the optical properties is set to org IT_Uni_2 Note All numbers must be entered in SIJ units Note Layer 1 is toward the outside Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 70 Databases Important Frames are not included in the definition of windows and must be included as a surface in the building model in the same way a door or a pane is included as a surface The linear thermal transmittance is also not included in the definition of windows and can be included in the U value for the frame ESRU April 2003 A discussion on this topic is included in paragraph 14 3 The thermal transmittance in connection to the pane and frame is added to the U value of the frame cf appendix 2 13 4 2 1 4 Delete copy and invert facilities of the construction database It is important to get a survey of the rest of the buttons when the menu item add delete copy invert cf Figure 46 is selected as the two buttons delete and copy eases the work with the construction database as the latter has an essential effect on the design of partitions The three functions are described below delete With the button delete it is possible to delete a construction in the list If roof_1 is to be deleted cf Figure 46 the menu item add delete copy invert cf Figure 46 gt delete the construction r
212. hors work but the information is rewritten as the author of this thesis understands it This kind of references is also used when a figure is found in this author s work The used literature can be found in paragraph 30 Quotation surname year This reference is used when text is directly quoted from the author s work The used literature can be found in paragraph 30 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 This kind of references is used when the above figure is part of a screen dump from the building simulation program ESP r or when the above text is based on information from the included help functions in ESP r The references are made to meet copyright declarations and to illustrate which part of this thesis is compiled by no one else but the author Additionally several different strategies to draw attention to a certain piece of information is included in the manual Depending on how critical the information is these items will be marked as note tip important and warning For example Note Remember that Linux and UNIX are case sensitive In other words the command Is is not the same as LS or Ls The last two commands will result in an error message Tip The directory usr share doc contain extra documentation regarding packages installed on your Red Hat Linux 8 0 Personal system Important If a path to the file is not entered then the file will be saved in directory from where ESP r was started A Warning
213. ht gt gt normal g view bounds gt gt optimum h zone names gt gt display i surface names gt gt hidden Jj vertex number gt gt hidden k site origin gt gt display site grid gt gt display m grid distance optimum n surface normals gt gt N A zones to include in image refresh image hidden line view views from sun help exit this menu 1 IN ee Figure 20 Control option in the Wireframe control menu in connection with the menu item image control listed in Figure 19 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The number of lines in the text feedback window or the size of the graphic feedback window can also be changed using the two arrows to the left in Figure 19 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 36 Interface details of ESP r 8 3 Interaction and menu control The main part of the program control takes place in the control options menu in the right side of the interface The menu items can be selected with the mouse or with keystrokes on the keyboard for example the letter k in Figure 21 activates the menu item ground temperature profiles which can then be edited Site Information a domains gt gt building only b notes Basic 3 zone model c site latitude 51 70 d longitude difference 0 50 e exposure typical urban site f ground reflectance 0 20 g weekends Saturday Sunday h year 1967 j ground topology k ground temperatu
214. hting systems should be fully used in consideration to the variation of insolation during day and year and energy consumption Different and commonly used control types are on off control step controls dimming control probability control and user defined control Further the lighting system should be divided into lighting zones in consideration to daylight conditions in order to satisfy the users of the building Valbj rn et al 2000 According to Janak 1997 the quality for daylight is deterministic for building occupant satisfaction with their visual environment because it directly influencing their well being and productivity A number of control schemes for casual gains have been included in ESP r ESP r keeps track of the daylighting entering from all exterior TMC s in the zone and if sunlight has falling on defined photocells The control of casual gains is based on the internal or external photocell illuminance The following are offered in control of lighting casual gains e Up to 4 lighting zones can be added to a thermal zone Each zone can have a maximum of nine photocells and each zone is considered to have an individual lighting system e Two kinds of photocells are available unobstructed vertical photocells and external horizontal illuminance photocells ESRU Report 2001 e If multiple lighting zones and or photocells are used the total casual gain may be obtained by summing the gain contributions from individual photoce
215. ients on a machine with 1 7 GHz and 256 MB ram When the Radiance calculation has finished an ESP r simulation can be performed This example had a calculation time of approximately 9 hours on a 1 7 GHz with 256 MB memory since four sets of daylight coefficients was to be calculated gt A set of daylight coefficients is depending on the number of sensors and the number of blind shutter controls i e if 2 sensors and blind shutter control is defined then four sets of daylight coefficients is calculated 2 set for each sensor containg 1 with and 1 without blind shutter controls Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 159 Networks 23 Networks In many cases simulation problems involve time variant interaction of building fabric and air or water flows It is necessary for this kind of problems to sketch the mass flows network describe the components and boundaries involved for a more efficient use of the network facility used in ESP r Fluid flows in building zones and plant networks can be described in several areas for a combined building and plant simulation e Air flow through cracks and various openings in the building envelop and interior walls e Air flow through a distribution network designed to satisfy the thermal comfort and air demands e Flows through heating devices fans and other different kind of devices within a plant system network Hensen 1991 The knowl
216. ifferent models 13 2 2 Looking through or editing the climate database Looking through or editing a climate database makes use of the clm module cf paragraph 9 4 and draws up different options in the analysis of the climate database cf Figure 37 The climate database can be looked over graphically or schematically and the degree of detail can be summary or detailed Equally there are different options to edit report import or export climate data and the user interface can be accommodated too Climate Analysis a climate usr esru esp r c b Mon 1 Jan Mon 31 Dec 2001 c synoptic analysis d graphical analysis table one day analysis a 5 a ao ar a cr Mes oO Mw vw ao a o a edit climate data export data to text file import data from text file O setup environment reporting gt gt summary output gt gt screen delim gt gt normal help end in r S a Figure 37 Analysing and editing options of the relevant climate database ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 54 Databases The menu items in Figure 37 are employed as follows a Climate Here other climate databases can be chosen b Date interval menu item b Here the period for analysing the climate database can be chosen The periods can be user defined monthly seasonal or annual c Synoptic analysis Here the relevant c
217. igure 111 and the filenames for glazing properties alternative glazing properties opaque properties inside composition and outside composition are confirmed The obstructions are included in the scene generation and the pre calculated indirect illuminance is not included This can only be included if a direct coupling between ESP r and Radiance have been simulated The default scene view point is hereafter edited via the menu item scene view points cf Figure 108 selecting the zone kontor_3 44G create a new view and the view is named kontor_in The display is already set to plan view and is kept The eye point is changed via the menu item eye editing cf Figure 115 and the coordinates 4 0 1 5 13 2 is entered The direction of the view is changed in order to face the window The menu item direc azi elv cf Figure 115 is selected and the view azimuth is changed to 270 and the elevation is changed to 3 2E 6 horizontal The changes to the viewpoint definition is saved via the menu item same view info in Figure 115 and an exit to the Radiance desktop menu is performed cf Figure 108 Viewpoint definition a view list b zones to include display gt gt plan view 0 eeye 4 0 1 5 13 2 f direc azi elv 270 0 0 0 vector 1 00 0 00 0 00 view angle 90 0 o east min max t 0 0 4 5 north min maxt 0 6 2 9 3 gt save view info help exit Figure 115 The Viewpoint definition
218. ility can be used to model the behaviour of air flows in double skin facades which is the trend for use with office buildings and there by predict how these can be used in regards to energy savings and thermal comfort Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 160 Networks 23 1 Fluid flow networks A fluid mass flow simulation assumes one dimensional steady state flow in a building and or plant configuration subjected to certain boundary conditions ESRU Report 2001 The simulation involves mass flow through connections and nodal networks The nodes in a fluid flow network represent either internal or boundary pressure and the connections represent the flow paths or components in the plant amp system facility if the fluid flow network is coupled to the plant amp system network The description of fluid flows comprises a fluid type air or water nodes flow components inter connections and boundary conditions The nodal network is constructed by connecting these resistances The network can be attached to boundary conditions defined by a pressure coefficient set representing free wind stream vector and zone surface pressures ESRU Report 2001 A mass flow network may consist of several sub networks which are not restricted to be of the same fluid However the fluid within the same sub network must be of the same fluid type ESRU Report 2001 Analysis of fluid flow through a comp
219. im2002 in the following areas mean radiant temperature daylight simulation and networks This will be exemplified via building models later in this manual a brief overview of these is given here 4 3 1 1 Adding two MRT sensors and calculating sensor view factors MRT sensors can be placed at many specific locations in a zone to calculate the black body view factors between sensors and zone surfaces These view factors are used by the Simulator to evaluate the longwave radiative exchange and the zone comfort level variation The purpose of this facility is to add two MRT sensors represented by points 0 01 lt 0 01 0 01 m in the room and calculating the MRT sensor view factors The first MRT sensor is located 1 metre from the window and the second sensor is located approximately 3 metres from the window Both sensors are located with an equal distance to the two partitions NE_part and SW_part 1 1 metres above floor level and are rotated 9 towards East Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 20 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 The simulated mean radiant temperature at the two sensor locations kontor_3 44G S 2 MRT and kontor_3 44G S 2 MRT is illustrated in Figure 12 Lib ituc rest Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun 00h59 tot Mon 9 Jun 23h59 Year 2003 sim 1m output 1m Zones kontor_3 446 26 007 24 007 ontor_3 44G 5 2 MRT 22 0 20 007 D30 18 004
220. imum 15 C from 1700 to 0800 and minimum at 21 C from 0800 to 1700 Less energy is used for cooling the ventilation inlet to keep the zone dry bulb temperature below 24 C the whole day The natural ventilation is used when the internal temperature get above 23 C during office hours and when the temperature rises above 18 C outside office hours and the opening frequency for the period 9 6 to the 16 6 is shown in paragraph 26 4 The opening of windows will minimize the need for cooling Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 214 Result analysis Libs ituc rest Results for ituc Period Wed 1 Jan OOh59 tot Wed 31 Dec 23h59 Year 2003 sim 1m output 1m Causal energy breakdown kllhrs at air point for zone 1 kontor_3 446 Gain Loss Infiltration air load 14 560 2588 490 Ventilation air load 0 000 0 000 Occupt casual gains 158 667 0 000 Lights casual gains 0 000 0 000 Equipt casual gains 83 587 0 000 Controlled Occupt 0 000 0 000 Controlled Lights 26 311 59 146 Controlled Equipt 0 000 0 000 Opaque MLC convect ext 66 352 128 890 Opaque MLC convect int 725 406 579 548 Transp MLC convect ext 18 617 82 436 Transp MLC convect int 0 000 0 000 Convec portion of plant 2408 049 104 825 Totals 3501 549 3545 335 Figure 185 The content of the Enquire about facility and the illustration of the zone energy balance ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 As can be seen from Figure 185 the g
221. ind o SC_fictit Fictitious 99 99 4mm no blind p DC_8074_04nb Clear glass 80 75 4mm no blind q DCF671_06nb Clear float 76 71 Gmm no blind r DCF7671_06ib Clear float 76 71 Gmm int blnd s DCF7365_10nb Clear float 73 66 10mm no blind t DSF4554_06nb Spectrafloat 45 54 6mm no blind u DAG6349_06nb Antisun green 63 49 6mm no blind v DAZSO60_O06nb Antisun bronze 50 60 6mm no blind w DAGH260_06nb Antisun grey 42 60 6mm no blind x DAZ3348_10nb Antisun bronze 33 48 10mm no blind y DAGZ549_10nb Antisun grey 25 49 10mm no blind z DCF7671_6omb Clear float 76 71 6mm open mid blnd gt lof 2 import add delete copy element list optical properties db help exit this menu o Optical Property Set a type DAG6349_06nb b descrip Antisun green 63 49 c visible transmittance 0 63 d solar abs amp refl for docu e U value for docu 2 80 Odeg 40deg 55deg 7Odeg 80deg f direc trn 9 381 0 353 0 316 0 221 0 096 reflect 0 069 0 072 0 098 0 217 0 444 g heat gain doc 0 49 0 46 0 43 0 32 0 18 layers 3 refrac abs 0 abs 40 abs 55 070 B80 h 1 520 0 502 0 527 0 539 0 522 0 432 i 1 000 0 001 0 002 0 003 0 004 0 005 j 1 520 0 047 0 046 0 044 0 036 0 023 Emm no 0 58 0 06 1 add delete copy layer help exit this menu Figure 8 A list with the available panes in the optical database optics db1 and the optical data for the pane Antisun green 63 49 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 2 6 Time re
222. ing simulation programmes especially ESP r i Abstract Abstract The present work is a manual for the transient energy simulation program ESP r The manual is a work of reference when working with ESP r and is written for building design engineers and for educational purposes for student at the Technical University of Denmark The manual includes a description of the program as a whole the installation procedure the ESP r environment databases model geometry solar shading fluid flow networks plant systems controls visualisation and casual gain control that includes the coupling with the 3 party program Radiance simulations and result analysis The content described for the different facilities within the program is illustrated in connection with ESP r in step by step described examples which help users understand and appreciate the use of the program To encourage the correct use of the two programs ESP r and Bsim2002 for building design a description of their capability within building energy simulation is included A series of relevant design questions is also included that guides the users in the direction of choosing the best building energy simulation program for a design purpose The manual is validated by a parallel validation during the modelling of the included examples The validation was based on analysing the results which has confirmed that the described modelling procedure in the included examples is correct T
223. ingers varmetab Dansk Standard K benhavn Denmark prEN ISO 13370 1998 Thermal performance of building Heat Transfer via ground Calculation method ISO FDIS 13370 1998 CEN European committee for standardization Brussels Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 229 References EN 410 1998 Glass in building Determination of luminous and solar characteristic of glazing CEN European committee for standardization Brussels EN 673 1997 Glass in building Determinaiton of thermal transmittance U value Calculation method CEN European committee for standardization Brussels Janak M Macdonald I 1999 Current state of the art of integrated thermal and lighting simulation and future issues Slovak Technical University Radlinsk ho 11 813 68 Bratislava Slovakia and Energy System Research Unit University of Stathclyde Glasgow Scotland Christoffersen J Petersen E Jonsen K 1999 SBI Report 277 Beregningsveerktojer til analyse af dagslysforhold i bygninger Statens byggeforskningsinstitut Denmark ESRU April 2003 mail cf appendix 4 The Perez model window framing and thermal bridges Energy System Research Unit University of Stathclyde Glasgow Scotland Nielsen T R June 2003 mail cf appendix 4 Seasons BygeDTU the Technical University of Denmark Andersen N E Christensen G Nielsen F 1993 SBI Anvinsing 178 Bygninger
224. ion 26 1 Example The graphical result facility The graphical result facility is used by selecting the menu item Graphs from the result analysis menu in Figure 176 and the result can for example be viewed as time variable graphs variable variable graphs 3 D surface plots of a variable over time temperature profiles within constructions and histograms It is also possible to enter the air flow graphical analysis facility from the Graph facilities menu cf Figure 177 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 208 Result analysis Graph facilities 2 Select result set 3 Define output period 4 Select zones Timetvar graph Intra fabric 3D profile d Frequency histogram e VartVar graph f Network air wtr flow Help Exit oo Figure 177 The different graphing facilities available in the ESP r result analysis facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A Time var graph is selected for illustration of the zone dry bulb temperature ambient temperature the mean radiant temperature of the two added MRT sensors and the solar entering the zone from outside cf Figure 178 Time series plot 2 Result set 3 Display period 4 Select zones a Climate b Temperatures c Comfort metrics d Solar processes f Zone flux g Surface flux h Sensible amp latent i Zone RH j Casual gains m Electrical power n Network air wtr flow o CFD metrics p IPY metrics q Edit selection
225. ion of choosing the most suitable program for the project First there are some basic demands which the program has to meet The program must e be user friendly o be easy to obtain input data for o be easy and quick to learn how to use o have the possibility to perform parameter variations be generally accepted perform correct calculations have a good tutorial manual or online service have an acceptable calculation time be well documented Most programs meet most of the above listed demands and one can evaluate these demands in connection to the description of ESP r and Bsim2002 in paragraph 4 2 1 and 4 2 2 Secondly the following questions guide one in the direction of choosing the most suitable program for the project e What kind of project is it e Is the available material for the project superficial or detailed e Which facilities as natural ventilation lighting systems etc are to be included and studied in the model e Which degree of details does the program need i e on natural ventilation lighting systems etc e What is the degree of details needed in the result analysis e Does the program deliver the output needed to study all the relevant facilities as natural ventilation lighting systems etc e How much time is available for model definition and result analyses Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 14 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 e What
226. ior is supplied to NW_ext_wall NW_frame NW_win_low and NW_win_up cf Figure 88 Connection options exterior dynamic similar boundary static boundary conditions ground standard profile ground user def profile ground 3D conduction adiabatic no heat flux BASESIMP foundation UNKNOWN at this time accept current oer TO TM AO TD help exit this menu Figure 88 The Connection options menu in the topology tool facility A boundary condition is needed for the external wall NW_ext_wall and the menu item exterior is selected ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The topology is saved to the file ituc cnn the revised configuration is loaded to the model in the process of exiting the topology tool and the configuration file is also updated in the process Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 116 Blinds and shutters Optional facilities of ESP r 18 Blinds and shutters The need for protection against solar radiation entering buildings from the outside is necessary in both domestic and office buildings Shading windows will always be a balance between the desires for utilization of passive solar heat daylight view to the exterior and a reduction of the solar loads Christoffersen 1995 Fixed shading devices is not always the way to solve problems as glare high solar loads especially when a desire exists to use daylight in the building design in a climate do
227. ious databases under the menu item database maintenance cf Figure 34 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 In the database facilities that are possible to examine and edit the acquired program modules will be activated Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 51 Databases 13 1 Standard and user databases ESP r offers a number of standard databases located in the directories usr esru esp r databases and usr esru esp r climate In some cases the user of the program needs a reserved or homemade database and in those cases a standard database can be copied and placed in one s own folder or the user can build his her own database 13 1 1 Establishing user databases This is relevant to all databases In most cases it is a good idea to install user databases with unique and easily recognizable filenames for each single project Equally it is a good idea to save user defined databases and copies of standard databases in the relevant project folder dbs This eliminates chances of changing profiles used in other projects 13 2 The climate database The climate database is composed of a set of time values from 1 Jan 01 00 to 31 Dec 24 00 Each time value contains data for Diffuse horizontal solar irradiance W m Dry bulb temperature of tenth degrees Celsius e g 102 10 2 C The direct normal or the global horizontal solar irradiance W m The wind speed of tenth m s
228. ir temperature within another zone The ambient air temperature The wind velocity A selection of one of the above points includes parameter as lower middle and higher limit set points In terms of air flow control the standard flow patterns apply unless you go above the upper set point or below the lower set point at which time the relevant upper lower alternative set of flows will be used ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 This is a good way of defining air flows in the early design process A more complex flow regime can be specified in the fluid flow network facility cf paragraph 23 2 1 16 2 Casual gains Casual gains can be defined for one or more periods and the magnitude of the casual gain is the summation of the gains occurring at the same time The electrical definitions for the appliances can be included in the description Within the casual gains facility it is possible to import predefined profiles from the event profiles database and assign these to weekdays Saturdays or Sundays During the import of a casual gain profile for either occupancy lighting or equipment the user has to define the magnitude of the sensible and latent load and the radiant and convective fraction of the profile to fit the total required gains for the defined type A gain day profile e g lighting can be scaled if the total lighting gain needs adjustments or a single profile lighting from 8 9 if defined can be edited Investigation and imple
229. is the degree of knowledge required to set up features in the model plant and network definition 4 2 The capability of ESP r and Bsim2002 within building energy simulation This paragraph describes the two programs capability within building energy simulation their strengths and weaknesses The content is a description of the two programs and will support in answering the questions listed in paragraph 4 1 4 2 1 The building energy simulation program ESP r ESP r is a transient energy simulation program which allows an in depth appraisal of the factors that influence the energy and environmental performance of buildings ESP r works in a UNIX and Linux environment but will shortly be available in Windows with the program cygwin installed which emulates a Linux like environment within windows ESP r attempts to simulate the real world as close as possible and uses detailed calculation methods like ray tracing and computational fluid dynamic CFD calculation which makes ESP r useful for a wide rage of projects ESP r allows the designer to explore the complex relationships between a building s form fabric air flow plant and control The program is well documented and most of the papers documenting the program are published on the following home page http www esru strath ac uk ESP r comprises a central Project Manager which works around various modules during building and plant modelling and can use a variety of third party applications
230. is type of device is a general flow inducer which approximates a pump or fan by a performance curve cubic polynomial which related the total pressure rise to the volume flow rate for a given fan pump speed and fluid density Hensen 1991 General flow corrector component Type 410 A flow corrector or variable flow resistance is the actuating part of a flow control loop or mechanism e g variable valves and dampers Fixed valves and dampers can be described by local dynamic loss factors in a flow conduit Type 210 Hensen 1991 Flow corrector with polynomial local loss factor Type 420 A special case of a valve or damper is one which is described in terms of a variable dynamic loss factor C i e the valve or damper is approached as if it were a conduit with local dynamic losses dependant on the corrector s relative position e g valve stem displacement or damper blade angle Hensen 1991 Fixed flow rates controller Type 460 This type of component is a fixed flow rate device which unlike type 30 and 35 responds to a wide range of user defined signals A typical use is a fan or pump in order to characterize flow rates before specifying a specific device ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 For most fluid flow component types uni directional flow will be the result However some component types may show bi directional flow movement through a connection i e in case of a doorway when a small density variation over the high
231. itiating the menu item output in Figure 186 The latter will be focused on in this paragraph The different kind of graphical outputs can also be seen from Figure 186 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 215 Result analysis Time series plot 2 result set 3 display period 5 output gt gt graph ambient temperature wind speed wind direction ambient RH press node press diff conn stack pres conn node temperature mass flow rate volume flow rate air changes velocity conn watts assoc w flow SBerwrwe FO HOA Te display to gt gt screen data as values clear all selections set axis scale add another profile draw graph labels help exit VHe t NH Y Figure 186 The different facilities available for the network flow analysis in the ESP r result analysis facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item node temperature C for the zone node kontor_3 44G is selected to illustrate the temperature of the node representing the zone kontor_3 44G and menu item volume flow rate m s is selected for illustration of the volume flow rate from 1 The supply duct duct_in to the zone node kontor_3 44G which will illustrate the rate at which air to the zone is supplied and 2 The flow rate from the zone node kontor_3 44G to the outside via the lower part of the window The displaying dates are changed to just contain the period 9 6 at 0100 to the 1
232. iting menu cf Figure 54 to include the edited or the installed profile to the database Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 75 Databases 13 6 1 4 Drawing up the profiles of the databases in the text feedback window There can be many profiles in a database and the easiest way to examine the database for topical profiles is to choose the menu item list profiles in the database in the Profile manager menu cf Figure 53 to list the content of the of the database in the text feedback window 13 7 The optical database The optical properties of constructions are defined in the optical database The standard databases which go with the program are usr esru esp r databases optics db1 and usr esru esp r databases optics db2 The optical data for the database can be deduced from e For American products data can be deduced from the program Window versions 4 1 and 5 1 Data for these products must be computed according to the NFRC ASHRAE International Standard ISO DIS 15099 1999 e For European products data can be deduced from the program WIS v2 0 that is computed according to the CEN standards EN 410 1998 and EN 673 1997 standards The calculated optical properties can then be implemented in a new pane profile in a building model The necessary information for panes includes angle dependent data 0 40 55 70 80 from the normal of the surface for the direct solar t
233. ition Toggles a Filter gt gt all surfs amp obstr b Fictitious surf gt gt omitted c Ground topology d Generate description Browse edit Glazing properties amp compos Opaque surface properites Outside composition Inside composition 7o thm Help Exit Figure 111 The menu used to define the composition of the Radiance scene in terms of materials and geometry which is used in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The data used are based on the data registered for the ESP r model A generation of a description via the menu item Generate description in Figure 111 results in rad files for the glazing properties inside and outside compositions and a mat file for the opaque materials The menu item Other furniture amp fittings in Figure 108 and Figure 109 If miscellaneous furniture and fixtures have been established within Radiance this can be added to the study The menu item Scene view points in Figure 108 If an image study is undertaken then a set up of the views eye point viewing direction and angle can be performed cf Figure 112 Viewpoint definition a view list b zones to include c display gt gt plan view eeye 4 0 1 5 13 2 f direc azi elv 270 0 0 0 vector 1 00 0 00 0 00 h view angle 90 0 least min max 0 0 4 5 m north min maxt 0 6 2 9 gt save view info exit Figure 112 The Viewpoint definition menu where the display option can be altered ESP r V
234. ive the administrator reading writing and executing permissions on the gendaylit file and the other users will only have reading and executing permissions The administrator is given reading and writing permissions on the other files and the other users will only have reading permissions with the code 644 The gendaylit file is then copied to the Radiance directory via the command cp gendaylit usr esru bin Radiance and the files are copied to the folder ustr esru lib Radiance The file bash_profile must be edited in order to make Radiance work e The line setenv RAYPATH ust estu lib Radiance must be added to the bash_profile file cf Figure 10 pp 12 e The line ust estu bin Radiance must be added at the end of the PATH PATH HOME bin line in the bash_profile file cf Figure 10 pp 12 e The word RAYPATH must be added to the line export PATH cf Figure 10 pp 12 In order to make Radiance work with RedHat Linux delete the file rview in the bin directory Only the administrator or a person with the same rights can do so 6 5 Changing and compiling the source code As mentioned in paragraph 5 it is possible for users to further develop change or include source code within ESP r which is programmed in the programming languages Fortran 77 and C Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 31 Structure and functionality of ESP r The files in which the source code for modules can
235. l by choosing the menu item save model in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 42 before the calculations of the pressure Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 60 Databases distribution coefficients are started Otherwise unintelligible error messages may occur After filling in the data for the pressure coefficient calculation the user can apply the menu item add via calculation in the pressure distribution database Co ordinates of the surface on which the pressure distribution coefficients are to be calculated can be activated via the menu item define facade coordinates and the coefficients can then be calculated with the menu item calculate pressure coefficients Delete To delete a set of pressure distribution coefficients this function is chosen the relevant set is selected to delete and is ended with selecting the menu item Exit The program double checks the deleting with the user Copy It is possible to copy an existing set of coefficients and then edit it When using the function a set must be chosen e g 1 1 exposed wall and to accept the copying the process must be ended with selecting the menu item Exit Then the new set can be renamed e g to 1 3 exposed wall and the data can be edited Continue This button in the dialog box can be used if the choice of add delete copy press coef set cf Figure 41 is regretted A Warning Do not forget to up
236. lar refl solar direct reflectance on the outdoor side r_sol_o Solar abs The sum of the solar absorption factor abs in each of the glasses and a possible blind r_sol_o and abs is both at an angle of incidence of 0 U value for docu U value direc trn heat gain doc t_sol at an angle of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 g val at an angle of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 refrac abs 0 abs 80 The refractions index Refrac is typically 1 52 for glass and 1 0 for air abs 1 at an angle of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 refrac abs 0 abs 80 The refractions index Refrac is typically 1 52 for glass and 1 0 for air abs for pane nr 2 to at an angle of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 13 7 3 Example Editing the optical database The optical database is activated via the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu cf Figure 34 and optical properties cf Figure 35 The path and filename to the relevant database is given as input or the standard database optics db1 distributed with EPS r can be selected The following options for editing are import a Window 4 1 file containing a glass profile to the list manually add a glazing system to the list delete edit and copy a glazing system cf Figure 55 Furthermore the contents of the database including all optical properties of the glass systems can be listed in the t
237. lation results Note Within the next version of ESP r an installation for cygwin in the Windows environment will be included Conversation with Jon Hand ESRU 6 1 2 Useful Unix and or Linux commands There are more that one hundred commands available for the two operating systems and some of the most useful commands for the use of ESP r can be found on the home page http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut training ovr_unix htm More commands can be found on the home page http unixhelp ed ac uk Most commands are used in the same way in both operating system but some commands shall be used with minor changes 6 2 Where to find the Linux software and manuals ESP r works on both UNIX and Linux workstations To install Linux along with Windows one has to create minimum two partitions on the hard disk which can be done with the program Fdisk found on Windows software The procedure for installing both Windows and Linux is to first install Windows and then Linux Linux then includes an option to perform a dual boot boot in either Windows or Linux during the start up and rebooting process The procedure for creating dual boot is explained in the installation guide for the Linux software During the description of the installation process the focus is on the Linux and UNIX workstations with the RedHat 8 and Sun4 with Solaris 8 platforms The user can buy the UNIX workstation while the Linux workstation with the RedHat
238. ld be an advantage for external shadings as screens are only activated when both the incident radiation and the wind velocity are above and below a user specified set points Another improvement to the blind shutter facility would be to include a step by step shading of the panes instead of changing the optical data for the whole pane This would make the blind shutter facility more close to the actual use in real life Obstruction in ESP r can be used to represent Venetian blinds and other shading objects both inside and outside a building model A major disadvantage of representing Venetian blinds as obstructions is that it is not possible to control these in order to make a full scale and realistic study of the utilisation of daylights in buildings over a period of time Linear thermal transmittance and thermal bridges are not handled very well in ESP r and require one of the following steps to be carried out in order to take account for these adding the linear thermal transmittance and thermal bridges to the U value for the surfaces involved or including a surface to the exterior wall containing all the linear thermal transmittances and thermal bridges Windows are not treated as a whole in the program and one must manually add frames panes and the linear thermal transmittance in order to take full account for thermal performance the whole window The calculation of irradiation impinging on East and West facing external surface is not calculate
239. lected for defining the sensor details actuator details period of validity and period data for the second control loop cf Figure 149 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 199 Controls The menu item period of validity and the period data cf Figure 149 is defined with the same data as for control loop 1 The sensor including the actuator details are defined with the same data as for control loop 1 but the single flow connection is set to kontor_3 44G gt external_NW via Window_up The Control periods menu and the Editing options menu can be exited The control data is updated in the Controls menu issuing the menu item update control data and menu looks like Figure 169 Controls a control focus gt gt vent hydronic b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops 2 cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid period loop location location typelduringlin day e 1 1 0 0 312 Owkd 1365 3 f Sat 1365 1 9 Sun 1365 1 h 2 1 0 0 3 1 Owkd 1365 3 i Sat 1365 1 j Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 169 The content vent hydronic Controls menu after the control configuration has finished ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The facility can here after be exited Note The period start time defines when the previous
240. level save SHEE HEH HH eee eee eeee Help Exit to main menu Figure 174 The SIMUL menu where the entered parameters as simulation databases and period can be changed state variable as zone temperature and plant flux can be plotted on the screen during the simulation and the save level can be changed ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Other facilities as save level and monitor state variable can be set in the SIMUL menu cf Figure 174 The important menu items in this menu are described below e The menu item Save gt gt cf Figure 174 The simulation save level can be changed to fit the needs for result save level details cf paragraph 25 Save level 4 require more disk space than save level 1 e The menu item Monitor state variables cf Figure 174 The monitor option can be used to get an initial impression of zone performance and is especially useful to see if sufficient capacity has been given to environmental systems or to see when the mass flow rate in a plant behaves strangely e The menu item Simulation toggles cf Figure 174 Most simulation does not require special settings A set of simulation toggles are available for experts to fine tune of calculation or to set special facilities during a simulation e g switching the sky distribution from the default Perez model to a Klucher or an isotropic model cf paragraph 13 2 1 for the Perez model Other options in this facility is result averaging switching off cli
241. limate database can be analysed schematically for individual climate parameters cf Figure 38 Synoptic analysis set period D 2 m a m 2 2 o gt a w ce dry bulb temperature direct normal solar diffuse horiz solar wind speed m s wind direction deg relative humidity 2 OorWhMr maximum amp minimum days within a range degree days average values integrate radiation frequency histogram rFeaats climatic severity indx find typical weeks 0 oO help exit Figure 38 The content of the Synoptic analysis menu where the relevant climate database can be schematically analysed for individual climate parameters ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The procedure for using this facility is determined via several tests and is illustrated in the list below which references to menu items in Figure 38 1 set period Choice of the survey period which can be user defined monthly seasonal or annual 2 set time of day Choice the period of the day to analyse which is to be input as a full hour interval e g 12 16 for the period 1200 to 1600 3 1 6 Here the required climate type can be examined m h How to examine the climate type can be chosen here 5 climatic severity index is the severity index of the climate for parameters as ambient temperature direct solar radiation diffuse solar radiation and wind The index is a complex indicator of the personal discomfort safety and mobilit
242. ll or by average of all photocells controlling one lighting system ESRU Report 2001 e luminance from adjacent zones is included Effects of blind shutter operation and obstruction in these zones are also accounted for ESRU Report 2001 e User supplied daylight factor data can by included in the casual gain control e A direct time step coupling with Radiance during simulation is available cf paragraph 22 2 In order to take advantage of this facilities Radiance needs to be included on the system cf paragraph 6 4 for the installation of Radiance Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 150 Casual gain control Lighting control A Warning If a blind shutter control and obstruction are to be included in the building model then these facilities must be defined before defining the casual gain control facility Otherwise the blind shutter control and obstructions will not be included in the casual gain control The integration of ESP r and Radiance for lighting systems control results in an accurate daylight illuminance calculation based on ray tracing and a possibility to make a detailed study on the impact of different controls and lighting system The impact on the power consumption for the lighting systems from the use of different shading facilities their control and the use of different obstructions can also be studied Documentation for the calculation method of casual gai
243. locations in the light of climate data and zone parameters supplied from ESP r The ESP r simulation is interrupted during each time step when Radiance calculations are performed The illuminance data from Radiance calculated via ray tracing is transferred back to the luminaire controller in ESP r The ESP r simulation proceeds and the returned data are then used to determine as a function of the active control algorithm the luminaire status and hence the casual gain associated with the lights at the current time step Clarke et al 1998 22 2 1 1 Example Modelling a direct coupling of ESP r and Radiance in a simulation This is just an example on how to create a direct coupling between ESP r and Radiance in a simulation and it is not included in the construction of the ITUC building The menu item composition is activated in the Model Definitions menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 casual gain control is selected and used to initialise the coupling between ESP r and Radiance in a simulation The needed casual gain control data cf Table 25 is used but the menu item calculation type cf Figure 120 is set to coupling One is automatically passed to the Radiance desktop facility when exiting the Casual Gain Control menu This invokes the Radiance desktop module in automatic mode which creates the associated files to the direct simulation coupling of ESP r and Radiance The menu item create edit scene details cf Figure 107 sky t
244. luence the insolation in zones is only generated by obstruction blocks or by surfaces facing away from the sun ESRU Homepage tutorial_ 10 If other zones or portions of the zone being calculated will obstruct particular surfaces their volume should be represented by obstruction blocks ESRU Report 2001 Overhangs should therefore be represented with obstruction blocks in order to have a shading effect on the facade Documentation for the calculation method of shading and insolation can be found in Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford The file esru src esp r esrubld solar F 19 1 Solar obstructions Obstruction blocks represent remote obstructions such as adjacent buildings overhangs lamellas Venetian blinds window reveals trees etc The specification of obstructions is currently based on an obstruction being a cube and these shall be constructed to represent the different shading objects The site obstruction is held in the site obstruction file obs This is not possible in the solar obstruction facility ESP r It is not possible to model any kind of transparent lamellas obstructions and it is not possible to impose control on obstruction blocks Hopefully in the future this will be implemented in the program which will make the modelling of buildings and the study of the solar distribution entering a zone more realistic The definition of obstructions is pa
245. m Documentation for this new Perez sky distribution model can be found in Perez et al 1990 The Perez model from 1990 is used in for example Bsim2002 and comparisons of two used models to the theory described in the two Perez papers implemented and calculated in MatLab are listed in Table 9 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 53 Databases Table 9 The differences between the solar radiation impinging on a surface calculated in Bsim2002 ESP r and from the Perez model from 1987 and 1990 implemented and calculated in MatLab South West Ceiling Simulation Program Perez model kWh m kWh m kWh m ESP r version 10 4 Perez 1987 Bsim2002 version 3 3 3 14 Perez 1990 Perez sky distribution model from 1987 Perez sky distribution model from 1990 As can be seen from Table 9 the solar radiation impinging on a surface calculated in Bsim2002 matches the theory from the Perez sky distribution model from 1990 There are up to 13 difference for the solar radiation impinging on a surface calculated in ESP r and the Perez sky distribution model from 1987 for the east fa ade This discrepancy is currently being addressed by ESRU at the Strathclyde University Glasgow Scotland Other available sky distribution models in ESP r are the Klucher Munier and isotropic models cf paragraph 25 1 regarding simulation toggles for how to change between the d
246. mate interpolation turn solar radiation on off change between fully implicit or explicit numerical calculations for building and plant modelling This parameter can only be changed by typing in a password that is obtainable by application to the department ESRU at University of Strathclyde in Glasgow Scotland The simulation is started by selecting the menu item Invoke simulation in Figure 174 and the system control file ctl which holds the definition of all of the building plant network controls has to be entered When the simulation results have been saved the simulator module can be exited 25 2 Example Advanced integrated simulation The advanced integrated simulation is initiated in run interactively mode to illustrate the different possibilities in and how to perform a simulation The menu item simulation from the Model Definition menu cf Figure 170 is selected integrated simulation cf Figure 172 for a detailed Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 205 Simulation whole building plant network simulation and the button run interactively is chosen in the dialog box When the integrated simulation has been initiated the simulator module opens and the following questions listed in the dialog box are answered as follows e System configuration file name ituc cfg e The simulation start up period is set to 3 days e The climate file name is set to ust estu e
247. mentation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 111 Zone operations 16 3 Example Adding air flow and casual gains to a zone The operation facility is entered via the menu item operation from the Zones Definition menu cf Figure 84 and the zone kontor_3 44G is selected Both the air flow and the casual gains in the Zone operation menu cf Figure 83 need to be updated according to the ITUC building No electrical data is included for the different operations 16 3 1 Air flows An infiltration rate of 0 3 h is added to the zone from the Zone operation menu and no control is applied for infiltration The menu item edit scheduled air flows cf Figure 83 add delete copy air flows cf Figure 85 the button add in the dialog box all day types including weekdays Saturday and Sunday ok to the start and finish hour is set to 0 to 24 air change rate the infiltration is set to 0 3 h ok the ventilation is set to 0 0 h and ok is selected in the dialog box When the infiltration has been added the airflow menu has the same appearance as seen from Figure 85 Air flow in kontor 3 446 a Air flow control none Start End Infil Vent Source Air flows Weekdays 1 a 0 24 0 30 0 00 na Air flows Saturdays 1 b O 24 0 30 0 00 na Air flows Sundays 1 c Q0 24 0 30 0 00 na add delete copy air flows list current information help exit this menu Figure
248. mentioned above that one of the advantages was the possibility to model detailed plant system and computational fluid dynamics This is also a disadvantage because it requires specific knowledge on those topics and requires time to gain the background knowledge for users who are not familiar with these topics Two other facilities in ESP r that require specific knowledge are electricity and controls Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 222 Discussion New users do not have a manual that step by step guides one through the modelling of simple and complex facilities for a building model New as well as experienced users are forced to gain knowledge on the program by solving exercises placed on the internet at the home page http www esru strath ac uk participate in courses at the University of Strathclyde study examples included in the ESP r package read the documentation on the different program facilities or to model the different facility as described in Figure 1 It seems appropriate to develop the program in regards to control of both the blind shutter and obstructions The blind shutter facility makes it possible for panes to be changed to panes with other optical properties when a set point is reached This facility needs to be developed to take account for more than one parameter time solar radiation direct AND diffuse and reflected temperature and illuminance at a time It wou
249. menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 110 Zone operations A zone operation file must be established for each zone even if casual gains and air flows are not relevant e g for solar distribution study only The definition of air flows and casual gains are easy set up according to the sketch made in the preliminary design stage It is not possible to exclude periods in the operation facility If it is necessary to exclude a period then it is advised to split the simulation into separate periods and to redefine the operation facility Another possibility is to construct several models with different operation facilities Periods can be excluded for infiltration and ventilations when a detailed mechanical or natural ventilation system is defined in the plant amp systems and vent hydronic facility and controls for these types are defined cf paragraph 23 and 24 Important It is important to issue the menu item update air flow amp casual gains from the Zone operation menu cf Figure 83 in order to update and reflect the changes made within the zone operation file 16 1 Infiltration and ventilation in the preliminary design stage A zone air flow thermostatic control definition can be established for infiltration and zone coupled ventilation in the operation file The air flow control can be based on The zone air temperature The a
250. milar to the pane in the ITUC building There are minor changes in the cavity width which is changed from 12 mm to 16mm and the exterior side glass is 2mm wider than in the ITUC building The data for the two used glasses is listed in Table 11 and further details can be found in appendix 9 Table 13 The WIS 2 0a Test03 data for the used glass which is used for the calculation of the optical data for the pane 4 16Ar LwE6 in WIS Data in WIS 2 0a Test03 Indoor side Outdoor side 4mm clear 04gvb_ 6 mm ip6834nespc Solar transmittance 0 844 0 383 Solar reflectance outdoor 0 075 0 414 Solar reflectance indoor 0 075 0 309 Visual transmittance 0 898 0 748 Visual reflectance outdoor 0 080 0 039 Visual reflectance indoor 0 080 0 050 UV transmittance 0 625 0 045 UV reflectance outdoor 0 069 0 383 UV reflectance indoor 0 069 0 138 ir corrected emissitivities outdoor 0 84 0 025 ir corrected emissitivities indoor 0 84 0 84 Therm condutivity W mK 1 0 1 0 The calculation for the pane is performed according to the No restrictions expert level settings in WIS 2 0a Test03 The glass clear_04gvb is placed on the indoor side which result in a solar energy transmittance of 0 37 for the pane which results in a total solar energy transmittance of 0 30 for the window cf paragraph 12 1 The menu item import add delete copy element cf Figure 53 and the button add is selecte
251. minated by cloudy conditions The total solar load on the building consists of direct diffuse and reflected radiation Movable shading is flexible and dynamic to use and supplies a control options to satisfy the users of the building in concern to the total solar load especially the direct solar radiation This is possible in the blind shutter facility of ESP r Different kinds of shading devices which can be used in the blind shutter facility of ESP r are devices as curtains screens action bar pull downs etc which can be described with the same type of angular dependent data as for a pane cf paragraph 13 7 This is not possible in the blind shutter facility of ESP r It is not possible to define two or more criteria e g a wind velocity below a maximum and maximum solar radiation impinging on the pane which both have to be fulfilled before the shading is activated It is also not possible to perform a step wise shading of the pane The shading is either on or off Hopefully in the future these possibilities will be implemented in the program which will make the modelling of buildings and the study of the solar distribution entering a zone more realistic This is possible in ESP r but has to be modelled in the solar obstruction facility Awnings overhangs Venetian blinds cf Figure 89 and other kind of non transparent obstructions where the use of angle dependent data as described in paragraph 13 7 is not a suitable solution
252. module ESRU Homepage tutorial_ 10 It is possible to undertake an ASHRAE shading calculation for a single window The calculated shading patterns can be analysed graphically and via text feedback The predicted insolation patterns are restricted to tabular text feedback Note The hourly data is only retained for each sun up hour within that day of each month which possesses a solar declination judged to be closest to the average value for the month ESRU Report 2001 Important Prior to undertake a shading analysis the zone geometry and any relevant shading obstructions must have been defined 19 2 1 A description on how to use the ish module The shading and insolation facility can be invoked from the Obstruction menu cf Figure 92 or from the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 When the shading and insolation program have been invoked a zone to be analysed has been chosen and the program asks if the zone name is ok to use for root transitional shading file name shd The Shading and insolation menu is shown in Figure 96 Shading amp insolation a Prob testi cfg Path b Zonet kontor ASHRAE window calc Mercator Sun Path Views sun site plan aoo Calculate shading Edittimporttexport data View shading patterns yo T L A Predict insolation View insolation oa e r Reporting gt gt silent Browse zone surfaces Help Finish ISH Figure 96 The content
253. n a typical office ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 When one of the events in Figure 53 is chosen the profile is displayed in the graphical feedback window and a list of its data is given in the control option menu cf Figure 54 13 6 1 3 Editing profiler The editing of profiles is made in the Profiles editing menu cf Figure 54 by selecting one of the existing profiles in the Profile manger menu in Figure 53 The Profiles editing menu contains the following editing options profile e list current profile and merge current profile into db The profile in Figure 54 is edited by selecting the following menu items in Figure 54 profile Choose this menu item to input a descriptive designation of 40 characters at the maximum of what takes place in the profile E g 70 8 12 30 12 13 and 80 13 17 e The user must activate these menu items to define the load levels for one or more periods Input start and end time for the period and the percentage of the sensible and latent load during the period list current profile The menu item draws up a list in the text feedback window with the input data corresponding to the data in the Profile editing menu for the menu items e to e g i in Figure 54 merge current profile into db The function includes a newly established profile to the relevant database Important Do not forget to choose the menu item merge current profile into db in the Profile ed
254. n and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 148 Lighting analysis and visualization Visualisation scene t ituc_Day_fa purpose Day_fact a scene parameter options b calculate daylight factors c view daylight factor result gt save scene information help return to main menu Figure 118 The calculated daylight factors for the zone kontor_3 44G and the connected Radiance description menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 149 Casual gain control Lighting control 22 Casual gain control Lighting control It is possible to control casual gain for lighting occupants and equipment The control facility in this context is only focused on controlling casual gains for lighting The zone operation facility must have been defined for artificial lighting in order for the casual gain controls to work cf paragraph 16 2 In most non domestic buildings the heat gains from lighting installations occupants equipment and the like can be considerable Of these gain types the lighting systems normally offers the greatest potential for energy savings Imposing control of lighting systems in respect to balance the effect to actual needs in order to satisfy standards as DS700 can result in significant electrical energy reduction Clarke 2001 The possibilities for regulation and control of lig
255. n be changed The appearance of the interface can be altered using the menu item window next to the dialog box refer to Figure 16 for the content of the window option menu in connection with the menu item window is listed in Figure 18 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 35 Interface details of ESP r window options menus tiny t small t medium large text feedback tiny small medium large dialog editing tiny small medium large adjust after resize e e e Figure 18 The possibilities for changing the appearance of the interface ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The appearance of the wireframe model can be changed using the arrows and the image control menu item shown in Figure 19 erev e la zil 4 fel Figure 19 Shortcuts for changing the viewpoint for the wireframe model ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The arrows next to the menu item elev changes the elevation of the wireframe model 10 and the arrows next to the menu item azi is used to change the azimuth of the wireframe model The menu item image control is used to change the appearance of the wireframe model where one can enter the exact number for the appearance cf Figure 20 Hireframe control a eyepoint 52 7 121 5 112 9 b viewpoint 6 5 8 4 1 8 c angle of view 40 0 d Display gt gt perspective e display gt gt surfaces amp obstruct f highlig
256. n control can be found in Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford Clarke J A Janak M 1998 Simulating the Thermal Effect of Daylight controlled Lighting Energy System Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Literature on Radiance Janak M Macdonald I 1999 Current state of the art of integrated thermal and lighting simulation and future issues Slovak Technical University Radlinsk ho 11 813 68 Bratislava Slovakia and Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland 22 1 ESP r lighting control An internal and simpler calculation method of lighting control is initiated if Radiance is not direct coupled with ESP r Figure 119 shows the calculation process of the casual gain control Climate parameters sun position solar irradiance ete M 4 Zone parameters blind Daylight calculation Control position glazing transmittance SaS S La Figure 119 The calculation process for casual gain control At each simulation time step ESP r s luminaire control algorithm initiates the daylight simulation and the task is as follows 1 Both the described climate and the zone parameters are transferred at each time step to the daylight calculation 2 The defined calculation type is used to calculate the illuminance data lux for the defined photocell locations cf paragraph 22 1 4 Investigation and impl
257. n mode cf paragraph 22 2 2 1 Both photocells are place in the middle of the two partitions NE_part and SW_ part The first photocell is placed 1 metre from the external wall NW_ext_wall the second photocell is place 1 metre from the partition SE_part and the are both facing down The menu item composition is selected in the Model Definitions menu cf Figure 65 pp 91 gt casual gain control the zone kontor_3 44G a new casual control option is created and the zone casual gain control file kontor_3 44G cgc is created The control is set to be active only on weekdays via the menu item Wkd Wkend control 2 0 0 and the control period is set from 8 17 via the menu item Control period 8 17 The different data is entered according to Table 25 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 155 Casual gain control Lighting control Table 25 Input data for the lighting control for the two lighting zones Selected menu item cf Figure 120 Data entered Control type Dimming ideal Calculation type Daylight coeff Control data Photocell set point lux 200 Switch off lighting level 1 5 150 Minimum dimming light output 0 0 Minimum electrical dimming light output 0 Switch off delay time 0 Casual gain portion amp No of photocells 1 0 2 Photocell position Photocell No 1 1 22 1 28 15 000 11 Photocell No 2 3 25 0 96 15 0 0 0 1 2
258. nal Report Vols 1 2 and 3 ESRU Homepage tutorial_1 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut sim_res htm ESRU Homepage tutorial_2 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut prod_ model htm pm satr ESRU Homepage tutorial_3 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_ tut high level htm ESRU Homepage tutorial_4 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut history htm ESRU Homepage tutorial_5 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_ tut princ sim htm ESRU Homepage tutotial_6 http www esru strath ac uk Reference concepts thermal comfort htm SET ESRU Homepage tutorial_7 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_ tut esp aps htm ap prj ESRU Homepage tutorial_8 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r tut esp db htm ESRU Homepage tutorial_9 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut interface htm ESRU Homepage tutorial_10 http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_tut esp aps htm ap ish ESRU Homepage glossary http www esru strath ac uk Reference gen_ glossary htm Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 230 References The Hydronic Foundation INC Homepage http www hydronics org hydrohistory htm ESRU Homepage FAQ http www esru strath ac uk Programs ESP r_FAQ htm dimensions U S DOE Homepage U S Department Of Energy Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy EERE http www eere energy gov buildings tools_directory software es
259. nctions which can be linked to building zones An active plant system is governed by one or more control loops and an active mass flow control system is defined by a control function cf Figure 147 Figure 147 Synopsis for a control loop function comprising a sensor a controller and an actuator Clarke J A 2001 All details of building and plant and mass flow controls are kept in the configuration control file ctl The file holds details on all sensor and actuator locations and defines the time dependant operation of the active controllers which link sensor and actuator throughout a simulation Documentation for calculation and a description of the different controls can be found in Clarke J A 2001 Energy Simulation in Building Design 2nd Edition Butterworth Heinemann Oxford Chow T 1995 AIR CONDITIONING PLANT COMPONENT TAXONOMY BY PRIMITIVE PARTS Department of Mechanical Engineering Energy Systems Division University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland Hensen J 1991 On the thermal interaction of building structure and heating and ventilating system Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland MacQueen J 1993 THE MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS Department of Mechanical Engineering Energy Systems Division University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland 30 Tn essence control functions and loops are the same differing only in the types of contr
260. nd period of validity cf Figure 149 is defined with the same data as for control loop 1 The menu items actuator details cf Figure 149 is selected is placed at a node within a plant component the plant component index 9 which is the index for the cooling coil component in the plant amp systems facility and at plant component node 1 because the component cooling coil is a 1 node model The menu item period data cf Figure 149 is selected and the three periods listed cf Figure 160 needs to be edited Control periods function 2 day type 1 number of periods 3 perl startlsensed lactuated control law data no time Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 dry bulb gt flux PID flux control 1 0 5000 0 0 0 15 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 b 2 0 00 dry bulb gt flux period off c 3 0 00 dry bulb gt flux period off add delete a period help exit Figure 160 The content of the Control periods menu for the plant control facility before editing period 1 and deleting period 2 and 3 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 194 Controls The last two periods are deleted since they are not needed and is done via the menu item add delete a period cf Figure 160 delete period and period 3 is selected The procedure is repeated for period 2 The editing of period 1 is performed as for the period data for period 1 in control loop 1 and t
261. nd visualization facility scsscscsscsscsssccsscsssessscsssssssssssssssessssesssssesssssessssssssesesssessses 138 21 1 1 Createvand or edit sc tie details ooroo aeaa lated aara E a a A aia aea aaa aa aana ai aaeain 139 21 1 2 Colour Settin G83 E A E E E E A 142 21 1 3 Calculate View SCene aoon eniirenineciiinii een aa eini a in a eas 144 21 2 Example setup of on internal visualization s seesesseeoeseeseeeoeseseoeseroesoeeeesoesereoeseeoereeeoeseeeeseeeoesoeeeresesereerseeeee 145 21 3 Example daylight factor calculation seseeeeeseesesseoeeseeoesoeseeeoesereoeseeoesoeecesorsereorsereereeecesoeeereeeeesoreereorsereerseeeee 147 22 CASUAL GAIN CONTROL LIGHTING CONTROL ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 150 22 1 ESP r lighting Control scsscssccssecssessssssessssssesssssessesssssssesessessscssensesnsessssssssessnessseeseesscesecssscssensesnseessoes 151 22 1 1 Casual gain type and control period 22 cccevsecseed ine o E E E E A ON EN eee 152 22 1 2 Lightme ZoNe S o E A E O A E A E E A E O a 153 22 1 3 ComtrOl ty o eg E EE EE E E E E EEA A E E E ES 153 22 1 4 Calculation a 1A E E E ae ee E E nie adthleaes 154 22 1 5 Control alsonthimidata sannana a hove a a GG E aa a aaea an 154 22 1 6 Photoc lldata asn sista tein sh toa estes a eae a a a E AE a a E 155 22 1 7 Example defining casual gain control for lighting ccc ceceesecssecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseenseenseenseeseeeeeenees 155 22 2 Advanced int
262. new surface is set to SE_door and the composition is set to Int _door Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 100 Definition of zones The zone where the defined windows and door is added is illustrated in Figure 74 Figure 74 The zone kontor_3 44G displaying the defined windows and door but without obstructions ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The surface attributes listed under the menu item surface attributes in the Zone Composition menu cf Figure 68 looks like Table 17 when two panes a frame and a door is added Table 17 The modified surface attributes after adding two panes a frame and a door The facing of the inserted surface is automatically set to the similar facing boundary conditions as the surface that the new surface was inserted to Name Composition Facing boundary conditions SW _part G26150G26 Similar SE part G26I50G26 Similar NE part G26150G26 Similar NW ext_wall 1125C80 Exterior Ceiling Lin2C340 Similar Floor Lin2C340 Similar SE_door Int door Similar NW_ frame Frame Alu W Exterior NW_win low 4 16Ar LWE6 Exterior NW win up 4 16Ar LwE6c Exterior 14 3 Defining thermal bridges and linear thermal transmittance Thermal bridges and linear thermal transmittances are not included in the definition of constructions and connections They must be represented as a separate surface or they must be included in the U value fo
263. ngel 0 015 0 016 refrac abs 0 abs 80 of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 0 017 0 017 0 016 The refraction index is typically 1 52 for glass and 1 00 for gasses The values of absorptance for the gasses are normally set 0 001 at all angle of incidence Type org_IT_Uni descripion For use in the IT Uni in Copenhage Optical Property Set a type t org_IT_Uni b descrip For use in the IT Uni in Copen Visible trn c visible transmittance 0 67 1 0 a Direct trn d solar abs amp refl for docu 0 33 0 33 Reflection e U value for docu 1 09 Absorb Odeg 40deg 55deg 7Odeg 80deqg f direc trn 0 340 0 320 0 290 0 210 0 100 reflect 0 334 0 333 0 342 0 402 0 513 g heat gain doc 0 37 0 37 0 33 0 24 0 14 layers refrac abs 0 abs 40 abs 55 G70 G80 h 1 520 0 310 0 330 0 350 0 370 0 370 i 1 000 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 i 1 520 0 015 0 016 0 017 0 017 0 016 o Smeg lt 1 add delete copy layer help exit this menu 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 8 90 Degrees from normal Figure 58 The Optical data inserted into ESP r for the pane used in the ITUC building ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 82 Databases 13 7 3 2 2 Example deleting a pane If a pane needs to be deleted in the optical properties database the menu item import add delete copy element cf Figure 58 d
264. nish Technological Institute and Niras A S are among the most experienced users The program is used for a wide range of projects as energy simulation indoor Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 15 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 climate outdoor environmental performance commercial buildings residential buildings visualisation complex buildings and systems ESP r is compatible with AutoCAD v 14 which can be used to create a building representation of random complexity Models can be coupled with Radiance for calculation of daylight coefficients direct simulation runtime coupling and for daylight visualisation studies Strengths ESP r can be used for all kinds of modelling and analyses including double skin facades daylight utilisation by coupling ESP r and Radiance natural ventilation combined heat and electrical power generation photovoltaic facades CFD calculation and detailed control systems Gives detailed results on the building model including detailed results for plant systems and fluid flow networks if defined The program is well documented and users can develop include source code for the program Weaknesses Specialist features require knowledge of the particular subject as i e controls electrical powers and plant systems The graphical interface is not very user friendly and requires repeatedly menu selections The program does not have a detailed step by
265. ns kontor_3 44G gt external_NW via window_low and exit The graph illustrating both the zone node temperature and the volume flow rate via the lower part of the window is listed in Figure 188 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 217 Result analysis Lib ituc nrl Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun O00h59 tot Mon 16 Jun 23h59 Year 2003 sim 1m output 1m 1 Flow kgs 4e 08 0 005 0 01 20 0 0 02 0 02 0 03 0 03 0 04 0 04 0 05 0 05 5 0 0 06 0 06 0 06 0 0 0 07 0 24 43 72 36 120 144 168 192 Time Hrs kontor gt extern m 3 s 25 0 15 0 ontor_3 44G db T Cadi r E E 10 0 DO M Figure 188 The content of the Network air wtr flow facility and the illustration of the zone node dry bulb temperature kontor_3 44G db T C and the volume flow m s rate from the zone node kontor_3 44G to the outside via the lower part of the window kontor gt entern m s ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 As can be seen from Figure 188 that the zone node temperature varies a few degrees during and outside office hours There are a few reasons for the variation the opening of windows the throttling range of two degrees for heating and cooling the variation in incident radiation and ambient temperature What is also noticeable from Figure 188 is that the window only opens when the zone node temperature rises above 23 C during office hours 0800
266. ns cf Figure 135 is used for linkage between the plant components and are set up in terms of a receiving and sending node for the direction of the fluid Only nodes representing the same fluid can be inter connected The receiving node can be connected to 1 A component not participating in the configuration but which is identical to the receiving node in terms of temperature and humidity 2 A component not participating in the configuration but whose conditions are known and constant in terms of temperature and humidity 3 Another participating component 4 A building zone node 5 An outdoor air node ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 176 Networks A connection is also defined with a mass diversion ratio MDR represented as a fraction 0 1 The MDR is the amount of fluid coming from the sending component that reaches the receiving component Hensen 1991 This can be used for several purposes 1 Specify leakages e g if 10 of the air is lost between the sending and receiving component MDR is 0 90 2 Specify flow splitting e g if a fan supplies four identical ducts MDR is 0 25 between each duct and the fan 3 The flow rates calculated using MDR is not used if the plant network is linked to a flow network The calculated flows within the flow network will be used When a component receives air from the outside the inlet flow
267. nu Figure 170 A part of the content listed in the Model Definition menu where simulations and result analysis can be initiated ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Simulation controller a simulation presets gt gt none integrated simulation fluid flow stand alone visual impact integrated performance view to 3 U0 help exit this menu J Figure 171 The content of the Simulation controller menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item simulation presets cf Figure 171 can be used to pre define simulations in regard to time steps start and finish dates start up periods names of results files and etc The most important menu items of the Simulation controller menu cf Figure 172 are the menu item simulation presets where up to four pre defined simulation sets can be defined starting and ending dates which defines the simulation period menu items zone result flow results and plant results files which are important to check if the right ones are used in case of multiple definitions and the menu item result save level where five save levels are available Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 201 Simulation e Save level 0 saves and creates only a summary report on maximum and minimum zone temperatures maximum heating and cooling requirement Save level 1 saves only zone temperatures and plant injections Save level 2 adds surface tem
268. o add zones and how to solve the messages problem edges A zone PE is added to the existing zone kontor_3 44G via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 66 pp 92 the button Project Manager in the dialog box gt geometry amp attribution add delete copy merge and the button add zone in the dialog box is selected The new zone is created via dimension input and the button create via dimension input is selected in the dialog box the zone is named PE the description is accepted and the enclosure is constructed via an extruded rectangle The origin x y Z 1s set to 4 007 0 635 11 73 metres the width dept and height x y z is set to 2 2 2 5 metres the box orientation is set to 9 and the control file ctl ituc ctl is overwritten Before attributing any surfaces in the new zone PE the surface Surf 4 need to be deleted in the new zone and the surface SE_part in the zone kontor_3 44G needs to be divided up to match the area and placement of the vertices of the deleted surface Surf 4 in the zone PE 14 4 3 1 Inserting a surface in the partition SE_part in the zone kontor_3 44G A surface is inserted in the existing surface SE_part via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 66 pp 92 the button Project Manager in the dialog box gt geometry amp attribution for the zone kontor_3 44G The menu item surface list amp edges is the selecte
269. o on a message likes No of warnings 5 can appear and the warnings can be listed if another simulation is performed and the menu item reporting level is set to detailed cf Figure 173 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 203 Simulation e The menu item Reporting cf Figure 173 The reporting level screen feedback can be set to silent lists percent completed and expected ending time summary lists Sumerian of what is simulated the same as in silent level or detailed lists in details of what is simulated the same as in silent and a report on the warnings feedback as the model is read in and the simulation progresses The simulation is initiated via the menu item Initiate simulation cf Figure 173 and the following data has to be entered e The zone result library name res has to be entered which will contain one or more simulation result sets for the zone s The file is normally placed in the model configuration folder cfg e Ifamass flow network is defined then a mass flow result library name nrl has to be entered which will contain the results for the mass flows in building model The file is normally placed in the model configuration folder cfg e If plant amp systems is defined then a plant result library name prl has to be entered which will contain the performance for the plant amp system in building model The file is normally placed in the model c
270. ocedure described in point 2 3 and 4 was repeated The information obtained from this procedure is used in writing the context of this thesis and in describing the included examples As a part of the validation of the different facilities in ESP r it was necessary to be critical towards the output and by being critical errors in the building model can be found Being critical can also result in locating errors within the program which in this work resulted in the location of two errors one regarding the included Perez sky distribution model and one regarding the use of daylight coefficients for control of artificial lighting The error in the Perez sky distribution model resulted in up to 13 difference for the solar radiation impinging on a surface calculated in ESP r and the Perez sky distribution model for the east fagade calculated in MatLab The error in the use of daylight coefficients in artificial lighting control resulted in negative casual gain to the modelled zone When errors are found within the program a report should be send to ESRU at the University of Strathclyde which was done for the two above mentioned errors Examples on constructing a building model representing a one person office in the IT University of Copenhagen ITUC is included in the manual to illustrate how the different facilities within the program work This will with no doubt help readers appreciate the program and optimise the use Investigation and implemen
271. ockwise from the X axis using the menu item rotate transfrm obstructions in Figure 92 The co ordinates for the four bottom corners of an obstruction block are shown in Figure 93 and given here Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 122 Shading and insolation e Front left Block origin eFrontright Right side along the X axis e Back right Side diagonal from block origin e Back left Side diagonal from front right ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Building origin Figure 93 An illustration of the co ordinates for the obstruction blocks which is needed in defining these As described in paragraph 18 the wall itself does not attribute to the shading of a window when placed back in the wall and therefore obstruction blocks as window reveals are needed The placements of window reveals are easily set up via the menu item create window reveals in Figure 92 The user can directly access the ish module from the Obstruction menu via the menu item shading amp insolation in Figure 92 or via the menu item shading amp insolation in the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 A description of the facility is found in paragraph 19 2 19 1 1 Example creating an obstruction block and a window reveal Creating obstruction block is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial for the ITUC building As seen from the drawings of the ITUC building displayed in paragraph 12 t
272. oeeee 109 16 ZONE OPERATIONS ciiccscssesecescsccasescsvsasescaucsanscassasvesavissescacsasvsaisitsevencssteveiniaseicaeee 110 16 1 Infiltration and ventilation in the preliminary design stage scssccssccssssscessssssscssssscssessesesesssesseessees 111 16 2 CASuall ET i EAA ONE EA EEE ON A TE NEN AE A E A AE ss 111 16 3 Example Adding air flow and casual gains to a ZOMEC se ssessoesooesooeseossesssessoessoesooesooesosesesssossesseessosesoeesosse 112 16 3 1 AOW Sion et a ea E E e a EN teagan Babe N E E A i 112 16 3 2 C s al gains sonene a Be a a E a E a a a E E E hee 112 17 ZONE TOPOLOGY i e eaaa e a a e aa a e a aa ae aa K aaa a e Ea a aaiae 115 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r vi Table of Contents 17 1 Example updating the Zone topology sssccsscssscssscsssssscssscesesssessssesesssssessssssesssesssesssesssssesssnsesnsesssees 116 18 BLINDS AND SHUT TERS ovcszasscncicacssscidenscesicanacscadesadeiedanscnsadasideeicnnscnaadessisaeeenacnns 117 18 1 Example defining a blind shutter control scssccssccssessssssccssessseesssssssssssesscsssessessessensecnsesssessssnsesesees 119 19 SHADING AND INSOLATION 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 121 19 1 Solar ODStructiONS cscsssccssecsesssessssssscssssssscssssesssssssssssesnsessssesssessnessnsesesssssseesssssssesseeseesssessecsscnsesnsesssees 121 19 1 1 Exam
273. of the window but with the opposite sign 4 3 1 4 The principles of constructing double skin facades Double skin facades are built up of two adjacent zones one representing the building zone and one representing the volume of air between the two panes Panes from the optical property database can be selected for the exterior construction and the partition between the two zones Air flows can be defined between the two zones and to the outside by defining a number of zone nodes in the two zones and an ambient node A constant air flow component or other types of floe components can be defined as openings and controlled in the ventilation and hydronic control facility Modelling a blind shutter control for the air gap of a double skin facade has limitations No blind shutter control exists in ESP r to change the optical properties for the internal pane in a double skin facade The outer pane must therefore contain the blind shutter control The limitations in the blind shutter control will result in a temperature change of the air gap in a double skin fa ade when the blind shutter is activated compared to if the blind shutter acts on the inner glazing since a limit amount of solar radiation will enter Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 24 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 4 3 1 5 The principles of constructing floor heating Floor heating is modelled differently for the followin
274. ol laws used to link the sensor and actuator Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 185 Controls ESRU Report 2001 Data Model Summary ESP r Version 9 Series Energy System Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland 24 1 Control systems The description included in this paragraph is based on a lecture given at ESRU during the basic ESP r course Control capabilities for heating cooling plant ventilation and hydronic systems can be defined for one or more zones under Controls included in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 148 Controls___ 0 included j zones k plant amp systems l1 venthydronic m global system Figure 148 The control content listed in the Model Definition menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The control day types have to be set when creating the first control system More day types can be added later on if necessary The control day types can be set to weekday Saturday Sunday one day or an amount of unspecified days e g if a weekday Saturday Sunday control type is chosen then weekday is equal to day type 1 Saturday equal to day type 2 and type 3 Control day types allow different control patters on different days The periods for each day type must also be defined when creating a control system A day type can comprise one period if the defined control is the same for the whole day type and must comprise a
275. olation data is presented for each transparent multilayer construction as a percentage of the insolation striking the involved inside facing surface for each sun up hour The second option in the viewing facility is used to list a shading synopsis containing information on how many percent of the total analysed surfaces is shaded 0 no shading to 100 fully shaded The shading pattern in this tabular mode is given as a percentage of the shaded area for each sun up hour for the day judged to be closest to the average value for the month 19 2 1 3 The insolation facility This paragraph deals with the prediction and viewing facility of analysing insolation within ESP r and the items described is menu item i and j in Figure 96 The edit import export data facility cf paragraph 19 2 1 2 has not yet been included in the insolation facility The insolation analysis tracks direct solar radiation entering a zone its distribution and take the shading of the external face of the pane into account ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 128 Shading and insolation e The menu item Predict insolation cf Figure 96 can be applied for all applicable surfaces and for a manual surface selection The prediction of insolation only takes the radiation entering from all outside facing transparent surfaces into account ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The insolation can be
276. ols Controls a control focus gt gt vent hydronic b description Heating during the heating c description no descrip loops aps cntll sensor lactuator day Ivalid Iperiod loop location location typelduringlin day 1 4 0 0 4 0 Owkd 1365 3 Sat 1365 1 Sun 1365 1 gt oO wo add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 164 The content for vent hydronic Controls menu after the control loop and the three day types have been added ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The three day types are defined for daily night cool and weekend control of the indoor temperature via the component Window_low Menu item e cf Figure 164 is selected for defining the sensor details actuator details period of validity and period data cf Figure 149 The following procedure is used for defining both the sensor and actuator details for the window control the menu item sensor details is selected in the Editing option menu cf Figure 149 gt senses temperature in a specific zone kontor_3 44G zone air point actuates through a single flow connection and the connection is defined from the office zone kontor_3 44G to the external node external_NW via component Window_low The definition of the sensor facility includes the definition of the actuator which does not need to be selected for definition The menu item period
277. on column four represents wind velocity column five represents wind direction and column six represents ambient relative humidity 13 8 1 Example adding 5 minutes data for the Danish Design Reference Year The entrance to the temporal definitions database is selected in the Databases menu cf Figure 35 A new database is created by selecting the button create edit db in the dialog box and the database is named dk_dry_5min tdf The temporal definitions database will start up in a separate window The menu item period cf Figure 60 is set to 1 Jan to 31 Dec 2000 and the time step per hour cf Figure 60 is set according to 5 minutes time step to 12 time steps per hour These two parameters are very important since it is only possible to simulate the model for the period and frequency that temporal data exists A new database item is added to the temporal definitions database by selecting the menu item add delete copy database entry cf Figure 60 and Climate data ALLCLMT The climate database dk_dry_5min containing the needed data is placed by the user in the folder nhome Per projekter ituc dbs and this database is imported by selecting the menu item Undefined Site climate cf Figure 61 Import export data cf Figure 62 import data gt and start time zero which opens the Import specs menu cf Figure 63 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 87 Dat
278. on data from the material database and the optical database cf paragraph 1 1 1 and paragraph 13 7 respectively There are two different types of constructions symmetrical and asymmetrical building units An asymmetrically building unit has a different order of materials depending on from what side the building unit is looked at cf Figure 47 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 65 Databases Construction editing a Construction Br391I150C150 b General typet Opaque c Optical properties OPAQUE No of layerst 3 0 4100m thick d Linked witht Layer PrimlThickl Description Idb m of material i 1 4 0 110 Outer leaf brick 2 211 0 150 Glasswool 3 32 0 150 Heavy mix concrete Standard U valuet 0 24 xe Ge add or delete a layer help exit this menu Figure 47 The composition of an asymmetrically construction in the construction database multicon db1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 If an asymmetrically construction is to be used as a partition wall it is necessary to make an inverted version of it and link it with the original construction The designation of the inverted building construction must differ a little from the original e g intern_wall intern_w_in The making of an inverted construction will be treated in paragraph 13 4 2 1 4 13 4 2 1 Example Editing the construction database 13 4 2 1 1 Establish a new construction database The construction d
279. on facility is found via the menu item composition in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 66 pp 91 geometry amp attribution choose hereafter the actual zone the menu item solar obstruction cf Figure 91 and the solar Obstruction menu is displayed as in Figure 92 Obstructions a Surface X amp Z grid 15 15 No obstr blocks 1 Blk description amp compos 1 First NONE add delete copy obstruction rotate transfrm obstructions create window reveal shading amp insolation help exit this menu M Iov mH 2 Figure 92 The content of the Obstruction menu where solar obstruction can be defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 In order to determine the shading distribution a grid is superimposed on each surface that may be between 4 and 20 points in each direction The grid resolution is set in the menu item Surface X amp Z grid cf Figure 92 The obstruction composition is by default set to none cf menu item e in Figure 92 but can be set to any opaque multilayer construction for use in visualization studies An obstruction block can be edited or added via selecting an existing block or choosing the menu item add delete copy obstruction in Figure 92 The width of the obstruction block assuming there is no rotation is its distance along the X axis the depth is its distance along the Y axis and the height is its distance along the Z axis The block can be rotated with an angle measured anticl
280. on is the image width in pixels Large numbers requires longer calculation time Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 e Include penumbras soft shadows can be set to true if soft shadows are to be included Requires longer calculation time Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 e Track progress 1 min The computation time can be short or long depending on how many parameters are included in the model as model complexibility grid numbers image quality etc A percent completion report of the calculation process can be initialised Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 144 Lighting analysis and visualization e Zone interior is the coordinates describing the dimension of the included zone s Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 e Ambient A file name may be entered for a file representing temporary information on ambient light systems when a number of viewpoints are to be generated of the same scene Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 A Warning Remember to update the RIF file in order for changes to take affect The update is issued using the menu item save RIF file in the dialog box in the exiting procedure The menu items render the scene calculate daylight factors calculate daylight coeffs calculate sensor illum in Figure 114 This menu function is named differently according to the type of calculation or visualization initiated When Radiance is started it uses
281. on system with heat recovery added in the following sub paragraphs As seen from Figure 136 the extract duct from the office zone is split into three separate ducts This is done to carry out a realistic coupling between the ventilation system and the defined fluid flow network The coupling is performed in paragraph 23 2 2 8 4 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 178 Networks The component used to represent the air handling unit with heat recovery is the VEX 140 unit and the component used to represent the cooling unit is the component CU 140 both from EXHAUSTO The circular duct used is the product LindabSafe from Lindab cf appendix 14 15 and 8 for product information The menu item plant amp systems is selected from the Model Definition menu cf Figure 122 A new plant network model and a new plant network file nets ituc pIn is created The plant network is defined using menu interface and the standard plant component database usr esru esp r databases plantc db1 is used to construct the mechanical ventilation system The preliminary steps lead to the Network definition edit menu cf Figure 137 where the different component connections containments data and linkage to the fluid flow network is created cf Figure 137 Network definitiontedit a Problem name nets ituc pln b Simulation type Energy two phase c Project title No of componen
282. onent is based on Bernoulli s equation for one dimensional steady state flow of an incompressible Newtonian fluid including a loss term Hensen 1991 23 2 Modelling of networks in ESP r Modelling of networks in ESP r includes one or all of the following possibilities plant amp systems ventilations and hydronics and electrical systems The latter will not be included in this thesis 23 2 1 The ventilation and hydronic fluid flow network In the early design stages modelling of air movements are represented by air change per hour for infiltration air from the outside and ventilation air change between zones defined in the operation menu cf paragraph 16 The air movements and air change rates imposed on the building model makes the study of the effect of real air movements impossible The ventilation and hydronic facility involves an advanced treatment of dynamic predictions of mass flows within a network comprising of nodes and flow component acting upon external pressure distributions stack effect and buoyancy ESRU s Homepage tutorial_1 In this mode the user can describe the path for mass flows through components such as doors openings fans valves and etc The latter two modifies the flow and asks the system to predict dynamic flows ESRU s Homepage tutorial_1 The file containing information on the mass flow network is afn The ventilation and hydronic facility can be assed via the menu item vent hydroni
283. onents in total representing a wide range of the components on the market ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 13 6 The event profiles database The event profiles database makes use of the event profiles management module pro The module contains a number of standard specific profiles defining the time dependent variation in the work level the lighting level and the use of different electrical appliances computers coffee makers radios etc in a given zone These profiles can be activated from the Project Manager when defining casual gains The database that comes with the program profiles db1 contains 13 profiles describing the time variation of the heat and moisture supply to a topical zone The database is typically applied for describing the same load pattern but of different magnitude taking place in several zones There are certain demands on the profiles in the database Each profile must contain the following data e Start and end time e Sensible and latent loads The loads refer to the heat and moisture loads defined in the operation facility cf paragraph 16 within the given space of time E g the heat supply can be defined in the Project Manager in a zone as 100 W for a computer and if the percentage is defined as 50 between 1200 and 1300 then the load supplied to the room during this period will be 50 W 13 6 1 Example Editing in the event profiles database The event profiles database is entered by selecting
284. onents used Window_up fan duct_1 duct_2 duct_3 duct_4 duct_5 duct_6 and duct_7 are added via the same procedure and the data used is listed in appendix 13 The ducts are used to represent the air flow through the ducts heating coil cooling coil and heat exchanger defined in the plant amp systems menu cf paragraph 23 2 2 8 1 23 2 1 5 3 Adding connections Connections are added via the menu item connections in the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 129 Several connections as a connection between the internal zone node kontor_3 44G and the boundary node external_NW via the component Window_low has to be added This connection is constructed by selecting the menu item connections in the Fluid Flow Network menu gt no to auto generate flow connection the menu item add delete copy cf Figure 134 and add Connections Node ve IdHght tol Node ve IdHght Ivia Component add delete copy Help Exit Figure 134 The content of the Connections menu where connections can be added deleted or copied ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The node on the positive side of the connection ve is set to kontor_3 44G and the node on the negative side of the connection ve is set to node external_NW The height of the ve linkage point relative to the node kontor_3 44G is set to 0 93 m cf formula 4 and the height of the ve linkage point relative to the node external_NW is set to 0 93 m cf formula 5
285. onfiguration folder cfg e The simulation period is entered as start day and month and end day and month e Zone side time step hour 1 hour is normally sufficient although smaller time step may be required for control regimes to permit frequent control decision point e If plant amp systems is defined then the plant side time step building time step is required The plant side equation will be established and solved this many times per zone hour A 1 hour is usually sufficient although smaller time step may be required for control regimes to permit frequent control decision point e If zone side time step hour is larger than one then hourly result integration can be performed The default action is to transfer each computational time step to the result database This option allows averaging the results over one hour If some or one of the above described parameters were wrongly entered they can be changed in the next menu by selecting either the menu item Specify result db or the menu item Specify simulation period cf Figure 174 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 204 Simulation SIMUL a Specify results db b Specify simulation period Save gt gt 4 2 energy balne FH Hee eee eee ererer m Monitor state variables t Invoke time step controller s Invoke simulation lt Delete last result set g Simulation toggles i Info on current parameters o View data from 0
286. ontrol data help exit this menu Figure 156 The content for plant amp systems Controls menu after a control loop with three day types have been added ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 191 Controls The three day types are defined for all year ventilation control including night and weekend ventilation control with a lower set point for the injection temperature This is not included in the same way in the Bsim2000 tutorial were ventilation is only defined during weekdays from 0800 to 1700 but is possible to define in Bsim2002 Menu item e in Figure 156 is selected for defining the sensor details actuator details period of validity and period data cf Figure 149 The menu item sensor is selected in the Editing option menu cf Figure 149 for definition and the sensor is set to senses temperature in a specific zone in the zone kontor_3 44G ata zone ait point The menu item actuator details is thereafter selected in the Editing option menu cf Figure 149 actuates from a node within a plant component with the plant component index 4 which is the heating coil component and plant component node 1 because the heating coil component is a 1 node model The menu item period of validity in the Editing options menu cf Figure 149 is thereafter selected in the Editing option menu and the period 1
287. ontroller type determines the input and output of the controller e g sensing dry bulb temperature and actuating flux The control law is the algorithm which dictates the behaviour of the controller e g ideal control PID control etc The controller requires data such as plant capacity set point etc cf Figure 151 Set point C Controller Output flux W Signal C Output flux f Set point Signal f Set point Signal Figure 151 Synopsis of the controller comprising input and output Timing of control action is defined by four components Day types number of control day types Period of validity period during which a control set up is active Period during the day number of distinct control periods during a day Start time Start time of the control periods which stops when the next period starts As with sensors actuator cf Figure 147 and Figure 150 can be placed anywhere in a model zone air point or within a construction HVAC components flow components and electrical components There are many types of actuators which all perform a context specific function heating cooling 31 A three term controller having proportional action integral action and derivative action Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 187 Controls flux flow on off signal etc For zone control actuators are usually placed at the air point for convective heating or as a mixt
288. oof_1 Exit and yes is replied to confirm to delete the construction copy With the button copy an already existing construction can be copied and edited The procedure for copying roof_2 cf Figure 46 to select the menu item add delete copy invert cf Figure 46 copy roof_2 Exit and change the designation and the new roof_2 s data can be changed to the relevant data for the new building unit End the copying by using the menu item exit this menu copy amp invert The button is only relevant to partition cf paragraph 13 4 2 The procedure to invert the composition Lin2C340 is to select the menu item add delete copy invert in Figure 46 copy amp invert gt Lin2C340 Exit and make a minor change to the designation and end with the menu item exit this menu 13 5 The plant components database The component database for plants makes use of the plant components database management module pdb The different plant components can be compiled in the Plant amp Systems facility cf paragraph 23 2 2 to represent a complete plant in simulations for single zone or multi zone buildings The plants can also be simulated as a separate unity The plant component database delivered with the program is plantc db1 New elements can be added to the list either manually in the program or via import from an ASCII file Existing components can be deleted edited or written out to an ASCII file or to the screen Each
289. ors facility is displayed cf Figure 87 1 The offset temperature and offset radiantion is that the environment in the adjacent zone is similar to the actual zone but the temperature and radiantion can be set to differ some degrees offset temperature or watts per square metres offset radiation Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 115 Zone topology Topology a problem definition b set vertex tolerance confirm if already marked identical No marked constant No marked partition Yes marked ground No marked adiabatic No marked BASESIMNP No if no match found Yes ye TO MM AO edit individual connections clear some all contiguity check via vertex contiguity v T A s reporting gt gt silent list connections help exit program Figure 87 The Topology menu where the building model is glued together and boundary conditions can be associated to different surfaces ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 17 1 Example updating the zone topology The procedure for the automatic connection creation is to select the menu item connections amp anchors in the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 topology tool check via vertex contiguity cf Figure 87 the file ituc cnn is accepted and the zone kontor_3 44G is selected The constructions of the boundary type Similar are automatically updated and the boundary condition exter
290. p r htm Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 http radsite lbl gov radiance framer html Radiance manual pages pp 150 152 http radsite Ibl gov radiance framer html Cardiff University home page http www squ1 com phorum read php f 10 amp i 19 amp t 17 reply 19 Stanford University home page http www graphics stanford edu gamma corrected gamma html Canadian institute for climate studies home page http www cics uvic ca severity intro htm Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 231
291. parameter in such projects Parameters as temperature temperature difference solar irradiation and air flow have a great influence on the energy consumption and the indoor thermal environment The Danish building simulation program package Bsim2002 does not in the present version contain all the needed facilities in order to calculate detailed on parameters as air flow and irradiance The user of Bsim must therefore use several programs to cope with these topics It can therefore be useful to look for other programs that offer these facilities if they are important in a project The transient energy simulation program ESP r ESP r is an abbreviation of Environmental Systems Performance and r for research can calculate in details on a variety of topics and among other things the above mentioned parameters during designing a building Only very few Danish consultants use the program which was developed and continuously improved at the University of Strathclyde in Glasgow Scotland The University of Strathclyde has not published a detailed manual describing the use of the program since the focus has been on developing it and make sure that correct and detailed calculation methods are used At present time the only available literature documenting the program is a manual some general literature and Ph D theses Occasionally courses on the use the program are held The purpose of the existing manual for ESP r ESRU Manual 2002 is to introd
292. pdate control data help exit this menu Figure 162 The content of the Controls menu for the plant amp system facility after the control configuration has finished ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 195 Controls The facility can hereafter be updated via the menu item update control data and exited via the menu item exit this menu in Figure 162 24 1 3 Modelling of vent hydronic control Prior to using this facility to control infiltration ventilation and hydronics the network must be defined as described in paragraph 23 2 1 The control scheme acts upon the connections defined in the vent hydronic network facility cf Figure 122 The content of this facility is similar to the data described in paragraph 24 1 24 1 3 1 Example Defining on off control for natural ventilation through a window If the internal temperature is above the outdoor temperature then natural ventilation through windows is an effective way to reduce the internal temperature Another perspective is that open windows natural ventilation can take part in the night and weekend cooling aspect of the heat absorbing materials within constructions in the defined zones That is why window control is added during weekdays and weekends This differs from the Bsim2000 tutorial concerning venting in the ITUC building where the venting is active from 0800 to 1700 during week
293. pecially ESP r 189 Controls Period 1 is selected Flux connection between zone amp plant is the relevant control law the period start time is set to midnight 0 the number of misc data items is set to 7 because an extract component is defined in the mechanical ventilation system the supply component index is set to 1 which is the index for the component duct_1 in the Components menu in the plant amp system facility the node within the supply component is set to 1 because the duct is a one node model the flux coupling calculation index is set to 1 which is the m C 8 W calculation gt the maximum heating flux W is set to 14700 cf appendix 14 and the maximum cooling flux W is set to 12600 cf appendix 15 the extract component is set to component number 2 which is the index for the component duct_2 in the Components menu in the plant amp system facility gt and the node within the extract component is set to 1 because the duct is a one node model Figure 154 show the Control periods menu for the zones control facility after the editing of period 1 is performed Control periods function 1 day type 1 number of periods 1 perlstartlsensed lactuated control law data no ltime Ipropertylproperty a 1 0 00 db temp gt flux flux zone plant 1 0 1 0 1 0 14700 0 12600 0 2 0 add delete a period help exit Figure 154 The content of the Control perio
294. perature and solar radiation to save level 1 Save level 3 adds node within constructions temperature to level 2 Save level 4 adds surface energy balance data to level 2 Simulation controller a simulation presets 1 of 1 b set namet year c startup days 43 d bldg timesteps hr 30 e plnt timesteps hr 10 f result save level 4 g starting 9 6 ending 15 6 h zone results ituc res i flow results ituc nrl j plant results ituc prl PY results N A moist results N A ipy season report N A ipv anual report N A o save or dereference parameters integrated simulation fluid flow stand alone visual impact integrated performance view help exit this menu Figure 172 The different possibilities in regard to the simulation presets menu item where different parameters can be pre defined for simulation ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item integrated simulation cf Figure 172 invokes a combined building plant network model simulation which includes heat fluid electrical power and light flows The two following simulation interaction options exists when the content of the menu item simulation presets in Figure 172 has been defined run interactively and silent running mode The first option run interactively ask the user for all needed information in a simulation and the user can define different variables to be monitored in a simulation and other default simulation setting can be altered cf paragraph 25 1 The
295. period ends and the new period starts The set point temperature defines in this case for direct injection when the zone node temperature rises above the set point and the action entered is performed the window is opened How much the window is opened the area is defined in the vent hydronic network for the actual window component Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 200 Simulation 25 Simulation A simple or complex model constructed in ESP r consisting of air flow network and or coupled transient CFD electrical power plant system components indoor air quality lighting assessments via Radiance and etc can be simulated via the bps module Building air flow and system simulations can be undertaken at frequencies from fractions of a second to an hour Simulation with a database defined in the temporal definitions database can only be simulated at time steps defined in that database A short time step equals a long simulation time and requires more available disk space The same is valid for the complexity of a model a complex model in coupling with Radiance takes longer to simulate than a simple model The simulation facility is located under the menu item simulation in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 170 and the content of the simulation menu is visualised in Figure 171 Actions o simulation p results analysis q reporting save model help exit this me
296. plant component database and provides browsing editing and file generation during plant network definition 9 7 The Construction Data Management Module The Construction Data Management Module manages the primitive and composite constructions databases The materials used in composite constructions are held in the materials database The two databases work interactively together and the thermophysical properties required defining a material and thereby the composite constructions are conductivity density specific heat solar absorptivity emissivity and diffusion resistance factors for a number of standard homogeneous elements Thermal bridging is not included in constructions The material and construction database can be accessed from the Project Manager during modelling 9 8 The Event Profiles Database Management Module The Event Profiles Database Management Module pro manages a number of profiles which define the time dependent variations in zone occupancy lighting and miscellaneous appliance usage These profiles can then be accessed by the Project Manager to define a profile containing the behaviour for different operations 9 9 The temporal definition module The Temporal Definition Module tdf manages the description of schedules and time dependant data required for combined heat and mass transfer simulation ESRU Homepage tutorial_ 7 9 10 The Tutorial Module The Tutorial Module is linked to the online tutorial held as p
297. ple creating an obstruction block and a window reveal cceeceseesceeeeceseeeeesecseeseenaeeeeeaeeaeeneens 123 19 1 1 1 Creating obstruction blocks defining an internal Window Sill ecceeseeseeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneenseenees 124 19 1 1 2 Creating a window reveal in connection to the frame cesecesecseesseeeceeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeaees 124 19 2 Shading and insolation analysis ssccsscssscssscsssssssesscssscssessseesessssnessssssesssssssesssssseesssnsesnsesesensesnsssnseessees 125 19 2 1 A description on how to use the ish module ccccecccsseesseescesseeescesecesecesecaeceaecaeeseceneeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeenaes 126 19 2 1 1 The different analyses techmiques sise pra e aN nE e T Ea 127 19 242 The shading facility r a r a a aha eek Aedes 127 19241 3 Thewnsolat onfacility r r a a a a aT E ESEE SEKAS inant NEESS 128 19 2 2 Example Calculating shading and insolation ccesccesccsseeseceseceeeseeeneeeseeeeeeeeceseeeseeeseenseesseenseenaeeaees 130 20 VIEW FACTORS AND MEAN RADIANT TEMPERATURE SENSORG 131 20 1 The view factors and MRT sensors facility sssccsssscsscssssesccecsccsescesssssssccesssssscccesssssssseessssescccssseeseoeses 132 20 2 Example adding two MRT sensors and calculating MRT sensor View factOF csccssssessscsrsesseees 135 21 LIGHTING ANALYSIS AND VISUALIZATION ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 138 21 1 ESP r lighting a
298. port data cf Figure 96 option allows hourly data to be edited exported to a text file or imported from a text file with similarly text format e Finally the calculated shading pattern can be viewed graphically or via a list with the menu item View shading patterns cf Figure 96 o The graphical mode the button Draw surf shading in the dialog box illustrates the sun up hours for the day judged to be closest to the average value for the month cf Figure 98 A day can be analysed for consecutive sun up hours or for a specific hour during that day Shading patterns Jul at hour 13 for surface 9 NW_win_low 0 0 T T T T T T T T T 0 00 0 20 0 40 0 60 0 80 1 00 1 20 1 40 1 60 1 80 X axis gt Figure 98 A graphically illustration of the shading pattern on the outside facing window NW_win_low at 1300 for a day in July judged to be closest to the average value for that month ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 o The tabular data can be viewed as a list of the shading insolation file the button list file content in the dialog box containing data on both shading and insolation if calculated Further text feedback details for both shading and insolation can be presented for one month at a time for the shading insolation file It is only possible to scroll the text feed back window to analyse the data set for two whole months The shading data is presented as a shading factor 0 no shading to 1 fully shaded for the selected month the ins
299. pport databases and associating these with the surfaces and spaces comprising the problem The examination copying editing and installing of databases are made under the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu in the Project Manager of the ESP r cf Figure 34 Entry Level a introduction to esp r database maintenance or project definition c exemplars d select existing e commence new f export current model g archive current model h validation i reporting gt gt summary j tool set up help exit Project Manager Figure 34 The content of the Entry Level menu where the different databases can be found via the menu item database maintenance ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item database maintenance directs the user to the Databases menu displayed in Figure 35 where the different databases can be selected Databases path a climate t fusr esru esp r climate dk_TRY b pressure distributions usr esru esp r databases pressc db1 c materials t fusr esru esp r databases constr db1 d constructions t fusr esru esp r databases multicon db1 e plant components t fusr esru esp r databases plante db1 f event profiles fusr esru esp r databases profiles db1 g optical properties t fusr esru esp r databases optics db1 h temporal definitions UNKNOWN es O Z m gt pa o 3 bo e D 7 T Y ped Ep oO help exit this menu Figure 35 The var
300. ptd steel g 46 216 66 2700 886 0 82 6 72 19200 Grey cotd aluminium h 47 210 00 2700 886 0 82 0 32 19200 Wt cotd aluminium i 48 210 00 2700 886 6 65 6 85 19200 Thermobrite 1 add delete element 2 copy element update construction elements db 2 Figure 44 A description of material elements in the material database Detailed information of different metals in the Element Database menu are seen ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 According to the ESRU Homepage glossary the diffusion resistance factor is calculated as in equation 1 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 62 Databases kg permability of air kg te permability of material Pa 13 4 1 1 Example Editing the material database 13 4 1 1 1 Installing of a new material database To install a new material database select the menu item database maintenance menu item in the Entry level menu in Figure 34 materials in Figure 35 and make a new database in Figure 45 is selected Materials options a browse or edit this file b select another file c make a new database d copy the default database e binary gt gt ascii export f ascii gt gt binary import Deflt is item a help exit this menu Figure 45 The different options when the entrance to the material database cf Figure 35 has been chosen ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The path and filename
301. quirements novice and expert The time used for a novice and an expert user in approaching and using ESP r are quite different cf Table 1 Table 1 Estimation on the time requirements for a novice and an expert user to build up different tasks Based on ESRU Homepage tutorial_7 and experience Task Novice Expert Plan approach to simulations 5 min 1 2 hrs Define simple zone geometry 5 min 2 min Define complex zone geometry 1 hr 25 min Generate occupancy schedules 10 min 2 5 min Add a new wall to database 5 min 30 sec Add a new climate database 30 min 2 hrs 20 min Define an ideal zone control 15 min 2 min Add daylight control to a room 15 min 2 4 min Add a fluid flow network 30 min 15 min Add a plants and systems 30 min 15 min Locating errors and changing the model 30 min 2 hrs 2 25 min The difference in being a novice and an expert user is the plan approach and the program knowledge Becoming an expert user is a gradually process depending on the variety of design problems in hand Table 2 gives and estimation on the requirements and time needed to go from a novice to an expert user with frequent use 10 hours a week Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 9 A quick introduction to ESP r Table 2 Estimation on the requirements and time needed to go from a novice to an expert user Level Required knowledge on the p
302. r depth Y m 0 01 0 01 Sensor height Z m 0 01 0 01 Sensor rotation 9 9 Sensor name sen w sen r The MRT sensor view factors are then saved via the menu item Update MRT sensors amp view factors cf Figure 104 and the MRT sensor view factors are then ready for calculation via the following selections the menu item Calculate zone or MRT sensor viewfactors cf Figure 104 is selected the button Based on ray tracing calcs in the dialog box zone viewfactor calcs gt answering yes to the upcoming questions and MRT sensor attrib amp calcs The surface temperature is needed as input if the mean radiant temperature using sensor view factors are to be evaluated in the mrt module Select the menu item list edit surf temp cf Figure 103 to set up the surface temperature for each surface Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 136 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors The sensor view factors are calculated via the menu item calc sensor viewfactor cf Figure 103 and the view factor file is updated via the menu item update file cf Figure 103 During the exiting process select the menu item use new data is selected Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 137 Lighting analysis and visualization 21 Lighting analysis and visualization Different kind of visualizations and lighting analysis can be unde
303. r the actual surface e g the linear thermal transmittances related to windows can be included in the U value for the frame which is done for the window in the ITUC building cf appendix 2 DS418 6 udgave 2002 04 02 includes a method on how to calculate the U value including thermal bridges and linear thermal transmittance in a construction This is one of the negative sides of ESP r that one can not define the linear thermal transmittances Y W mK and the length m of the thermal bridge It is also a negative side that the thermal bridges not can be included in materials and constructions If these options were included in ESP r one could study the thermal effect of linear thermal transmittances thermal bridges and get a more realistic heat balance for a complete building model Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 101 Definition of zones 14 4 Add or removing an adjacent zone Often building designs require a larger number of zones or a zone might become useless and irrelevant during the modelling process A zone can be added deleted copied or merged via the menu item geometry amp attribution in the Zones Definition menu cf Figure 66 pp 92 which leads to the Zone geometry amp atrib menu cf Figure 75 Zone geometry amp atrib a kontor_3 446 add delete copy merge help exit this menu Figure 75 The Zone geometry amp atrib menu where zon
304. ransmission absorption and reflectance The angle dependent reflections are deduced from the total solar transmission and the sum of the absorptance of the layers Values for an incidence angle of 55 are found as a linear interpolation between 50 and 60 The linear interpolation is made from the results of the calculations from WIS 2 0 or Window 4 1 5 1 The values for the angle of incidence not included above are also found by linear interpolation 13 7 1 Import of window data It is emphasized that the method in this paragraph is only relevant to American products that are to be calculated according to the NFRC ASHRAE International Standard ISO DIS 15099 1999 In the present version 10 4 of ESP r of 23 12 2002 the import function recognizes files from the program Window 4 1 published by Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory Window 4 1 can be downloaded free of charge from the home page http windows lbl gov software window 41 window_getacopy41 asp Window 5 1 can be downloaded free of charge from this home page http windows lbl gov software window 51 w51_getacopy asp The program Window 4 1 only offers a limited number of glasses and it will therefore be necessary to import glass data from Window 5 1 for use in Window 4 1 This procedure will be more time consuming than to manually import data from Window 5 1 to ESP r If it is necessary to import data directly from Window 4 1 the help function within ESP r can be studied
305. re included to illustrate the possibilities within ESP r The IT University of Copenhagen represents a part of the modern building design where large glazing areas are included The university is placed in the Northeasterly part of restaden in Copenhagen between the University of Copenhagen and the future DR building The building is formed as a capital H where two parallel buildings surround a large atrium The two buildings are approximately 100 and 135 metres long with a depth of approximately 14 metres The atrium has a depth of approximately 19 metres and a height of the whole building is approximately 24 metres Madsen et al 2001 The building is orientated 9 east and a plan of the IT University of Copenhagen is included in Figure 29 Figure 29 Principles plan drawing of the IT University of Copenhagen where the worst case area is marked Madsen et al 2001 In this thesis only one office kontor_3 44G for one person is included The office is situated on the third floor with an elevation of 11 73 metres and is facing northwest This area is estimated to be a part of the worst case area because of the large window area and the orientation of the window Madsen et al 2001 An office facing Southeast which is also a part of the worst case area has not been analysed but it should have in a real design project A plan and a sectional elevation drawing are included in Figure 30 Investigation and implementation of building simul
306. re profiles 1 m 3 0 ground representations n primary energy conversions o dispersed fan lift DHll demands p integrated performance view help exit this menu Figure 21 Menu items in the Site Information menu where one can alter the settings for the actual building site The editing can be performed via mouse or keyboard selections For example the letter k activates the menu item ground temperature profiles which then can be edited ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 All the menus contain the menu items help and exit this menu The first opens a new window with a short description of the content of this menu and the latter returns the user to the parent menu The menu item domain in Figure 21 contains gt gt which tells the user that the degree of details can be altered This pattern is used through out the program Some menus gives a practical overview of different alternatives cf Figure 22 When a relevant menu item is selected then it is marked with a star and the changes are executed when the menu is exited site exposure typical city centre typical urban site typical rural site city sky grnd bldgs city below surroundings isolated rural site totally enclosed no sky sky 0 00 grnd 0 00 bld 0 00 TOA eaa g Help Exit Figure 22 The site exposure menu displaying a list with different site data ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation p
307. reates the associated files to the Radiance calculation of the daylight coefficients The Radiance model is edited as follows The menu item create edit scene details cf Figure 107 sky type is selected in the Radiance desktop module the sky distribution file name is confirmed The menu item Generate sky description cf Figure 110 is selected to create the sky distribution file The menu item zone amp outside composition cf Figure 108 Generate description is thereafter selected cf Figure 111 and the filenames for glazing properties alternative glazing properties Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 158 Casual gain control Lighting control opaque material properties inside composition and outside composition properties are confirmed The obstructions are included in the daylight coefficient calculation Note The Radiance desktop module is closed down and when returning to the Project manager open a terminal and control if the line rif ituc rcf is include in the ituc cfg file located in cfg folder If the line is not included then add the line after the line beginning with year via the editor program vi After retuning to ESP r issue the button calculate coeffs in the dialog box and Radiance calculates the daylight coefficients and places them in the casual gain control file cgc The calculation usually takes a few hours for each set of daylight coeffic
308. reviation of Environmental Systems Performance and r for research ESRU Manual 2002 The ESP r system has been the subject of sustained developments since 1974 with the objective of simulating building performance in a manner that a is realistic and adheres closely to actual physical systems b supports early through detailed design stage appraisals and c enables integrated performance assessments in which no single issue is unduly prominent U S DOE Homepage The ESP r system is developed over three decades to the program it is today Joe Clark developed the first prototype as a part of doctoral research in the years 1974 to 1977 With funding from the UK Science and Engineering Research Council SERC the ESP r system was reorganized and documented validation trails commenced multi zone processing was implemented and the graphical interface was established from 1977 to 1980 Dr Don McLean accomplished Professor Clarke in 1981 and the capabilities of ESP r were extended to include dynamic plant simulation and air flow modelling This further development was based on founding from SERC and CEC and ESP r was moved to the low cost UNIX workstation ESRU Homepage tutorial_4 In 1987 the Energy Simulation Research Unit ESRU was formed to address the problems in the building energy and environmental simulation As a part of this ESRU kept developing ESP r but mainly within the UK Department of Energy s now Trade and Industry P
309. riod can be seen in Figure 179 It can also be seen from Figure 182 that the inside surface temperature of the different opaque surfaces in the zone varies within 3 C The two windows the upper one is the one to the right have a colder inside surface temperature than the other surfaces from 2000 to 0800 This is due to the heat loss to the outside and the radiation to the sphere The windows are up to four degrees warmer from 0800 to 2000 due to the incident radiation and the heat absorptance in the inner glass 26 3 Example The enquire about result facility A summary on the building performance is achieved by selecting the menu item Enquire about from the result analysis menu in Figure 176 and the result can for example be viewed as tabular data for the selected topic A topic in the Enquire about menu is for example hours above or below a value energy delivered to a zone zone energy balance gains and losses etc cf Figure 183 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 213 Result analysis Enquire about 2 select result set 3 define output period 4 select zones a summary statistics b frequency table c hours above a value d hours below a value energy delivered casual gains distrib zone energy balance surface energy balne surface condensation intrstl condensation roe FO a s monthy gains losses m monthy temp stats Figure 183 The content of the Enq
310. rogram Estimated time Description requirements to reach this level Novice Knowledge on the elementary in the program as 1 2 week Zone geometry Inter zone connections Constructions Operations Climate material constructions databases Ideal simple control Simulations Result analysis Review of files Intermediate Same knowledge as novice level including knowledge on 1 2 month All databases Solar shading Insolation Casual gain control View factors Visualisation Expert Same knowledge as intermediate level including knowledge on 1 2 year Plant amp system network Fluid flow networks Detailed control networks Integrated performance view CFD Calculation procedure Source code Program own facilities Knows the possibilities and limitation in the program and how to get around them Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 10 Document conventions 3 Document conventions When reading this manual certain words are represented in different fonts typefaces sizes and weights The representation of different words is systematic throughout the manual and refers to certain categories as filenames commands etc The types of words representing the different categories are presented below Filename directories and paths This type of words is mostly used in describing the installation procedure of ESP r and Radiance in paragr
311. rogrammes especially ESP r 37 Interface details of ESP r Some menus contain more than one page and the next page can be selected in the button of the menu 8 4 Feedback levels There are different levels in which the feedback can be supplied Silent Executive summary and Verbose Silent In this mode only error messages and prompts are given as feedback Executive summary In this mode a brief report is produced as portions of the problem description or databases are read in Verbose In this mode all information relating to the problem and its databases are displayed ESRU Homepage tutorial_9 Most of the applications begins at summary level but can be changed in several of the menus 8 5 Editing text and numbers The dialog box in the bottom of the ESP r interface requests numbers for input in different ways for different topics cf Figure 23 Site longitude difference is degrees from some local reference meridian east tve e g 4 1 for Glasgow relative to the Greenwich meridian Type d D default 0 000 or carriage return current 0 000 click to dismiss Longitude difference from reference 0 000000E 00 ok a Figure 23 The activated help window via the button and the buttons used to accept the input and to supply default values for the longitude difference from the meridian are ok and d ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The longitude difference can be changed by addressing the numbers with th
312. ronic m global system n define uncertainties Actions 4 o simulation p results analysis q reporting save model help exit this menu Figure 65 The content of the Model Definition menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Model Definition menu gives possibilities to define a wide range of data for the building model as site information composition of zones networks controls simulation result analysis and reporting cf Figure 65 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 91 Definition of zones Tip It is an advantage to update the databases to suit the needed opaque and transparent constructions cf paragraph 13 4 and 13 7 before commencing attributing surfaces in the construction process of a zone To update the databases exit the Model Definition menu and enter the database maintenance menu item cf Figure 64 When the databases have been updated one can continue with the current building model by selecting the menu item select existing from the Entry Level menu cf Figure 64 and save the model by selecting the menu item save model cf Figure 65 Zones are constructed through the menu item composition cf Figure 65 the button Project Manager in the dialog box and the Zones Definition menu will be presented cf Figure 66 Zones Definition Zones 1 included a composition status b geometry amp at
313. rt of the Zone composition menu cf Figure 91 and is supported by both graphic and text feedback Zone 1 Composition a name reception b desc reception describes 4 origin 1 6 1 4 4 68 volume 144 66m 3 c base floor area 48 60m 2 opaque constr 182 60m 2 transp constr 16 8m 2 d vertex coordinates 34 surface list amp edges 14 surface attributes gt m solar distribution solar obstruction rotation amp transforms we aro list surface details update zone info gt problem reporting gt gt silent help exit this menu Vek v o Figure 91 The content of the Zone Composition menu where the compositions of surface construction editing of surface vertices adding of solar obstructions etc can be performed ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 121 Shading and insolation It is possible to have different set of obstructions associated to each zone in a problem or one set of obstructions can be associated with a number of zones The latter case once the obstructions have been defined they can be associated with other zones via the menu item composition status facility of the Zone Definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 Note Note that obstruction blocks should be slightly offset from the facade rather than touching A window reveal is offset 5 mm from the pane The solar obstructi
314. rtaken within the visualization facility of ESP r and in order to take advantage of this facility Radiance needs to be included on the system cf paragraph 6 4 ESP r and Radiance are coupled for both lighting analysis and visualizations and makes use of the Radiance desktop module The facility converts an ESP r definition into a form which can be interpreted by the lighting analysis package Radiance The converting results in new Radiance files which are placed in the project folder rad The created files are commented in paragraph 21 1 1 The lighting analyses comprise calculation daylight factors and glare in different grid points in a zone These different factors can be analysed according to different climate conditions ground reflectance different kinds of sky conditions year date time latitude and longitude The visualization analysis can comprise internal cf Figure 105 or external images of a given situation time or season for the sky The climate parameter can be set to the same as mentioned above Scene view point can also be set and altered within the Radiance desktop module Figure 105 A visualisation result performed by Radiance for a given building model The exposure of the image is adjusted to present a similar indoor visibility to what would be expected in a real environment ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The visualization facility in ESP r in coupling with Radiance is a good tool for including internal and ext
315. s gt Display to gt gt screen amp Datat as values f Clear all selections Set axis scale Add another profile Draw graph Labels Help Exit Figure 178 The content of the Time var graph facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 209 Result analysis The displaying dates are changed to just contain 9 6 from 0100 to 2400 This is done by selecting the menu item Display period entering the day of the month the month and the starting time as 9 6 1 then entering the day of the month the month and the ending time as 9 6 24 and the output time increment is set to 1 Subsequently selecting each parameter and then drawing the graph when all parameters are selected draw the different parameters described above The procedure is described below e The zone dry bulb temperature is added by selecting the menu item Temperatures cf Figure 179 and Zone db T After a selection of a profile one returns to the Time series plot menu cf Figure 179 and a graphs can be drawn if necessary e The ambient temperature is added by selecting the menu item Climate cf Figure 179 and Ambient temperature e The mean radiant temperature of the two added MRT sensors is added by selecting the menu item Temperatures cf Figure 179 Mean Radiant T at sensors all items in the list which contains the two sensors kontor_3 44G s
316. s for another month Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 130 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors 20 View factors and mean radiant temperature sensors The view factor module within ESP r allows zone view factors or the MRT sensors to be viewed edited or added and these are saved in a view factor file vwf View factors are used to improve the accuracy of the time dependant inter surface longwave radiation exchange calculation Aesem et al 1993 The default treatment of calculating the mean radiant temperature is to use area weighted inter surface view factors which are automatically calculated in a simulation if this facility has not been invoked The mean radiant temperature is the uniform temperature of an imaginary enclosure in which radiant heat transfer from the human body is equal to the radiant heat transfer in the actual non uniform enclosure International Standard ISO 7726 1998 The mean radiant temperature is an important parameter when doing indoor environment studies In normal indoor conditions a person looses roughly equal quantities of heat by convection to the air and by radiation to the surrounding surfaces The radiation heat loss becomes noticeable when a sitting or a standing person is near a cold or a warm surface Guido et al 1988 The mean radiant temperature sensors used in ESP r has a rectangular shape The default dimension
317. s fugtisolering Danish Building Research Institute Denmark Thomsen K E Aggerholm S 2000 SBI meddelelse 129 Beregning af bruttoenergiforbrug Danish Building Research Institute Denmark EN 832 1998 Thermal performance of building Calculation of energy use for heating Residential buildings CEN European committee for standardization Brussels ESP r version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The version of the software program ESP r released on the 23 Dec 2002 University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland MacQueen J 1993 THE MODELLING AND SIMULATION OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS Department of Mechanical Engineering Energy Systems Division University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland CR 1752 1998 Ventilation for building design Design criteria for the indoor environment CEN European committee for standardization Brussels Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 Rendering with Radiance the art and science of lighting vizualisation Morgan Kaufmann Publisher Inc Editor and Sales Office 340 Pine Street Six Floor San Francisco CA 94109 3205 USA Madsen J Schepler A Gjorlund J 2001 Tutorial til Bsim2000 Opbygning af kontor modul for IT Hojskolen Version 1 00 Danmarks Tekniske Universitet BYGeDTU Copenhagen Denmark Lomas K J Eppel H Martin C and Bloomfield D Sept 1994 Empirical Validation of Thermal Building Simulation Programs using Test Room Data YEA Annex 21 Task 12 Co operative Project Fi
318. s similar to type 220 except from another branch conduit is included in the ending junction Type 240 incorporates only a part of the junction and all conduits ending in the junction must be represented by this type cf Figure 126 and Table 27 e Type 250 Conduit starting in a diverging 4 leg junction is similar to type 230 except from another branch conduit is included in the starting junction Type 250 incorporates only a part of the junction and all conduits starting in the junction must be represented by this type cf Figure 126 and Table 27 Hensen 1991 Figure 126 A graphical representation of the 3 leg and 4 leg components type 220 230 240 and 250 Hensen 1991 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 166 Networks Table 27 A tabular representation on how to configure the 3 and 4 leg flow component types 220 230 240 and 250 in the vent hydronic menu item in the network facility in ESP r Refer to From To Via component node node i j 220 Figure 126 type 220 K j 220 i j 230 Figure 126 type 230 k 30 k j 240 Figure 126 type 240 i j 240 l j 240 i k 250 Figure 126 type 250 i j 250 i l 250 The flow directions are assumed to be as indicated in Figure 126 If during the simulation the flow is in the other direction a warning message will be issued General flow inducer component Type 310 Th
319. s that appear in the control option menu are surface name type location indentation construction and environment cf Figure 71 The selected surface is highlighted in the graphic feedback window In the approach to change the construction of a surface one is passed directly to the constructions database and any defined multilayer construction type can be selected The environment on the outside of the surface is changed via the menu item environment in Figure 71 and a list of options appears in the control option menu cf Figure 72 refer to paragraph 17 for an explanation of the different boundary conditions 10 The surface facing away from the given zone is defined as outside even when the outside is bounding to another zone Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 97 Definition of zones surface boundary a Exterior b Dynamic similar boundary c Static boundary conditions d Surface in another zone e Ground standard monthly profile f Ground user defined profile g Ground 3D conduction model h Adiabatic no heat flux i BASESIMP foundation configuration j Unknown at this time Help Exit Figure 72 The surface boundary menu displaying the different types of boundary conditions which can be given to zone surfaces ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A user defined profile is needed for the ground temperature Prior to selecting menu item Ground user
320. s the definition of the control scheme for heating and cooling for the ventilation system used in the ITUC building The coupling of the mechanical ventilation system to the zone control facility is performed as described in the rest of this paragraph The menu item control focus in Figure 152 is set to zones the overall project control description menu item b in Figure 152 is set to Coupling between the mechanical ventilation system and the zone and the zone control description menu item c in Figure 152 is set to Vent control 21 dg in the day and 15 in the night weekend Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 188 Controls Controls a control focus gt gt zones b description Coupling between the mechan c descriptiont Vent control 21 dg in the loops alten ll d link loops to zones cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid period loop location location typelduringlin day 6 2 ARCs Ot BeOS O els seh A add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 152 The content for zone Controls menu before and after the control configuration ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 A control loop is already added to the established file ituc ctl cf Figure 152 Menu item e for control loop 1 in Figure 152 is selected for changing of the pre defined parameters The menu items sensor details
321. scssscessescssscssseesssssesesssessesceecessescesssessesceessoseeessssssesseseerees 71 13 6 The event promles database sic issscscsscasssssscavsenssssesesuss cossavoasesoasevesessessesassevessensessosecnesssnsedonsssssnescepens OSS orsi SSS 73 13 6 1 Example Editing in the event profiles database ccesccesecssecsceeseeeseeeeeeeeceeeesecnseceaeeeseenseeeeeseenaeenseeses 73 13 6 1 1 Selecting a new event profiles database cececceecescceseceseceseeseeeseeeseeeeeeeceseeeseeseceseeeceeceeesseenseeses 74 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r v Table of Contents 13 6 1 2 Establishing profiles lt 2 2cccccc seccdedec sscesciadicseceecavssces iedsccevcevanceusvass E E E E E eE E eS ia E Ee 74 13 6 1 3 Editing profiler enpense nne EEE E EEE E e E esi ESS 75 13 6 1 4 Drawing up the profiles of the databases in the text feedback window ssseeseesessesrseereessrsrsrrerersesee 76 13 7 Ehe Optical database 25 ccccssdiccecesssscossssessonsscenss sesceseousssnsestessowesdessesondbocesessouseckssesussesuassones ceeds sdenestensessedeceuses sse 76 13 7 1 Import of window datalsi eiiie nie Aha Au iti nena A R aA 76 1371 41 Importof data LBE Window SJ erennere e a eE e arei aea 76 13 7 2 Import of WIS data EESE EEE A A E EA 77 13 7 3 Example Editing the optical database cccccceescesscsssceseceseceseceeecaeecaeeeseeeeeeeceeeseeseeenaeceaeeaeeeeenseeeeens 78 13 7331 Impor
322. scssscssssessssssssesssscsssssssssssssssssessessssssssesssesssessscssecsseesseesessenseoes 97 14 2 1 Example Modifying surface attributes ccccesceseessecseeeseeesecseecseeeseeeneeseceseeeseeneecaeesaeeeaeesaeceeeneeeaeeass 98 14 2 2 Add panes frames doors etc to surfaces naera i E E E E E A E e 99 14 2 2 1 Example Adding a frame two panes and a dOOD ccesccesecesesesecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeceseeneeeseeeeeeeeeneeeseenaees 100 14 3 Defining thermal bridges and linear thermal transmittance eesesseseesseseeeoeseeoerseeceesoeseseoesereorseeoesoeeersoesee 101 14 4 Add or removing an adjacent Zone e seesesseseseoeseseoeseeoesoeeeesoeseseoeseeeeeoeeoesoeeeeeoeserooeseeoesoeeeeeorsereorseroesereorseeeesee 102 14 4 1 Divide surfaces attributions ceea eere a aerae a a a alat a 102 14 4 2 Problem d A S AASS E ccc E PEE O E EN E N E EE N E T R 103 14 4 3 Example Adding a zone and handling problems s sssesesesesssesessseeeessesssstsressesersreseesesseseessesersseseseeseene 104 14 4 3 1 Inserting a surface in the partition SE_part in the zone kontor _3 44G sssssesssessessrsrserererssrrrereeseee 104 14 4 3 2 Coping deleting and modifying surfaces in the Zone PE sssssssssesssesersersesessreresseserseesesesseeeessesees 106 15 IMPLEMENTATION OF ZONE COMPOSITIONS TO THE BUILDING MODEL 109 15 1 Example Creating the mandatory construction file seseeseseseoeseeoesseeeesoeseeeoeseeoerseeoesoeseeeoesereorseesesoeeees
323. seeeoeseeeoeseeoesoesereoeseeooeseeoeseeeeesoesesee 28 6 4 Radiance installation amd manuals sssccsssssscssssscsssssccsssscccssssccesssesssscsccsessessesssesssssecsscssseessessssssseses 30 6 5 Changing and compiling the source COdC sscsscsssecssesssessecssessssssesessecsssssesesscsssnsesnseessessssesenessnsesecssese 31 7 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTIONALITY OF ESP R ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 7 1 The directory Structure Of ES Par i cccsssccscesasssssscsanescossennssasoasesvaseonessesdsssbessestessoseeuessesecseunasbenesendses oowedeayesseseene 32 72 User folder Structurre csscssscssssssssssscssccssecssessssssssssenessssssesessssssssssssscsssnsesssnsssnsssnsesssessssssssscssossscessessonsooes 32 7 3 Inyoking help ess ssivscecssds cctsestecceseveescouescescewessecsesesvecsesesep cuasescesesoessesestuaceseseeseenesdoseewesoccsesesvesteccsncssecseuesseseesesseassss 33 8 INTERFACE DETAILS OF ESP R sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 33 8 1 Screen Mode graphic text ccsccssssscssscssscessssscesscessesssessesssesesssssssessnesssessesssesssessssssssssesssesesesenesseeesoess 33 8 2 Change application layout ccsccsssssscsssesscsssssssssscsssessesssessssssesssscsssesenessseessssssessensssssnsesessssesesenessoessoese 35 8 3 Interaction and MENU CONELOL csccccsecrsessseesesesessssssesesssessssscesseeseseseensessseesssessnessesssessssessees
324. seful when Radiance is supposed to work with ESP r It is not necessary to follow this procedure in order to make ESP r and Radiance work together The downloaded file rad3R5 tar gz is placed in the following directory usr esru bin Radiance and unpacked by first typing gzip d tar gz and then tar xf rad3R5 tar The directory ray is entered and Radiance is installed by typing makeall install Answer the listed questions to fit to your operating system among other things a vi editor for a Linux workstation with RadHat 8 0 Place the executables in the folder usr esru bin Radiance and the library files in the usr esru lib Radiance folder The gendaylit tar Z file is placed in the directory usr esru bin The directory is entered cd usr esru bin and the file is unpacked via the following commands gunzip gendaylit tar Z tar xf gendaylit tar The gendaylit directory is entered The gendaylit files needs to be compiled but prior to that the source code of the makefile command needs to be changed to look like the one in appendix 6 The source code is changed with the command vi makefile The lines are formatted by entering shift i and the lines to be changed are CCOPTS to CCOPTS g CCOPTS Ae g HPUX to CCOPTS Ae g HPUX CC cc to CC cc The changes are saved by entering esc shift and wq And the command make is used The command chmod 755 gendaylit and chmod 644 coeff_perez dat defangle dat perezlum cal is used to g
325. set to 2003 O OO OF O 20 The Model Definition menu is closed by activating the menu item exit this menu cf Figure 65 and the menu item database maintenance is selected in the Entry Level menu cf Figure 64 in order to set up the databases cf paragraph 13 2 13 4 and 13 7 When the database has been updated the construction of the zone geometry continues The menu item select existing in the Entry Level menu cf Figure 64 save model composition gt and the button Project Manager in the dialog box is selected and the Zones Definition menu is displayed cf Figure 66 The geometry is constructed via the menu item geometry and attribution cf Figure 66 and is create via dimension input The internal dimensions are used for the construction of the zone The new zone is named Kontor_3 44G and the description is set to kontor_3 44G describes a unit of the ITUC facing 9 degrees east The geometry is constructed via an extruded rectangle The origin is set to 0 0 11 73 metres and the internal dimensions x y z width depth and height are set to 4 057 2 9 3 4 metres The box orientation is set to 9 which is the same as the building is rotated 9 towards the east and the connection file name ituc cnn is accepted and the modelled zone is displayed in the graphical feedback window cf Figure 70 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r
326. sition of menu used to create the construction files when the building model has been defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The following description of the blind shutter control definition happens in the dialog box Only one control period is chosen to represent the shading of the window the transparent surfaces are set to be controlled via a single sensors since only one transparent surfaces has these optical properties the surface index number is set to 10 which represent the pane NW_win_up the control period is set to begin at 0800 and finish at 1700 the control is set to focus on incident radiation and the set point is set to 270 W m This means that whenever the irradiance on the exterior surface NW_win_up exceeds this set point the shaded window will replace the original Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 119 Blinds and shutters window and the optical property for the shaded window is extracted from the optical database IT_Uni_shd where it earlier has been defined cf paragraph 13 7 3 2 4 The changes made are saved by selecting the menu item update construction details in Figure 90 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 120 Shading and insolation 19 Shading and insolation An important issue in analysing buildings models in ESP r is that the shading of external surfaces which inf
327. sp t climate dk_dry A new menu ESP r integrated simulator cf Figure 173 appears and the menu item Warnings is set to on and the menu item Reporting level is set to detailed in case of a warning The simulation is initiated by selecting the menu item Initiate simulation cf Figure 173 and the following questions asked in the dialog box are answered with e Zone result library name ituc res e Mass flow result library name ituc nrl e Plant result library name ituc prl e Simulation period start day and month 1 1 e Simulation period end day and month 31 12 e Zone side time step hour 60 e Plant side time step building time step 1 e Hourly result integration no A new menu SIMUL cf Figure 174 appears The menu item Save gt gt level is kept at 4 2 energy balnc and the menu item Monitor state variables is selected monitoring Zones zone temperature the minimum and maximum temperature values on the y axis is set to 0 and 30 C The outcome of this state variable is the dry bulb temperature for the zone kontor_3 44G and the ambient temperature The simulation is invoked by selecting the menu item invoke simulation cf Figure 174 and the system control file is entered as ctl ituc ctl the result set description is accepted and the simulation is activated by selecting yes to the question do you want to continue The simulation takes up approximately 3 15 Gbytes of disk space The period Jun
328. system with heat recovery secceeseeeeceeeeeceseeeceseeeteseeaeeseeneees 178 24 GONTROLS A E A A A 185 24 1 Control SVSCEMS s siscsessdscvscccesssseesducassssccssoess oS e tetea e eE oe NESSE SOE EEEN ETE EEES ESSE tessevas doSesesecadewesseesdenasseseeses 186 24 1 1 Mo d lli g of zones Control arenen divin whats na Men E E E K 188 24 1 1 1 Example defining a coupling between the mechanical ventilation system and the zone for indoor temperature Control 0 nenn a e a red ea ea ah ate nl ideale 188 24 1 2 Modelling of plant and systems CONtIOL ceecceeseeesceeeeesecesecsecseecaeeeseeeneeeseeeeeeeeseeeseceseenaeenaeenseeeeaees 190 24 1 2 1 Example defining proportional control for the defined ventilation system with heat recovery 190 24 1 3 Modelling of vent hydronic control ce ecceesceescessceeeceeecesecsecesecseecseecaeeeneceaeeneeeeesreesseeeeeeaeenseenseeeensees 196 24 1 3 1 Example Defining on off control for natural ventilation through a WindOW csccesesseeeeeneeeeeneees 196 25 SIMULA TION e r r e E e E e E r e Ee E aE e Era CESES 201 25 1 Advanced integrated Simulation sscssccssesssessscssesssesssesesssssseseessesesescssssessensecnsessseesenesssssesenessnessesees 203 25 2 Example Advanced integrated Simulation cssccscsssssssssssssssssssssscssssssssssesssessessssssesscnsesssessssssesssees 205 26 RESULTANALY SIS cts oeien eee eter eet eee 208 26 1 Example The graphical res
329. t Insert To insert a material the menu item add or delete a layer and the button Insert in the dialog box is selected The material which the new material shall be place before seen from inside the building zone is selected The facility is ended with the menu item exit The new material can then be selected as previously described The build up of a new construction is ended by selecting the menu item exit this menu cf Figure 49 The partition G26I50G26 the horizontal division Lin2C340 the internal door Int door the window sill window_sill and the window frame Frame_Alu_W is also created cf paragraph 12 1 and appendix 2 for detail concerning the composition order material used and its data A Warning Remember to update the construction database update database cf Figure 46 in order to make the changes available for future use 13 4 2 1 3 Adding a new window The material properties for the glasses is defined in the material database cf paragraph 1 1 1 and the optical properties for panes is defined in the optical properties database in paragraph 13 7 The construction database is entered via the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu cf Figure 34 constructions cf Figure 35 browse or edit this file and the available constructions in the active database is listed in the Construction databases menu cf Figure 46 A new transparent construction 4 16Ar LwE6 cf paragraph 12 1 is
330. t least three periods if the defined control comprises different controls through a day type A control loop can be edited by selecting a day type in a control loop and then one of the following options sensor detail actuator detail period of validity or period data cf Figure 149 Editing options a sensor details b actuator details c period of validity d period data help exit this menu Figure 149 The content of the Editing options menu where sensor detail actuator detail period of validity and or period data can be edited ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Sensors cf Figure 147 can be positioned anywhere within a model e Zone air point or within a construction e Within HVAC components e Within flow or electrical systems Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 186 Controls Sensors can also be used to pick up climate and other time varying data The zone control sensors are typically placed at an air point or within a surface cf Figure 150 They can also be chosen to respond to air temperature or a mix of convective and radiant temperatures out in Figure 150 The convention for nodes when placing an actuator within a construction The period data comprise a number of control periods for the controller Within ESP r the controller in Figure 147 comprises several elements e Control law e Controller type e Control data The c
331. t exchanger supply fan duct CES feo Fe Lo return fan duct soe k k dn office Figure 7 A sketch of a ventilation system with heat recovery A CFD description and calculations can also be included in the definition of zone 2 5 Database The ESP r package contain a number of pre defined databases which holds data for different climate sites constructions pressure distributions on exterior facing surfaces plant amp system components and optical properties for window panes cf Figure 8 for the optical property database for panes The different modules and databases work interactively together Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 8 A quick introduction to ESP r Optical Properties db a SC_8985_04nb Clear glass 89 85 4mm no blind b SC_8985_04ib Clear glass 89 85 4mm int blin c SCF8783_06nb Clear float 87 83 6mm no blind d SCF8783_06ib Clear float 87 83 6mm int blin e SCF8477_10nb Clear float 84 77 10mm no blind f SCF8477_10ib Clear float 84 77 10mm int blin g SCF8285_12nb Clear float 82 75 12mm no blind h SCF8285_12ib Clear float 82 85 12mm int blin i SSF5165_06nb Spectrafloat 51 66 Emm no blind j SSF5165_06ib Spectrafloat 51 66 6mm int blin k SRF3352_06nb Reflectafloat 33 52 6mm no blind 1 SRF3352_06ib Reflectafloat 33 52 6mm int blin m SAZ5060_06nb Antisun bronze 50 60 6mm no blind n SAZ3348_10nb Antisun bronze 33 48 10mm no bl
332. t exists 23 2 1 3 Description of fluid flow connections The connections in the fluid flow network facility represent the components in the plant amp systems facility where nodes represent components Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 167 Networks A requirement for a mass flow network solution is that at least one of the node pressures is known Another requirement is that all nodes within a network must be linked through some path to a node with known pressure Wind induced pressure is considered as known pressure at a node Figure 127 illustrates the linkage between inside nodes with an unknown pressure to the outside nodes with known wind induced pressure Figure 127 An example of a diagrammatic representation of a fluid flow network in a 4 zone model Hensen 1991 The linkage of nodes is performed by defining connections via the menu item connections in the Fluid Flow Network menu cf Figure 123 Each connection in a fluid flow network consists of e The name of the nodes on the positive and negative side of the connection e The relative height between the node on the positive side of the connection and the inlet or outlet height of the associated component e The relative height between the node on the negative side of the connection and the inlet or outlet of the associated component e The name of the connecting flow component Nodes on both sides of
333. t is W Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 190 Controls been added otherwise consult paragraph 24 1 and 24 1 1 1 for the listed questions The Controls menu for the plant amp system control facility is shown in Figure 155 Controls a control focus gt gt plant b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops ere cntl l sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid Iperiod loopllocationllocationltypelduringlin day add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update control data help exit this menu Figure 155 The Controls menu for the plant amp systems after entering the facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item control focus cf Figure 155 is set to plant and a new control loop is added using the menu item add delete copy control loop or day type add loop for weekday Saturday Sunday and the periods in the three day types are set to 3 1 and 1 respectively cf Figure 156 for the defined control loop Controls a control focus gt gt plant b description Coupling between the mechan c description no descrip loops aged cntll sensor lactuatorlday Ivalid period loop location location typelduringlin day e 1 0 0 0 0 0 OQwkd 1 365 3 fF Sat 91 365 2 g Sun 1365 1 add delete copy control loop or day type list or check current control data gt update c
334. t patietiless 4 3 3s s00 octet st an o det sands E vec lea taped te cay tikeast ee dan tacos 79 W332 Addo O Sy Stems 22 52 se4ia Bact esece ie Gathstacabecd ea gend a a both dt oth oa eases 80 13 7 3 3 Edit profiles in the optical database cecccesceesseesecsseeseeeseeeeceseecseeeneececeeeeesseeeseceaeenaeeaeceeceeeseeses 84 13 7 3 4 Drawing up the profiles of the databases in the text feedback window eeceseessseeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeees 85 13 8 The Temporal definitions database sssccsscssscssscssscsssssscssscsscsssssssssscsssssssssssssssesssessssssecsssesssesssseeseoes 86 13 8 1 Example adding 5 minutes data for the Danish Design Reference Year 0 eceeeeeseeceteeeesecteeeeseenees 87 14 DEFINITION OF ZONES 3 3 5 5 avee keenakkan ahaaa he a eae 90 14 1 DGS19T OF A ZONES sccsssssscesssscvdsccensesendecdessoncsseanss oes eenes dessennasescescededesvescusues sosssuniesSeedentedeseseesnb consstenssdenseevepesteesens 90 14 1 1 Composition Status cccecccscecsseescesscesceeseesseeeceseceseeesecaecsaecsaecssecseecseseseeeseseeeeenseensecaeeeaeeaeceecseeeeeeseeees 92 14 1 2 Creating geometry and surface attribution ceeccesccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeeeeseceeessecesecesecaecaecsaeceeeaeeeseesss 93 14 1 3 Example Constructing zone geometry ccceesceesceeccesecesecsecssecaeecseeeseeeceseceseenseceseceaeenaecaecsaecseeeaeeeneeses 95 14 2 Modify surface attributes cscsscsscssccssecs
335. tabase Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 61 Databases 13 4 1 The material database The material database contains a description of different material classes as e g in Figure 43 Materials Classes Description No Items a Brick T b Concrete 16 c Metal 8 d Wood 15 e Stone T f Plaster 9 g Screeds and renders S h Tiles 13 i Asphalt and bitumen 7 j Asbestos 4 k Insulation materials 1 gt 19 Carpet 16 m Glass 6 n Earth 4 o Insulation materials 2 2 add a classification list database entries 7 help exit Figure 43 Material classes in the original material database constr db1 ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The material specification contains the materials thermal conductivity W mK density kg m specific heat J kgK absorption coefficient emission value and diffusion resistance factor DRF cf Figure 44 Elements Database Units Conductivity H m deg Density kg m 3 Specific Heat Jiko deg 0 gt a Classification Metal 3 Number of elements Prm Con Den Specif IR Solr Difful Description db duct sity heat emis abs resis of material help exit this menu b 41 200 00 8900 418 60 72 0 65 19200 Copper c 42 50 00 7800 502 4 12 6 20 19200 Steel d 43 210 00 2700 886 6 22 6 20 19200 Aluminium e 44 40 00 7800 502 0 82 6 45 19200 Beige ptd steel f 45 40 00 7800 502 60 82 0 30 19200 White
336. tance in a building can via a simple procedure be added to the construction facility cf paragraph 15 where the definition of blind shutter control is added The linear thermal transmittance can be calculated according to the formula 9 QO Y W K 9 Where Qy The heat loss caused by the linear thermal transmittance W K y Linear thermal transmittance W mK l The length of the linear thermal transmittance m Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 225 Conclusion 28 Conclusion It takes a long time to make oneself acquainted with ESP r and the existing manual ESRU Manual 2002 is found insufficient to use for new user of ESP r to get acquainted with the complex program and the author of this thesis thinks he succeeded in making a step by step manual that will help new users to use understand and to appreciate the program within a short period of time ESP r attempts to simulate the real world as close as possible and uses detailed calculation methods like ray tracing and CFD calculation The program therefore requires detailed input which requires specific knowledge on the different facilities to be modelled but the program also gives the possibility to perform a detailed study on the model The program is a good supplement to Bsim2002 and offer further valuable possibilities in modelling and analysing building models On basis of a good detailed user manual the program is
337. tation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 4 A quick introduction to ESP r 2 A quick introduction to ESP r ESP r is a transient energy simulation program which allows modelling of energy and fluid flows within a combined building and plant system The program is composed of a series of modules which each contribute to certain areas in the modelling and simulation process The central desktop manager the Project Manager activates the relevant modules when required ESP r works in a UNIX and Linux environment where Figure 2 is displaying ESP r started in a RedHat Linux environment The displayed ESP r platform is controlled by the Project Manager root localhost A Eile Edit View Terminal Go Help a root localhost root esp r roots Home bd Project Manager enquiries to esru strath ac uk A Entry Level f a introduction to esp r b database maintenance Start Here project definition TS exemplars J select existing commence new Trash export current model archive current model h validation i reporting gt gt summary j tool set up narevifets help exit Project Manager Welcome to the ESP r System Version 10 ESP r Project Manager Version 4 40a of December 2002 Copyright 2001 Energy Systems Research Unit University of Strathclyde Glasgow Scotland A im SE A S 2890S Do DoD dp O mom Figure 2 ESP r started in a RedHat Linux environment The Project Manager controls
338. tc have an effect one has to log out of the system and hereafter login again If the program is installed correctly ESP r can be started by typing the command esp r in a terminal from anywhere on the system If an ESP r file is to be directly activated from the project folder cfg the command esp r file cfg can be used 6 4 Radiance installation and manuals Radiance is a suite of programs for the analysis and visualization of daylight and lighting systems distributions in building models Radiance is UNIX software and can be used along with ESP r to analyse parameter as daylight coefficients irradiance and internal illuminance distribution Radiance is also suitable with Linux Radiance is freeware and can be downloaded from Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory s homepage http radsite lbl gov radiance framed html The files to be downloaded are rad3R5 tar gz and gendaylit tar Z The gendaylit file is located under the link Generators on the website Documents manual pages etc can be found via the following link http radsite Ibl gov radiance refer index html The download files can be placed and installed anywhere on the system but in order to keep track of all the files a directory called Radiance is suggested for the installation Here is an example of Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 30 Installation of ESP r and Radiance an installation procedure u
339. te Denmark DS700 5 udgave 1997 Kunstig belysning i arbejdslokaler Dansk Standart K benhavn Denmark Guido S Cor P de Wit M 1988 ESPmrt a new module for the ESP system University of Technology Eindhoven Institute of Applied Physics TNO TH International Standard ISO 7726 1998 Ergonomics of the thermal environment Instruments for measuring physical quantities International Organization for Standardization Case postale 56 CH 1211 Gen ve 20 Switzerland International Standard ISO DIS 15099 1999 Thermal Performance of Windows Doors and Shading Devices Detailed Calculations International Organization for Standardization Case postale 56 CH 1211 Gen ve 20 Switzerland Valbj rn O Lausten S Hawisch J Nielsen O Nielsen P A 2000 Indeklimahandbogen SBI Anvisning 196 Statens Byggeforskningsinstitut 2970 H rsholm Denmark Clarke J A Janak M 1998 Simulating the Thermal Effect of Daylight controlled Lighting Energy System Unit University of Stathclyde Glasgow Scotland Janak M 1997 Coupling Building Energy and Lighting Simulation Department of Mechanical Engineering Energy System Research Unit University of Stathclyde Glasgow Scotland Radiance reference manual 2003 The RADIANCE 3 5 Synthetic Imaging System Building Technologies Department Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory 1 Cyclotron Rd MS 90 3111 Berkeley CA 94720 DS418 6 udgave 2002 04 02 Beregninger af bygn
340. te database fUNCtION ccceeseseeteeeeeeseeeeeeerees 56 13 2 4 1 Implementation of a new standard climate database ecceccsseesseesseesceeeceeeceecesecesecnseesseceeeeeeneeees 58 13 3 Pressure distribution database ccccccssssscssscssscssscessssesssscssscssssssssssssssssesssessssssssesssesssssseesssesssesssseeseees 58 13 3 1 Example Editing the pressure distribution database 0 c ccececssessceeseeeeeesceeeceeceseceseceaeeaecseeceeeaeeeneeses 58 13 3 1 1 Editing of pressure distribution coefficients ccceeccescceseceseeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseeeaeceeeseeeseenseenseeses 59 13 3 1 2 Add delete and copy pressure distribution coefficients ccsccecceesceesceesceeeceseeeeceeeeeeeaecnseeneeeeeenes 59 13 4 The Material and construction database ssscccsscssssccscesceecssscsscsecsssessesssessescessessesceessssesseesssseseeseeeees 61 13 4 1 Lhe material database toi otic scessestiats estes a ea e er a aa raana ee a nas ached oh bias Ga 62 13 4 1 1 Example Editing the material database 0 ccecceeseesccesecesecesecseeeseeeeeeeeceseeeseeeseceeeceaecaeensenseenseenneeses 63 13 4 2 Lhe constructions database s 4 Avcs acca n en peach a a R tess ogee ee ats oes ahah ns EEEE AE E 65 13 4 2 1 Example Editing the construction database ccsccesecsseesseeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeeceeenseenseceseesaeenaeceeeseeeneeaes 66 13 5 The plant components database cscccsssccsscescs
341. ted between different file formats ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 13 6 1 1 Selecting a new event profiles database The simplest way to select a new event profiles database is by activating the menu item Db ust estu esp r databases profil cf Figure 53 Then the new path and filename of the database are typed in The number under this menu item indicates that the database contains 13 profiles 13 6 1 2 Establishing profiles Choose the menu item add a profile item in the Profiles manager menu cf Figure 53 and the number of periods in the profile has to be entered in the dialogue box e g 5 periods as in Figure 54 The user is then guided to the Profiles editing menu cf Figure 54 and the profile can be edited for the percentage of the sensible and latent loads for each period Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 74 Databases Profile editing Profile 4 Typical office occupancy a profile Typical office occup 100 007 no of events 5 event from to Isensiblel latent 80 004 es if 7 8 20 0 20 0 fF 2 8 9 60 0 60 0 P Gs y 9 12 100 0 100 0 e h 4 12 14 65 0 65 0 r 50 007 i 5 14 17 100 0 100 0 c g list current profile A 40 004 gt merge current profile into db Help Exit to main menu 20 0045 0 004 kid T T T F 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 Time hours Figure 54 The content of a typical representation of time dependent loads i
342. ted in the dialog box The name and data for gypsum is entered as Descr Gypsum Conductivity 0 25 W mK DS 418 2002 Density 900 kg m DS 418 2002 Specific Heat 1000 J kgK Bsim2002 Emissivity 0 91 Clarke 2001 Absorptivity 0 50 Clarke 2001 p 2 102 Lms Diffusion res DRF ae Pa s 210 m s Pa 1 cf formula 1 and Andersen et al 1993 The material definition is ended via the menu item exit The database needs to be updated in order to make the changes work for future modelling purposes The changes are updated via the menu item update construction element db in the Element Database menu cf Figure 44 This has to be done before exiting the database The materials Concrete reinf Concrete 1800 Linoleum iso kl 39 the glass ip6834nespc and clear_04gvb Aluminium dull white Pine fir 600 and wood block is also constructed cf appendix 1 for detail concerning input data A Warning To make changes in the database become effective the menu item update construction elements db in the Element Database menu cf Figure 44 must be activated before the facility is exited or the user is asked for an eventual updating while the menu is left Note An alternative option of installing a user database is to make a copy of an already existing material database cf the beginning of paragraph 13 4 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programm
343. tem calculate view scene cf Figure 107 The options available in this facility are shown in Figure 114 Visualisation scene ituc_Extern purposet External a scene parameter options render the scene view visualisation results or gt save scene information help return to main menu Figure 114 The available visualization and calculation option in the Radiance desktop module for making an external image ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The menu item scene parameter options in Figure 114 The parameter scene settings for an image and calculation can be checked and perhaps edited Parameter to be checked edited or changed are e Scene description is the sky file name glazing composition opaque material miscellaneous data outside and inside opaque composition e Image quality can be set to low medium or high e Detail level can be set to low for simple geometry medium if furniture and objects are included or high for complex geometry Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 e Light level variability can be set to low for uniform artificial light medium for diffuse skylight or high for direct sunlight e Diffuse reflectance can be set to direct artificial lighting system if reflectances from surfaces are important e g if the space is naturally lit direct or diffuse daylight Assume direct daylight unless the model contains lightshelfs an atrium or similar devices Radiance manual pages pp 105 110 e Resoluti
344. the building model becomes smaller Important The view information has to be saved by addressing the menu item save view info cf Figure 112 in order for definition and possible changes to be reflected in an upcoming visualisation study The menu item edit display grid in Figure 109 If a lighting analysis is to be performed by Radiance then this menu item will be included in the Radiance descriptions menu cf Figure 109 Grid point defined for an actual building zone can be changed to another elevation resolution surface or another zone can be used in the analysis The grid can also be set to the inside or outside face of a surface 21 1 2 Colour settings The reason for mentioning the different file suffixes is if the surface colours are to be altered from the default values the opaque material file mat has to be manually edited The surface colours specularity and its roughness values have and important influence among other things on the inter reflections the required lighting level and visual experience of the room The colour composition used is based on RGB red green and blue reflectance values expressed as a fraction 0 1 The surface specularity and its roughness values are also included and are expressed as fractions 0 1 Larson G W Shakespeare R 1997 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 142 Lighting analysis and visualization T
345. the climate database to a static insolation distribution for use in the shading insolation study e solar obstruction Shading patterns on external surfaces are generated via the use of obstruction blocks defined in this menu item e rotation amp transform The selected zone can be rotated its vertices transformed or mirrored e list surface details The data connected to the surfaces as area geographical orientation surface geometry type multilayer construction name and boundary conditions will be listed in the text feedback window Note The azimuth displayed as 0 or 360 is north 90 is east 180 is south and 270 is west The elevation displayed as 90 is the horizontal surface floor 0 is vertical surfaces and 90 is the horizontal surface roof cf Figure 69 leev e 4 ezi 4 e L Surl Area lAzimlElevl surface Igeometry l multilayer lenvironment m 2 Ideg Ideg name Itypellocl constr name lother side 1 27 00 180 0 South OPAQ VERT extern_wall I lt external 2 10 80 90 0 East OPAQ VERT extern_wall II lt external 3 27 00 0 0 North OPAQ VERT extern_wall I lt external 4 10 80 270 0 West OPAQ VERT extern_wall II lt external 5 40 00 O 90 Ceiling OPAQ CEIL roof_1 I lt external 6 40 00 0 90 Floor OPAQ FLOR floor_1 Il lt ground profile 1 Figure 69 An illustration of the azimuth and elevation used in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 14 1 3 Example Constructing zone geometry
346. the first component selected is duct_1 the containment type is set to Fixed temperature cf Figure 144 which is then set to 21 C The procedure is repeated for the other components and the fixed temperature is kept at 21 C Containments Component Containment descr Type Add Delete Copy Figure 143 The content of the Containments menu where the surrounding environment for the mechanical ventilation system can be defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Containments types a Ambient air temperature b A plant component temperature c Fixed temperature d Zone air surface const temperature Figure 144 The Containment types menu where the different types of containment data for the mechanical ventilation system can be selected ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 23 2 2 8 4 Linking the plant system to the fluid flow network The fluid flow network has to be defined before this can be carried out Before continuing with this paragraph carry out paragraph 23 2 1 5 and its sub paragraphs The nodal scheme for the defined plant amp system and the fluid flow network is presented in Figure 145 The red dots indicate the nodal scheme for the fluid flow network cf paragraph 23 2 1 5 and the blue dots indicated the nodal scheme for plant amp system network solution internal MA heater fanin cooler heat_coil cool_coil heat_ex sup_fan duct_1 outside SAAS ors LI duct_in internal_Nvy
347. the menu item Display period cf Figure 181 entering the day of the month the month and the time where the period starts as 9 6 1 then entering the day of the month the month and the time where the period ends as 9 6 24 the output time increment is set to 60 which is equal to one zone output per hour and it is selected not to show the average of the results over each output period Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 211 Result analysis Performance metrics 2 Result set 3 Display period 4 Select zones a Climate b Temperatures c Comfort metrics d Solar processes f Zone flux g Surface flux h Sensible amp latent i Zone RH j Casual gains m Electrical power n Network air wtr flow o CFD metrics p IPY metrics gt Display to gt gt screen amp Datat as values Filter gt gt none Time gt gt 10h30 Delim gt gt normal List data Help Exit Figure 181 The content of the Time step reports facility ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The different output is listed by subsequently selecting each item and then listing them when all items have been selected The procedure is described below e The cooling and heating load during the June 9 are added by selecting the menu item Sensible amp latent cf Figure 181 Sens heating load Sensible amp latent and Sens cooling load e The inside surface temperatures
348. the menu item database maintenance in the Entry Level menu in Figure 34 and event profiles in Figure 35 The path and filename of the relevant database has to be entered or the existing database profiles db1 can be accepted and the database chosen can be examined The pro module is activated a new window is opened and the chosen database is accepted The options for editing are as follows choose a new database list of the contents of the actual database add and edit a profile in the database cf Figure 53 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 73 Databases Profile manager 1 db usr esru esp r databases profil number of profiles 13 events description 1 100 Continuous casual gains O L Normal working day O L Mc s O L Mc s profile for late night Typical office occupancy Occupancy for late night office Typical factory gains profile Typical in term school occupancy Occupancy for late night school Typical domestic lighting O L Mc s for working household Occupancy of young family househ Occupancy within a typical hospi Occupancy profile for Atrium sha Serer ToOnMTD AO Ts aoOnmnraANrFPAOAaDOr ke add a profile list profiles in database convert db ASCII gt gt BINARY gt gt ASCIT help exit pro Figure 53 The Profile manger menu displaying the options in the event profiles database Within this menu profiles can be added listed edited or conver
349. the other side with a boundary condition The available boundary conditions are External Dynamic similar boundary The surface is connected to a zone not participating in the configuration but which environmentally conditions are identical to the zone The requested supplementary data for type of boundary condition is offset temperature C and the offset absorbed radiation W m from the adjacent zone Static boundary conditions The surface is connected to a zone which is not participating in the configuration but whose environmental conditions are known and constant The constant temperature C and absorbed radiation W m from the adjacent zone is required for type of boundary condition Surface in another zone The surface connects to a surface in another participating zone Ground The surface is in contact with the ground In this case the user may define one or more monthly profiles choose one of the existing pre installed profiles which can be listed in the text feedback window or choose a 3 D profile when choosing this boundary condition Adiabatic ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 An application within ESP r exists for automatic updates of surfaces boundary conditions in agreement with the above listed boundary conditions The tool is called connections amp anchors and is found in the Zones definition menu cf Figure 84 pp 110 The Topology menu in connection with the connections amp anch
350. therein used to define a zone property or plant component e Define the zone topology 4 After the definition of mandatory facilities additional model details can be added e It is a good idea to perform a simulation after the definition of each of the needed facilities listed in the next bullet points and appropriate design modification can be undertaken if the results differ from the theory and from what was expected e Surrounding site obstructions can be added to represent objects causing zone shading e Blind shutter control used to change a pane into another pane with different optical properties can be added e Shading insolation calculating time series data on external surface shading and or internal surface insolation can be added e Casual gain control containing information on the strategies on controlled casual gain can be added If specified it will supersede profiles defined in the zone operation facility e View factors for surfaces within a zone to improve long wave radiation calculations in a simulation can be added e Convection coefficients specifying zone surface convection values can be added If specified it will replace the values computed at simulation time on the basis of natural convection considerations e Flow domain specifying a 1 2 or 3 D grid and related parameters in support of a CFD simulation can be added 5 A simulation can be commenced A result analysis can be performed 7 If any kind of air flows
351. tics j detailed air flow combined thermal and electrical miscellaneous help exit this menu Figure 26 The Exemplar Sets menu with a list of different types of examples ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The user can examine and analyse these examples to gain knowledge on how different facilities can be modelled and also investigate what influence the actual facility have on the building model in a simulation The Example set menu appears after selecting the menu item exemplars in the Entry Level menu in Figure 27 Entry Level a introduction to esp r database maintenance o project definition c exemplars d select existing e commence new f export current model g archive current model h validation i reporting gt gt summary j tool set up help exit Project Manager Figure 27 The content of the Entry Level menu where the different databases can be found via the menu item database maintenance ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 43 Included examples in ESP r When an example is selected a simple analysis can be performed by selecting the button browse in the dialog box cf Figure 28 When using this option one can not save changes to the example It is also possible to save a copy of the example in the home folder with the button own it in the dialog box cf Figure 28 where changes can be made
352. tio kontor _ 3 44G zoneair duct 2 air node 1 zone ambient 1 0 duct 2 air node 1 duct 3 air node 1 to another component 1 0 duct_3 air node 1 duct 4 air node 1 to another component 1 0 duct_3 air node 1 ret fan air node 1 to another component 1 0 ret_fan air node 1 heat _ex air node 2 to another component 1 0 23 2 2 8 3 Adding containment data The containment data as described in paragraph 23 2 2 4 is in this paragraph set to a fixed temperature since the whole mechanical ventilation system is not placed in connection to the zone but will be placed in the hallway and has no direct heat loss to the zone The heat loss from the ventilation system to the hallway has no influence on the temperature of the hallway since the temperature of the inlet air to the hallway is kept at a constant level 21 C and from this the air temperature is kept at approximately 21 C If the hallway was included in the modelling the containment data could have been set to the zone hallway The containment data for each component is added via selecting the menu item Containment in the Network definition edit menu cf Figure 137 The containment data for the components are added Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 182 Networks via the menu item Add Delete Copy cf Figure 143 Add the components are selected in succession and
353. tion and hydronic network This network consists of nodes connections and a wind reduction factor The two networks are linked together in order to simulate the system as close as possible to a real system in which building plant and flows are represented A representation of the two modelled networks is displayed in Figure 14 The red dots indicate the nodal scheme for ventilation and hydronic network and the blue dots indicated the nodal scheme for plant system network solution Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 22 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 internal_NVvv41 heater fan_in cooler heat_coil cool_coil heat_ex sup_fan duct_1 outside HBAS eS a Fd duct in internal _NA2 gt external Ny tak tags duct_4 duct_3 duct_2 eo le kiekie e kontor_3 44G fan_out duct_out Figure 14 Diagrammatic representation of the building and network configured The red dots indicate the nodal scheme for ventilation and hydronic network and the blue dots indicated the nodal scheme for the plant system network solution The connection and component used to represent the air flow through the lower part of the window is the two nodes kontor_3 44G and external NW and the flow component is represented by an area and a discharge factor The results for the air flow through the lower part of the bottom window with an on off control and a set point tempera
354. tion is referenced from ESRU Manual 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 113 Zone operations except during lunch 1200 to 1300 where the load is set to 0 The questions after the selection of Weekdays are answered according to Table 22 Table 22 Data entered for the casual gain type people In the morning In the afternoon Start and finish hour 8 12 13 17 Gain is specified as Watts Watts Sensible and latent gains W 95 45 95 45 Radiant amp convective fraction 0 2 0 8 0 2 0 8 When all the casual gains has been added the casual gains menu has the same appearance as seen from Figure 86 The menu item update air flow amp casual gains from the Zone operation menu cf Figure 83 is issued to update the changes made within the zone operation file 17 The sensible and latent gains is referenced from ESRU Report 2001 This is similar to sendentary office work ESRU Manual 2002 and differs from the data given in the Bsim200 tutorial 18 The radiant and convective fraction is referenced from ESRU Manual 2002 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 114 Zone topology 17 Zone topology The topology is included in a surface connection file cnn The topology is the glue which holds a simulation problem together Each surface in a zone has one face associated with the zone and
355. to any datum level as long as the same datum level is used for all nodes in the network cf Figure 124 23 2 1 2 Description of fluid flow components A flow component the menu item component in the Fluid Flow Network menu in Figure 123 is described with its name type and code indicating if the component is a duct pipe pump crack and etc number of supplementary data items and number of additional linkage data items associated with the type of component Hensen 1991 A certain component can be used as many times as necessary and it only has to be defined once A component is not restricted to a certain position in a building or plant but the flow through the component and the connected node identifies the associated gains or loses in the network The supported fluid flow component types can be found in Figure 125 and to make it easier to select the correct component for each purpose for people who are not ventilation experts a description of their purposes are described below Figure 125 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 164 Networks Component type amp description 10 Power law vol flow component m rho a dP b 15 Power law mass flow component m a dP b 17 Power law mass flow component m a rho 5 dP b 20 Quadratic law vol flow component dP a m rhotb m rho 2 25 t Quadratic law mass flow component dP a mtb m 2 30 Constant vol flow rate component m
356. total absorptance for the whole shaded pane Table 15 Output data from WIS 2 0a Test03 The data which is to be implemented in ESP r can be found via the buttons Report Create in WIS 2 0a Test03 List with the relevant data from the created Data Inserted in ESP r under report in WIS 2 0a Test03 t_vis_i at an angel of incidence of 0 0 19 visible transmission at 0 abs 1 abs 3 abs 5 0 47 solar abs amp refl for docu r_sol_o for solar refl 0 45 Both at an angel of incidence of 0 U value 0 869 U value for docu t_sol_i at an angel of incidence of 0 40 55 70 0 094 0 26 direc trn and 80 0 27 0 098 0 033 g val at an angel of incidence of 0 40 55 70 0 11 0 051 heat gain doc and 80 0 047 0 042 0 036 abs 1 corresponding to the blind at an angel of 0 47 0 40 040 refrac abs 0 abs 80 incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 0 38 0 36 abs 3 corresponding to glass number 2 at an angel 0 004 0 0016 refrac abs 0 abs 80 of incidence of 0 40 55 70 and 80 0 0014 0 0012 0 00099 The refraction index is typically 1 52 for glass and 1 00 for gasses The values of absorptance for the gasses are normally set 0 001 at all angle of incidence 13 7 3 3 Edit profiles in the optical database The idea in editing profiles can be to add or remove panes and shading to make the profile live up to other optical properties The idea can also be to ch
357. tribution c constructions d operation Topology 6 connections e connections amp anchors Options shading amp insolation convection calculations view factors amp radiant sensors casual gains control computational fluid dynamics adaptive gridding amp moisture roe FO nh Special components building integrated renewables m active materials 3 global tasks help exit this menu Figure 66 The content of the Zones Definition menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 This menu cf Figure 66 provides facilities to define zone level data including geometry and surface attributes constructions schedules shading and isolation casual gain control convection calculations view factors and etc It also supports the definition of zones boundary conditions 14 1 1 Composition status The menu item composition status cf Figure 66 allows the user to select an existing zone and view a list of both mandatory and optional files for the zone The geometry file cf paragraph 14 1 2 the construction file cf paragraph 15 and the operation file cf paragraph 16 needs to be Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 92 Definition of zones defined in order to proceed with building model simulations The path to the files can be changed and it is possible to alter between different files for simulation purposes If a facility e g a casual gain control
358. ts O d Components No of connections 20 e Connections No of containments tO f Containments No of comp electrical data 0 g Electrical data No of linked zones e301 i Link plant to zone s Update plant config file Help Exit Figure 137 The content of the Network definition edit menu which appears via the menu item plant amp systems in the Model Definition menu The numbers is parenthesis describe the number of items included in the different menu items ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 23 2 2 8 1 Adding components Components are added via the menu item Component in the Network definition edit menu cf Figure 137 The menu item Component is selected for creation of a duct a new component is added via the menu item Add Delete Copy cf Figure 138 Add the component is for a mechanical ventilation system and the menu item air condition is selected cf Figure 139 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 179 Networks Components Name lref no Type Add Delete Copy Help Exit Figure 138 The content of the Component menu where components can be added deleted or copied ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Component type air conditioning wet central heating primitive part solar and others Figure 139 The different component types available in ESP r ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 200
359. ture as listed in Table 5 is illustrated in Figure 15 Table 5 Day type periods and set point temperature for the natural ventilation through the bottom window Day type Period Set point for opening of the lower window hr C Weekdays 0 8 18 8 17 23 17 24 18 Saturday 0 24 18 Sunday 0 24 18 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 23 Which program to use ESP r or Bsim2002 Lib ituc nrlt Results for ituc Period Mon 9 Jun 00h59 tot Mon 16 Jun 23h59 Year 2003 sim im output 1m I kontor gt extern m 3 s 25 0 T 0 01 20 0 0 02 0 02 0 03 0 03 0 04 0 04 0 05 0 05 5 0 0 06 0 06 0 06 0 0 0 07 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Time Hrs Figure 15 The illustration of the zone node dry bulb temperature kontor_3 44G db T C and the volume flow m3 s rate from the zone node kontor _3 44G to the outside via the lower part of the window kontor gt extern m 3 s ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Flows kgs 4e 08 15 0 ontor_3 446 db T oD3 0 MO 0 Noticeable from Figure 15 is that the window only opens when the zone node temperature rises above 23 C during office hours 0800 1700 and when the zone node temperature rises above 18 C outside office hours The volume flow rate through the top part of the window is not included in Figure 15 but is equal to the flow rate through the lower part
360. ty level is changed to 1 2 MET by selecting the menu item Activity level cf Figure 191 the button MET unit in the dialog box and entering 1 2 4 A temperature index that accounts for radiative and latent heat transfers ESRU Homepage glossary 35 PMV is derived from the physics of heat transfer combined with an empirical fit to sensation PMV represents a new temperature index that incorporates skin wettedness into the PMV equation using SET or ET to characterize the environment SET numerically represents the thermal strain experienced by the cylinder relative to a standard person in a standard environment SET has the advantage of allowing thermal comparisons between environments at any combination of the physical input variables but the disadvantage of also requiring standard people ESRU Homepage tutotial_5 ET represents the new effective temperature which evolves with time rather than being steady state ESRU Homepage glossary Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 220 Result analysis e The output is set to a file since it is not possible to change the zone time step hour from 1 to 60 for displaying the indoor environment during office hours The menu item Output gt gt is selected in Figure 191 and the file name is kept as data grt The performance metrics is achieved by selecting the menu item Assess average comfort and for the file data
361. u in Figure 92 the calculation is performed and do now is selected in the dialog box and yes is answered to use the kontor_3 44G as the root transitional shading file name The shading is calculated by selecting the menu item Calculate shading cf Figure 96 all applicable surfaces beginning with month 1 ok ending with month 12 and ending with ok The insolation is calculated by selecting the menu item Predict insolation cf Figure 96 all applicable surfaces sequence of month s beginning with month 1 ok ending with month 12 ok and no is answered to provide synopsis of insolation Both the shading and insolation are calculated and can be viewed via the menu items View shading patterns and View insolation respectively cf Figure 96 The shading pattern displayed in Figure 98 for the surface NW_win_low is accomplished by selecting the menu item View shading patterns Draw surf shading month number 7 ok for the surface NW_win_low and exit It is here after possible to specify an hour in the day of the month judged to be closet to the average of the month or to analyse the shading on that fa ade for consecutive hours in that day The tabular insolation data in Figure 99 is accomplished by selecting the menu item View insolation cf Figure 96 the button list file content in the dialog box yes to further details month number 7 ok and no to further detail
362. ual is not to read it from the start to the end but to use it as a work of reference when working with ESP r and when different facilities within ESP r are to be addressed and understood It can also be used for people to get a quick start using the program rather than spending days weeks or months trying to figure out how it works In order to appreciate the content of the manual one must use ESP r and the manual at the same time Another purpose of the thesis is to outline guidance for selecting the most suitable program for different design projects and finally includes a comparison on the possibilities with ESP r and the Danish developed building simulation program Bsim2002 The examples presented in this manual are a description of a complete building model If the included examples are put together the outcome is a one person office in the IT University of Copenhagen The modelling of the same building is described in the Bsim2000 tutorial and it is mentioned when the included examples differ from the tutorial The differences are made to illustrate the various possibilities of using ESP r It is not an aim to compare results simulated for the same building using the two mentioned programs since this is a time consuming project of its own See for instance International Energy Agency Annex 21 and Solar Heating and Cooling Programme Task 12 Lomas et al Sep 1994 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especiall
363. uce the program and to provide training guidance The manual comprise essential reading material on the program structure how to make an effective use of the program information and references on the validation studies of the program machine environment exercises and etc The exercises included in the existing manual superficially describe what to do in the program in order to construct a simple building model but do not in detail describe how to do it In order to follow the outline of the existing manual for ESP r one must have basic to detailed knowledge on the program which can be obtained from solving exercises and study the on line tutorial on the homepage www esru strath ac uk or via courses in ESP r at the University of Strathclyde The manual also has a lack of information on how to build up detailed networks plant systems and lighting control The existing manual is therefore not sufficient as a work of reference in learning how to use the program and therefore a more detailed step by step manual that also describes detailed systems is needed in order for students and design engineers to implement the use of and to appreciate the program within a short period of time Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 1 Introduction 1 2 Purpose The purpose of the thesis is to make a manual for ESP r version 10 4 published on 23 Dec 2002 that describes the use of the program in steps whi
364. uction UNKNOWN b General typet Opaque c Optical properties OPAQUE No of layerst 1 0 2500m thick d Linked with Layer PrimlThickl Description Idb fm of material i Fae l 1 6 250 Paviour Brick Standard U valuet 2 28 add or delete a layer help exit this menu Figure 48 The content of a new construction in the Construction editing menu in the construction database The material paviour brick is added as a default material ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The construction of the external wall for ITUC building is described in paragraph 12 1 is done by selecting the following menu items in Figure 48 e Construction The name is entered 1125C80 General type The type of construction is set to Opaque e Optical properties This menu item is only needed for totally transparent constructions and is therefore ignored e Linked with This menu item is only needed for partitions cf paragraph 13 4 2 1 4 e 110 250 Paviour brick The default material Paviour brick in a new construction needs to be changed to the glass material ip6834nespc which is the outer glass in the shadow box in the external wall The menu item 1 1 0 250 Paviour brick in Figure 48 is activated and the user has two options in the dialog box manually locate the material in the material database or to enter the relevant material reference number for Prim db number The glass material ip6834nespc is manually located in the material database None
365. uilding simulation programmes especially ESP r 29 Installation of ESP r and Radiance Library path setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ust esru esp r lib Set fonts setenv EFONT_O 6x12 setenv EFONT_1 6x13 setenv EFONT_2 8x13 setenv EFONT_3 9x15 Note Note that the path usr may have to be replaced with the actual path the directory esru if ESP r is installed in a different place on the system The login file is located in the same directory as cshrc and profile 10 Examples of the login cshrc files and more is located in the directory usr esru src esp r env and appendix 7 for working cshrc and bash_profile files 11 The file usr esru esp r default contain standard set up for climate files control files etc These settings can be changed to suit the relevant data for the actual locality 12 The directory usr esru src esp r validation QA contain programs which can control if the installation is performed correctly Consult the Readme file in this directory for guidance It is often seen that the test seems to halt in the same procedure and never finish The error message is You can NOT write in the folder and the reason for the messages is that the Linux user does not have the rights to write to this directory If it is necessary to perform the test then the folder benchmark_model has to be copied to a place on the system where the user has writing access 13 Before the changes to the dot files bash_profile e
366. uire about menu ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The Enquire about menu is used for illustration of the energy delivered to the zone kontor_3 44G and zone energy balance The displaying dates are set via the menu item Display period cf Figure 183 to be within the whole year 1 1 from 0100 to 31 12 at 2400 2003 The energy delivered to the zone kontor_3 44G can be listed by selecting the menu item energy delivered cf Figure 183 and the zone energy balance can be listed by selecting the menu item Zone energy balance cf Figure 183 integrated over time and then gain loss The selected types of output will be displayed separately and the output is listed in Figure 184 and Figure 185 Libs ituc res Results for ituc Period Wed 1 Jan 00h59 tot Wed 31 Dec 23h59 Yeart2003 sim im output 1m Zone total sensible and latent plant used klwhrs Zone Sensible heating Sensible cooling Humidification Dehumidification id name Energy No of Energy No of Energy No of Energy No of kWhrs He rad kllhrs Hr rqad klhes Hr rqad klhrs Hr rad 1 kontor_3 446 2408 09 6541 9 104 82 2218 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 0 0 All 2408 09 104 82 0 00 0 00 Figure 184 The content of the Enquire about facility and the illustration of the energy delivered to the zone ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 As can be seen from Figure 184 2408 kWhrs and 6542 hours is used for heating the ventilation inlet air to keep the zone dry bulb temperature at min
367. ulation This function can automatically compute the pressure distribution coefficients of simple building forms which minimizes the amount of information retrieval and calculation work via other programs To apply the option first the menu item pressure coef calcs CpCalc must be used in the Site Information list cf Figure 21 pp 37 This is found by choosing the menu item model context in the Model Definition list cf Figure 42 Model Definition id bld_basic cfg in folder usr esru esp r tr b registration details c model context d upgrade from older format a e composition f visualisation Networks___ 0 included g plant amp systems h vent hydronic i electrical Controls___ 1 included j zones 1 loops k plant amp systems l m vent hydronic global system n define uncertainties Actions o simulation p results analysis q reporting save model help exit this menu Figure 42 The Model Definition list which includes model context ESP r version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Under the menu item pressure coef calcs CpCalc the overall outer dimensions of the building width depth and height are to be typed in as well as the co ordinates to the Southwesterly corner of the overall outer dimension Equally the orientation of the building the roof type and the pitch of the roof are to be typed in The user can also type in data of the surroundings D Important Save the mode
368. uld like to use the inside surface areas although it is easy to see that in case of a cube it is in this context of no consequence whether you use construction inside or centre line dimensions ESRU Homepage FAQ It is recommended to use internal dimensions and add the linear thermal transmittance to the U value for constructions Important Certain conventions regarding vertices are used in ESP r The vertices are entered anticlockwise seen from the outside and clockwise seen from the inside After defining the zone it is saved in a geometry file geo held in the zones folder and the zone is represented in the Graphic feedback window cf Figure 67 and the control option menu changes to the Composition menu cf Figure 68 Surface attributions name constructions opacity and boundary conditions 7 A general polyhedra enclosure is appropriate for a complex shape One defines a set of vertices and link them together to form surfaces Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 93 Definition of zones Figure 67 The graphical representation of a constructed zone ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 Zone 1 Composition a name reception b desc reception describes 4 origin amp 1 6 1 4 4 4 volume 144 48m 3 c base floor area 48 68m 2 opaque constr 182 66m 2 transp constr 14 66m 2 d vertex coordinates 34 e surface list amp edges
369. ult facility scsccssssscssscssssssessscssssssesssssssnssesssseesssessessesssessesssesscnsesnsesesees 208 26 2 Example The time step report facility ccsccsssssscscccssssssscesessecsscesssssssccessssescscesssssssessescesssesseseessoeees 211 26 3 Example The enquire about result facility ssccsscsscsssesssssssssssssssesscssssssssssssessssssssssesscnsessseesesnsesssees 213 26 4 Example The network air and water flow results facility ssccsscsscssscsscsssssssccssssssssesssesssessssessseeees 215 26 5 Example The indoor air quality result facility csscsscssssssssssssssssssessssssssesssessssssssssesecnsessssssesesesesees 219 27 DISCUSSION ios ssccisiccsccs aea ar aaa ar a a A a a aa e aaa A EAA aap 222 27 1 OVANLAGES E E E A E T 222 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r viii Table of Contents 272 Disadvantages eins asc viv tacos dasacabspiutivit bccn datos a a 222 27 3 Possible solutions to the disadvantages Of ESP r sssscsssssssssssesssessssseessnsecssssesssnscsssnecssssnecsssnecsssnecssseeesssecs 223 28 CONCLUSION oca ironii creena rasere arpea paee aperea pea Eea eS re EE E eE NE e EESE 226 29 LIS TOF SYMBOL E E E 227 30 REFERENCES zp a a a e a a aea e eenaa ER 229 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r ix Table of Contents appendices Table of Contents appendices
370. ure t air mean radiant temperature t mrt relative humidity rel h standard effective temperature SET Predicted Mean Vote PMV and PMV Predicted Percent of Dissatisfied PPD and comfort assessment based on PMV As seen from Figure 191 the CLO value activity level air velocity and occupancy has to be adjusted to the values regarding school work According to CR 1752 1998 the metabolic rate for sedentary work is 1 2 and CLO values for work clothing underpants shirt trousers socks and shoes is 0 75 The average air velocity is kept at 0 1m s and the occupancy is by default set to based on time Comfort assessment a Zonet kontor_3 446 b Day amp month t 1 1 c MRT gt gt default d CLO value 0 70 e Activity level 90 0 f Air velocity 0 1 g Occupancy time based 1 Assess average comfort 2 Assess local comfort gt Output gt gt screen Help Exit Figure 191 The content of the Comfort assessment menu where the CLO value the activity level air velocity and occupancy can be defined ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The displaying period for analysing the indoor environment can only be set to a whole day at the time and is set to the 9 6 This is done by selecting the menu item Day amp month cf Figure 191 gt and entering the day of the month and the month as 9 6 e The CLO value is changed to 0 75 by selecting the menu item CLO value cf Figure 191 and entering 0 75 e The activi
371. ure based on ray tracing Including such sensors can help predict the risk for a poor indoor environment in offices with large glazed areas e Couple ESP r and Radiance where Radiance is used as a third party illuminance solver Radiance can be used to produce photo realistic images to predict light distribution in models and to present designs to clients Radiance can also be used for calculating daylight coefficients for use in a simulation and to perform a direct coupling with Radiance as an illuminance solver in an ESP r simulation Both options give a good possibility to control the use of artificial lighting e Perform daylight calculations in five minutes time steps Besides construction the geometry in the Project Manager of ESP r another possibility exists which makes it possible to import detailed models from AutoCAD v 14 to ESP r e Simulate building models and plant systems at different time steps e g in steps of 1 5 or 60 minutes e The ranges of result analyses are essentially unrestricted and data can be exported to other analysis and graphing tools Based on the above mentioned points one can conclude that detailed calculations are performed during simulations The program is also well documented and both the documentation and the program can be downloaded from the home page http Awww esru strath ac uk The source code for the program can be changed or new facilities can be included from users 27 2 Disadvantages It was
372. ure of ESP r and Radiance in paragraph 6 but will also be presented when the climate database and lighting control are described in paragraph 13 2 and 22 Text and data entry in editing files is shown in this type of words A terminal is the same as a dos window with a dos prompt in windows workstations Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 11 Document conventions Example Add the line PATH PATH HOME bin ust estu bin usr esru esp r bin to the file bash_profile cf Figure 10 H Per localhost Skal Konsol Session Redig r Vis Ops tning Hj lp bash_profile Get the aliases and functions if f bashre J then 7 bashrc fi User specific environment and startup programs setenv RAYPATH 1 usr esru lib Radiance PATH PATH HOME bin home Per esp r bint usr esru bint usr esru esp r bint usr esru bin Radiance export PATH RAYPATH unset USERNAME Figure 10 The content of the bash_profile listed with the command less bash_profile in a terminal The headline listed in the control option menu in ESP r All the control option menus in ESP r have a headline The control option menu appears in the right side of the ESP r window and the control option menu Composite Construction db is shown in Figure 11 Composite Constuctions db a extern_wall OPAQUE b insul_mtl_p OPAQUE co intern mall OPAAIIF Figure 11 A part
373. ure of convective and radiant input for radiative heaters 24 1 1 Modelling of zones control The purpose of this facility is to model a strictly ideal heating and or cooling system without defining the entire network of ducts pumps heating coil cooling coil etc But when for example a ventilation system with heating and cooling coil is defined and linked to the zone the modelling of zones control is necessary in order for the temperature of the inlet air to have an effect on the zone The latter is the case and the modelling of the needed zone control is described in 24 1 1 1 and the content of the facility is similar to the description in paragraph 24 1 Note Only one control loop can be associated to a zone in the menu item zones control 24 1 1 1 Example defining a coupling between the mechanical ventilation system and the zone for indoor temperature control A zone control facility is included when the mechanical ventilation system is linked to the zone cf paragraph 23 2 2 8 5 for a description of the linkage The menu item zones 1 loops is selected from the Model Definition menu cf Figure 148 gt and the control file is named ituc ctl placed in the ctl folder and is typed as ctl ituc ctl The definition of the heating and cooling system which is included for the ventilation system differ from the Bsim2000 tutorial in respect to control control law period of validity time and etc Paragraph 24 1 2 describe
374. values are the differences of the plane radiant temperature values of opposite faces Guido et al 1988 Both the mean radiant temperature and vector radiant temperature are given as output when the calculation is based on MRT sensor view factors the menu item calc sensor viewfactors in Figure 103 and inter surface view factors the menu item calc MRT using viewfactors in Figure 103 The menu item comfort calculations in Figure 103 has not been yet included in the view factor module A Warning Remember to update the view factor file in order to save the changes for an upcoming simulation When calculating view factors based on possible ray tracing method then also remember to choose the use new data button in the dialog box when exiting this facility in order to use the changes for an upcoming simulation 20 2 Example adding two MRT sensors and calculating MRT sensor view factors This is not included in the Bsim2000 tutorial and in the Bsim2002 program package The purpose of this facility is to add two MRT sensors represented by points with the dimensions 0 01x0 01x0 01 m in the room The first MRT sensor is located 1 metre from the window and the second sensor is located approximately 3 metres from the window Both sensors are located with an equal distance to the two partitions NE_part and SW_ part Both sensors are placed in a height of 1 1 metres Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially
375. ver time and space dimensions These equations are essentially time averaged heat and mass conservation statements The resulting plant matrix is then solved simultaneously for each simulation time step The plant system matrix is the system linking protocol and so a number of the problems associated with the sequential approach are overcome Hensen 1991 A plant amp systems network has to comprise component and connections but can also comprise containments data electrical data links to the fluid flow network and link to zones The nodes used in the plant amp systems facility represent components and the energy consumption for each of these components can be analysed The plant amp system facility establish a plant network description file pnf where the plant amp system definition is held The facility can be accessed via the menu item plant amp systems in the Model Definition menu cf Figure 122 A menu interface for the definition of the plant amp systems cf Figure 135 is used in this manual Network definitiontedit a Problem name t nets ituc pln b Simulation type Energy two phase c Project title No of components tO d Components No of connections Qi e Connections No of containments f 00 f Containments No of comp electrical data 0 g Electrical data No of linked zones Oma Be i Link plant to zone s Update plant config file Help Exit Figure 135
376. version ratio outside air ambient heat_ex air node 1 zone amb 1 0 heat _ex air node 1 heat coil air node 1 to another component 1 0 heat_coil air node 1 sup fan air node 1 to another component 1 0 sup fan air node 1 cool coil air node 1 to another component 1 0 cool coil air node 1 duct 1 air node 1 to another component 1 0 To represent a connection between the supply and return duct in connection to the zone kontor_3 44G the menu item Connections is selected for creation of this connection A new component is added via the menu item add delete copy cf Figure 142 Add the receiving component for the connection is set to the component duct_2 the connection type is set to From building zone air from the zone kontor_3 44G since the component duct_2 receives air from a zone the duct is on the return part of the plant system and the component which supplies the air to the zone must be specified and is set to duct_1 the mass diversion ration is set to 1 0 The rest of the components are added via the same procedure as described above Table 30 and the needed component names and data is listed in Table 31 Table 31 The components and their data used to represent the air flow network from the zone kontor_3 44G to the outside Sending Atnode to Receiving At node Connection type Mass component component diversion ra
377. works and plant amp Systems scsccsssssssssssscssssssscssscssscssssssssssessesnsessssssesesenesssesssessecsssssesssessonsesssessseesens 8 2 5 Dat aD asec ciccssis scscvccsssvsscesnossvdaecnsts sonbessussonestenaabosevesunes te snconsSeccescstansswesevsuestweecenkesSeasevandescibesnudsewesdenpbeoveeduacsteassesas 8 2 6 Time requirements novice and expert cssccssccscesscsssccrsssscessccrscsscesssssssesessssssssesssscsssssssssesesssssesessssesees 9 3 DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS wxccccicsessccctve costco ec tenieeck cect aeeters eck fect hech tees nnmnnn nnmnnn 11 4 WHICH PROGRAM TO USE ESP R OR BSIM2002 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 4 1 Relevant questions in selecting the best program for the PUrpOSe scccscsssssscesesesscssssssssssssssesseeseess 14 4 2 The capability of ESP r and Bsim2002 within building energy simulation scsscsssssssssesssssrseseees 15 4 2 1 The building energy simulation program ESP r ccceccecccesccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeseceseeseceaeeesecseeeeeeneeees 15 4 2 2 The building energy simulation program Bsim2002 0 cecccesceeseeeseesceeseeeseeeeeeeeceecesecnsecesecaecesecaeeaeeeneeees 16 4 3 ESP r ys BStm 2002 sicsscsscsssdsascesscocsersnsasenshsessensusensacessessnsvaseasageasence deaseadecontesveseaseadhcossedendendenseasncenssssvsvaseedeoussd 17 4 3 1 Examples displaying areas where ESP r is superior to Bsim2002 00 ccsccescesecsceeseeeeeeseee
378. y ESP r 2 Introduction 1 3 Method The method used writing the thesis has been based on studying relevant literature on the subject as the ESRU Manual 2002 Ph D thesis reports general background theory help functions in ESP r articles and etc The essence of the different literature explaining the content of the program background and theory of the calculation methods which helps understanding ESP r is summarily described and referenced as the author of this thesis understands it The methods used referencing to literature is described in paragraph 3 A course in ESP r and a visit to ESRU Energy System Research Unit at the University of Strathclyde where the program is developed has given much knowledge on the program A lot of the text in this thesis where there are no references is based on background knowledge using the different facilities entering data and observing the outcome of the selections made The literature studied focuses on the calculation procedures used in the program and this literature is not good enough to use as a manual when working with ESP r It is assumed that the described calculation procedures in the studied literature are implemented in the source code and used in simulations in the program The performed validation of the manual is based on trust that the studied calculations methods are included in the source code for the program but with misunderstandings are taken into account The source co
379. y that is the result of the extremes of the climate that people experience over a period of the year The index is a scale from 0 to 100 where 0 is experienced as least severe and 100 is experienced as the most severe Canadian institute for climate studies home page 6 find typical weeks Here typical weeks that are consistent with the heating and cooling criteria defined by the user d Graphical analysis Periods for different climate parameters that can be analysed graphically cf Figure 39 Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 55 Databases Graphical analysis a set period b dry bulb temperature c direct normal solar d diffuse solar e wind speed m s f wind direction deg g relative humidity 2 draw graph j reset axis scale k refresh current graph l clear current items Figure 39 The content of the Graphical analysis menu where periods for different climate parameters that can be graphically analysed ESP r Version 10 4 23 Dec 2002 The procedure for using this facility is determined via several tests and is illustrated in the list below which references to menu items in Figure 39 1 set period Choice of the survey period which can be user defined monthly seasonal or annual 2 b g Choose the type of climate to be analysed 3 1 Here the graph can be drawn renewed and the data already chosen can be deleted Equally the axes can
380. ype is selected in the Radiance desktop module the sky distribution file name is confirmed the menu item Generate sky description is selected to create the sky distribution file and exit Investigation and implementation of building simulation programmes especially ESP r 157 Casual gain control Lighting control The menu item zone amp outside composition cf Figure 108 Generate description is thereafter selected cf Figure 117 and the filenames for glazing properties if a blind shutter facility is included in the model then create the alternative glazing properties opaque material properties inside composition and outside composition properties are confirmed The obstructions are also included if they are defined Note The Radiance desktop facility is closed down and the lighting simulation is performed when a simulation within ESP r is initiated Before commencing simulation a terminal is opened in order to control if the line rif ituc rcf is include in the ituc cfg file located in cfg folder If the line is not included then add the line after the line beginning with year via the editor program vi The calculation usually takes many hours and it is therefore advised to perform the simulation on a relatively powerful computer 22 2 2 Radiance pre calculated daylight coefficient for use in a simulation The daylight coefficient method is based on the Tragenza method which subdivides the sky vault into

Mandatory facilities of ESP-r

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents